JP2019093304A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of further enhancing fun of a game.SOLUTION: A performance control part outputs a performance sound under a predetermined condition during variation display of a pattern, can execute a first performance for instructing operation at timing related to the outputted performance sound and a performance for reporting information regarding whether a special game is executed, outputs a performance sound during a special game executed following a stop of a pattern for indicating determination of execution of a special game in a pattern variation when the first performance is executed, instructs operation at timing related to the outputted performance sound, and can execute a second performance for reporting information regarding a type of a special game under execution according to operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-11

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, Patent Document 1 relates to a gaming machine having a gaming device capable of generating a special gaming state and control means for performing transition control to a special gaming state game based on the occurrence of the special gaming state by the gaming device. The means can control the probability of becoming a special gaming state in the gaming apparatus to a low probability state which is disadvantageous to the player and a high probability state which is advantageous to the player, and a predetermined condition in the game is achieved. And a notification means for notifying the player of the high probability state of the probability fluctuation control means, provided with the probability fluctuation control means for changing and controlling the occurrence probability to be the special gaming state from the low probability state to the high probability state. Disclosed is a gaming machine characterized by

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 08-318030

By the way, how to feel the enjoyment of the game changes depending on the game state, and also it becomes a judgment material as to whether or not to continue the game. Therefore, by setting a gaming state which is not conventional, it becomes possible to make the gaming characteristics different from before, and it is possible to make the player feel various expectations for the gaming.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of further enhancing the amusement of a game.

  The means for solving the problem is a determination means (b200, b234, b234) for determining whether or not the special game advantageous to the player is to be executed when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. The player has a judgment result notification means (b300) for displaying the result of the judgment by the judgment means (b200, b234, b234) in the display part (b114) and notifying the result of the judgment, and the operation part (b161P) Operation means (b161, h26) capable of operating the operation unit (b161P) and an instruction display for instructing the operation of the operation means (b161, h26) in the predetermined display period on the image display unit (b114) The operation term display unit (b300) to be displayed, and the operation unit (b161, h26) are provided, and are effective periods set shorter than the display period. And notifying means (b161L) for notifying that the effective period is underway in the informing period corresponding to the operation section (b161P) of the operation means (b161, h26) being operated in the effective period. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect which suggests the result of the judgment by the judgment means (b200, b234, b234) under the condition, and output the effect sound under the predetermined condition during the fluctuation display of the symbol, and It is possible to execute a first effect instructing to perform an operation at a timing related to an effect sound to be output, and an effect notifying information on whether or not to execute the special game, and the first effect is executed. During the special game that is executed following the stop of the symbol indicating that it has been determined that the special game is to be executed in the symbol variation when played, the effect sound is output. As well as to instruct to perform the operation at a timing associated with the effect sound is output, in response to the operation, it is capable of executing a second effect of notifying the information about the type of special game running.

  Note that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this section are exemplarily given in the description of the present invention, and the present invention is not reduced by the reference numerals.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. (A) is an enlarged view which shows an example of the indicator arrange | positioned by the lower right of the game board, (b) is a partial top view of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing functional composition of a game control part of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main operation | movement of the game control part of this Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of starting opening switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of gate switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of special symbol processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of jackpot judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of change pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of processing under stop. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of customer waiting setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of normal symbol processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of special winning opening process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of game state setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of electric tulip processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big hit random number used by this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot symbol random number. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of reach random number, (b) is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit random number. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of a production | presentation control part, (a) is a figure which shows main processing, (b) is a figure which shows interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of command reception processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a mode flag. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the production | presentation selection process of FIGS. 1-19. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of the processing under change production end of Drawing 1-19. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the hit production | presentation selection processing of FIG. 1-19. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of ending effect selection processing of Drawing 1-19. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process of FIGS. 1-19. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of production button processing. It is a block diagram explaining the example of composition of RAM of a game control part. It is a block diagram explaining the example of composition of RAM of a production control part. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used by prior determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used by prior determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used by prior determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of prior determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of operation of a production control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the prior determination command reception process. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of production execution command reception processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of lighting number increase production command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the production control processing in a production control part. It is a figure explaining the concrete 1st mode of lighting number increase presentation. It is a figure explaining the concrete 2nd mode of lighting number increase presentation. It is a figure explaining the concrete 3rd mode of lighting number increase presentation. It is a figure explaining the concrete 4th mode of lighting number increase presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the presentation button in a 2nd example of a form. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the reception process of the alerting | reporting command by a production control part. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding ball display displayed on an image display part. It is a figure for explaining pre-reading notice production. It is a timing chart for explaining operation indication display and information concerning an effective period. It is a figure explaining the special production in the 3rd example of a form. It is a figure showing the example of composition of special production. It is a flowchart which shows the operation example of a presentation control part. It is a flowchart which shows the operation example of an image / sound control part. It is a figure explaining opening control of the big winning a prize opening at the time of the big hit game in the 4th example of a form. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the game control of the big hit which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and the production control of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the example of an image displayed on an image display part by end display production. It is a figure explaining the contents of end display production concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of the special production in the 5th example of a form. It is a figure which shows a mode that it transfers to special production after omen production. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the presentation image displayed on an image display part. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control procedure of a special production and a prognostic production. It is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous advance notice scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol presentation pattern determination table 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart of pseudo | simulation continuous notice production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 1 of pseudo | simulation continuous advance notice production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 2 of pseudo | simulation continuous advance notice production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 3 of pseudo | simulation continuous advance notice production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 4 of pseudo | simulation continuous advance notice production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 5 of pseudo | simulation continuous advance notice production. It is a figure which shows an example of the characteristic production performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display of the pachinko game machine which concerns on this embodiment in a 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the characteristic production performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the identification display displayed in the specific effect performed in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the specific production which used identification display "RUSH." It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed triggered by the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed triggered by the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol. It is a figure showing an example of execution control of specific production in case execution conditions of special drawing specific production triggered by change of special symbol and execution conditions of common drawing specific effect triggered by fluctuation of normal pattern are satisfied simultaneously . It is a figure showing an example of execution control of specific production in case execution conditions of special drawing specific production triggered by change of special symbol and execution conditions of common drawing specific effect triggered by fluctuation of normal pattern are satisfied simultaneously . It is a figure which shows the kind of jackpot of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the symbol stopped by a special symbol indicator, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol when the symbol stops, and the special figure specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure specific production which triggered the change of the special symbol. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the production | presentation which suggests the result of special symbol determination in common drawing specific production triggered by the fluctuation of a normal symbol is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the common drawing specific production at the time of stopping, after a normal symbol fluctuate | deviating during the fluctuation period of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the common drawing specific production in case a normal symbol fluctuates over the time of the fluctuation | variation start of a special symbol, and / or the time of a fluctuation | variation stop. It is a figure which shows the other example of the common drawing specific production in case a normal symbol fluctuates over the time of the fluctuation | variation start of a special symbol, and / or the time of a fluctuation | variation stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation pattern of specific presentation. It is a figure showing an example of production control. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the effects executed during symbol fluctuation and during a jackpot game when it is determined to be a jackpot in the normal gaming state in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the presentation performed during a symbol change and during a big hit game for every kind of big hit. It is a screen figure showing the example of the production about the big hit which uses the 1st big winning a prize mouth. It is a figure which shows an example of a moving image selection screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the moving image selection screen in the state in which the number of continuous channels is larger than the state shown to FIGS. 8-9. It is a figure showing the flow of the production including the case where it becomes RUB. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device at the time of the 1st game presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed after the image shown to FIGS. 8-12, when the game presentation of the 1st time is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device at the time of the game presentation of the 2nd time. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device, after promotion production is performed. It is a detailed flow chart of the first game effect processing. It is a detailed flow chart of the second game effect processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect image and an effect combination displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a flow of an effect performed when a white fireworks ball icon is moved to the field concerned. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of an effect performed when a white fireworks ball icon is moved to the field concerned. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the presentation performed when the eyelid icon is moved to the said area | region. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of an effect of a failure pattern performed when an eyelid icon is moved to the field concerned. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of an effect of a success pattern performed when an eyelid icon is moved to the field concerned. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing the flow of an effect performed when the ninja icon is moved to the area. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of an effect of a failure pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the field concerned. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of an effect of the 1st success pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the field concerned. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of an effect of the 2nd success pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the field concerned. It is a detailed flow chart of advance production pattern setting processing. It is a detailed flow chart of advance production pattern setting processing. It is a screen figure of a liquid crystal display device for explaining an example of the 1st pertinent picture production at the time of reach production in a 10th example of a form being performed. It is a screen figure of a liquid crystal display device for explaining an example of the 1st pertinent picture production concerned at the time of jackpot production being performed after reach production is performed. It is a screen figure of a liquid crystal display for explaining an example of the 2nd pertinent picture production concerned when reach production is performed. It is a screen figure of a liquid crystal display device for explaining an example of the 2nd pertinent picture production concerned at the time of jackpot production being performed after reach production is performed. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a sub RAM and an example of various information stored in the sub RAM. It is a detailed flow chart which shows an example of command reception processing. It is a detailed flow chart which shows an example of command reception processing. It is a detailed flow chart which shows an example of command reception processing. It is a detailed flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation production pattern setting process in step j125 of FIG. 10-22.

Next, modes for carrying out the invention will be described in detail. In addition, the form demonstrated in this column is an illustration to the last, and is not limited to this. In addition, it is possible to combine all or part of the configuration, control, and the like in each of the embodiment to be described later with another embodiment or to another embodiment without mentioning this document. In addition, although various modifications are described for each embodiment, application of such a modification to other embodiments is possible even if there is no mention in this document.
Specifically, the modes to be described below are the first mode, the second mode, the third mode, the fourth mode, the fifth mode, the sixth mode, and the seventh mode. They are a form example, an 8th form example, a 9th form example, and a 10th form example. In addition, about the structure, control, etc. which overlap with another form example, the description and illustration may be abbreviate | omitted, and drawing of another form example may be utilized. In addition, configurations and controls overlapping with other embodiments may be described or illustrated without omission.

[First embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described.
Here, if the game by the game ball is continued for a long time, it becomes difficult to maintain the concentration and the like of the player. Therefore, in order to maintain the concentration of the player, it is conceivable to use such pre-reading effect. However, it has been difficult to sufficiently maintain the concentration and the like of the player in the pre-reading effect with the gaming machine conventionally proposed.
Therefore, the first embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to enable the player to further enhance the interest of the game when playing a game.

That is, in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, when the first detection means b211 detects a winning at the first starting opening b121, the first drawing means b231 performs a big hit lottery and the second starting opening b122 When the second detection means b 212 detects a second prize in the game, the second lottery means b 231 performs a big win lottery, a symbol display showing the result of the big win lottery, and a variable display in which the symbols fluctuate before the symbol display Machine b100, which acquires holding ball occurrence information about the occurrence of a holding ball on which a jackpot lottery of the first lottery means b231 is held corresponding to a prize detected by the first detection means b211 A big hit lottery by the first lottery means b231 for the winning means relating to the holding ball occurrence information obtained by the acquiring means b231 and the holding means b231 Pre-determination means b 231 for determining the result of the jackpot lottery before being performed, and the final appearance aspect in a specific effect performed over a plurality of continuous variable displays until the change when the determination by the pre-judgment means b 231 is predetermined An execution means for determining the specific effect so as to shift to the final effect mode determined by the determination means b301 at the time of a plurality of change displays and to execute the specific effect in the change mode b301, and the execution means b301 stops the execution of the specific effect at the opportunity of the fluctuation display based on the winning combination detected by the second detection means b212 during the execution of the specific effect, and the fluctuation It is characterized by making it shift to a presentation form of the above-mentioned end in the specific production concerned.
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 1) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 1-”.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the attached drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1A is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine a100 according to the present embodiment.
A pachinko game machine a100 as an example of a game machine shown in the figure is configured to pay out a prize ball when a game ball hit by an instruction operation of a player wins. The pachinko game machine a100 includes a game board a110 on which a game ball is hit and a frame member a150 surrounding the game board a110. The game board a110 is detachably attached to the frame member a150.

The game board a110 has, on the front, a game area a111 for playing a game by a game ball, a rail member a112 for forming a passage toward the upper position of the game area a111 by which a game ball fired from below is raised and a game A guide member a113 for guiding the gaming ball is provided on the right side of the area a111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit a114 for displaying various images for effect is disposed at the position of the game area a111 which is easily viewed by the player. The image display unit a114 includes a display screen using a liquid crystal display or the like, and displays, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying a player of a symbol lottery result (symbol variation result) as the game progresses by the player, The effect image by the appearance of a character or the appearance of an item is displayed.
Further, on the front of the game board a110, there are provided a movable part a115 and a board lamp a116 which are used for various effects. The movable part a 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board a 110, and the board lamp a 116 performs various effects by emitting light.

  In the game area a 111, a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown) for changing the game ball in the falling direction are disposed. Further, in the game area a 111, various prizes and prizes related to winning are arranged at predetermined positions. Further, in the game area a111, there is disposed a discharge port a117 which discharges, out of the game area a111, game balls that have not been won in the winning opening among game balls hit in the game area a111.

  In this embodiment, when the game ball passes the first start opening a121 and the second start opening a122, the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) starts when the game ball wins, as the various prizes and lottery related various prizes. A start gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) a 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening / closing lottery) is disposed on the game board a110. In FIG. 1A, the gate a124 is provided on the left and right of the game area a111, the gate a124 on the left is described as a124L, and the gate a124 on the right is described as a124R. Further, the first starting opening a121 and the second starting opening a122 referred to herein mean winning openings serving as an operation trigger of a predetermined one of the special symbol displays. Specifically, the first starting opening a121 and the second starting opening a122 are provided with switches (a first starting opening switch a211 and a second starting opening switch a212 which will be described later) for detecting passage of gaming balls at the time of winning. It is done. Then, when the game ball wins in the first start opening a121 or the second start opening a122, the switch detecting the passage of the game ball triggers the operation of the special symbol indicator.

  The second starting opening a122 is provided with an electric tulip (opening and closing member) a123 as a regular electric part in which a pair of wings in the shape of a tulip flower is opened and closed by an electric solenoid and lighted. When the electric tulip a123 has the wings closed, the game ball can not easily enter the second starting opening a122. However, when the wings are opened, the entrance of the second starting opening a122 is expanded and the gaming balls go to the second starting opening a122. It is configured to be easy to enter. When the electric tulip a123 wins the normal symbol lottery, the blades light and blink while the blades open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, once to three times).

  The pachinko gaming machine a100 has, as a game state, a low probability state having the lowest winning probability, a medium probability state having a higher winning probability than the low probability state, and a winning probability higher than the medium probability state. It has a high probability state. In addition, it is controlled to any one of the low probability state, the medium probability state, and the high probability state under a predetermined condition. In addition, the pachinko game machine a100 has a time saving state where there are few winning opportunities for the second starting opening a122, and a time saving state where there are more winning opportunities for the second starting opening a122 than the time saving no status. In addition, under a predetermined condition, control is performed to either of the time saving state or the time saving state. Here, the time saving state is, for example, any one or more of making the winning probability of winning a normal symbol lottery a high probability, shortening the normal symbol variation time, or extending the open time of the electric tulip a123. It is a gaming state controlled by the combination. In the time saving state, the special symbol fluctuation time of the special symbol may be shortened.

Also, in the present embodiment, the first large winning opening a125A and the second large winning opening a125B as special electric winning combination that is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery as other prizes related to winning or drawing. Both are collectively referred to as a large winning opening a125), and a normal winning opening a126 which does not perform a lottery even if the game ball is won, is disposed on the game board a110. The second big winning opening a 125 B is an attacker dedicated to rank up bonus (RUB).
In the present embodiment, at the lower right position of the game board a110, a display a130 for displaying the lottery result and the number of reservations is disposed.

  In addition, on the back of the game board a110, a game control board for determining the winning of a special symbol, an effect control board for overall control of effects, an image control board for controlling effects by images and sounds, various lamps and Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate for controlling the effect by the movable part a 115 are attached. Further, on the back surface of the game board a110, there is disposed a switching power supply (not shown) for converting the supplied 24 V AC power into a DC power and outputting the DC power to various substrates and the like.

When the player touches the handle a 151 and rotates the lever a 152 in a clockwise direction, the frame member a 150 has a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 for one minute) with the ball according to the operation angle. And a launcher (not shown) for motorized launch. Further, the frame member a150 supplies a game ball (not shown) sequentially to the launcher one by one at a timing interlocked with the operation of the player's lever a152, and the game sphere supplied by the feed device to the launcher. And a plate a153 for temporarily storing. For example, a payout ball by a payout unit is paid out to the plate a153.
In the present embodiment, the tray a 153 is configured integrally with the upper and lower trays, but a configuration example in which the upper tray and the lower tray are separated is also conceivable. In addition, a configuration example in which the handle a 151 of the launcher emits light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

In addition, the frame member a150 is provided with a stop button a154 for temporarily stopping the firing of the game ball even when the player touches the handle a151 of the launcher, and the game ball accumulated in the plate a153. And a takeout button a 155 for taking it out into a box (not shown).
Further, the frame member a150 is provided with a speaker a156 and a frame lamp a157 for notifying the gaming state and the situation of the pachinko gaming machine a100 and performing various effects. The speaker a 156 performs various effects by music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp a 157 is formed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light according to a pattern by lighting / flashing, a difference in light emission color, or the like. In addition, about the frame lamp a 157, the structural example which makes it possible to perform the presentation which changes the irradiation direction of light can be considered.
In addition, the frame member a150 is provided with a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board a110 from the player.

FIGS. 1-2 is a figure explaining the pachinko game machine a100 based on this Embodiment, (a) is an enlarged view which shows an example of the indicator a130 arrange | positioned by the lower right of the game board a110. , (B) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine a100.
The indicator a130 of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is, as shown in FIG. 1-2 (a), a first special symbol indicator a221 that operates in response to the winning of the first start opening a121, and a second start opening a122. The second special symbol display a 222 operates in response to the winning of the second symbol, and the normal symbol display a 223 operates in response to the passage of the gate a 124. The first special symbol display a 221 changes display of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting opening a 121 and then stops the special symbol to display the lottery result. The second special symbol display a 222 changes and displays the special symbol based on the winning of the second starting opening a 122 and then stops the special symbol to display the lottery result. Based on the fact that the game ball passes the gate a 124, the normal symbol display a 223 causes the normal symbol to be variably displayed and then stopped to display the lottery result. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display a 221 and the second special symbol display a 222 are each configured by a display device in which LEDs are arrayed, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display device a 223 is also configured by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the lighting mode.

  In addition, the display a130 is operated in response to the first special symbol hold display a218 that operates in response to the hold in the first special symbol display a221 and in response to the hold in the second special symbol display a222 2 A special symbol hold display a 219 and a normal symbol hold display a 220 that operates in response to a hold on the normal symbol display a 223 are provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display a 218, the second special symbol hold display a 219 and the normal symbol hold display a 220 are each configured by a display device in which the LEDs are arranged, and the number of reservations depends on the lighting mode Is displayed.

  Here, hold will be described. If the game ball wins the first starting opening a121 or the second starting opening a122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning is performed), the special symbol is changing. In addition, it is not possible to start the change display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning. Therefore, the subsequent winnings are stored up to a specified number (for example, four), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning gaming ball is until the variation display operation for the winning gaming ball is finished, Be put on hold. In addition, the same processing as the special symbol is performed also for the normal symbol. The fact that such a hold is made and the number of the hold (the number of unchanged) is displayed on the first special symbol hold display a 218, the second special symbol hold display a 219, and the normal symbol hold display a 220.

  Further, the display unit a130 includes a state display unit a224 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine a100. In the present embodiment, the status indicator a 224 is configured of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LED's indicates by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a high probability. Another LED is to notify by lighting whether or not the selection probability of the special symbol lottery is in the middle probability state that is the middle probability. The remaining one indicates by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is short when it is easy to win the second starting opening a122. Furthermore, even if the status display a224 is further provided with an LED and right-handed (by changing the hitting power of the game ball), it is informed whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by lighting. Good.

  The frame member a150 of the pachinko game machine a100 is provided with an input device for the player to perform an input for the effect. As shown in (b) of FIG. 1B, in the present embodiment, as an example of the input device, a rendering key including a plurality of keys arranged adjacent to the rendering button a161 and the rendering button a161 and arranged substantially in a cross. a 162 are disposed on the frame member a 150. In the illustrated example, the player can designate any of a plurality of images displayed on the image display unit a114 by operating, for example, an effect key a162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross. It is possible, and it is possible to select the instructed image by operating the effect button a 161. Further, as the form of the input device, various input forms can be adopted according to the contents of the effect such as a lever and a dial other than the effect button a 161 and the effect key a 162 illustrated.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine a100 will be described.
FIGS. 1-3 is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of a control unit. As shown in the figure, the control unit includes, as main control means, a game control unit a200 which determines the winning of a special symbol, and the like. In addition, as a sub control means, an effect control unit a300 that controls the effects in an integrated manner, an image / sound control unit a310 that controls effects using images and sounds, and effects using various lamps and movable objects a115 And a payout control unit a400 that performs a payout control of the payout balls.

  As described above, each of the game control unit a200, the effect control unit a300, the image / sound control unit a310, the lamp control unit a320, and the payout control unit a400 is a game as a main board disposed on the rear surface of the game board a110. The control board, the effect control board as a sub board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.

[Configuration and Function of Game Control Unit]
The game control unit a200 is used as a working memory for the CPU a 201, the CPU a 201 for performing arithmetic processing when determining the winning of a special symbol, etc., a ROM a 202 for storing programs executed by the CPU a 201, various data, etc. And the RAM a 203.
When the game ball is won in the first starting opening a121 or the second starting opening a122, the game control unit a200 performs a special symbol lottery, and sends the lottery result to the effect control unit a300. Further, change information between the high probability state, the medium probability state, and the low probability state, and the change information of the short and long states and the short and short states are sent to the effect control unit a300.
Furthermore, the game control unit a200 performs control to increase the probability of winning a normal symbol lottery, shorten the normal symbol variation time, or extend the open time of the electric tulip a123. In addition, the game control unit a200 holds up to the limit number (for example, four) of the non-fluctuating part when the game ball continuously wins the first start port a121 or the second start port a122, and the game ball is continuous In addition, a hold is set up to the limit number (for example, four) of the unchangeable part when passing through the gate a 124.
Furthermore, according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the game control unit a200 is opened until the special winning opening a125, which is a special electric combination, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won). Control is performed so that the round of maintaining the state is repeated a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the opening / closing operation interval when the special winning opening a 125 is opened is controlled.

Furthermore, when the game ball is won in the first start port a121, the second start port a122, the large winning hole a125, and the normal winning hole a126, the game control unit a200 hits one game ball according to the place where the game ball is won. An instruction is issued to the payout control unit a 400 so as to pay out a predetermined number of winning balls. For example, if the game ball wins in the first start opening a121, three prize balls, if the game ball wins in the second start opening a122, four prize balls, if the game ball wins in the big prize opening a125, then 13 awards When the gaming ball has won the ball or the normal winning opening a 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to the payout control unit a 400 so that the ten winning balls are paid out. Note that even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate a 124, the payout control unit a 400 is not instructed to pay out the winning balls linked thereto.
When the payout control unit a400 pays out the winning balls according to the instruction of the game control unit a200, the game control unit a200 acquires information on the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit a400. Thus, the number of awarded balls is managed.

The game control unit a200 includes, as detection means, a first start opening detection unit (first start opening switch (SW)) for detecting winning of the game ball to the first start opening a121 as shown in FIG. a211, a second starting opening detecting unit (second starting opening switch (SW)) a212 for detecting winning of the game ball to the second starting opening a122, an electric tulip opening and closing part a213 for opening and closing the electric tulip a123, and a gate A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) a 214 for detecting passage of the gaming ball to a 124 is connected.
Furthermore, the first large winning opening detection unit (first large winning opening switch (SW)) a 215 that detects the winning of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening a 125 A, and the first large winning opening The first large winning opening opening and closing part a216 which sets the a125A to the closed state and the open state which is projecting inclined, and the second large winning opening detection part which detects the winning of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening a125B Prize winning opening switch (SW) a225, second big prize winning opening a125B set to a closed state and a projecting inclined inclined opening state a226, and a winning of the game ball to the normal winning prize a 126 An ordinary winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) a 217 to be detected is connected.

In addition, in the game control unit a200, a first special symbol hold display a 218 that displays the number of unsettled pieces of non-fluctuation winnings to the first starting opening a 121 during the fluctuation of the special symbol within the limit number (for example, four) , The second special symbol hold display a219 that displays the number of unchanged portion of the winning number to the second starting opening a122 during the fluctuation of the special symbol within the limit number, and not passed through the gate a124 during the fluctuation of the normal symbol A normal symbol hold display a 220 for displaying the number of pending changes within the limit number is connected.
Furthermore, the first special symbol display a 221 for displaying the result of the special symbol variation display performed by the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening a121 and the special symbol lottery in the game control unit a200, and the second starting opening The second special symbol indicator a 222 displays the result of the special symbol variation display and the special symbol lottery performed by the winning of the game ball to a 122, and the normal symbol display displays the result of the ordinary symbol variation display and the ordinary symbol lottery The device a 223 and a status display a 224 for displaying the status of the pachinko gaming machine a 100 are connected.

  Then, detection signals detected by the first start opening switch a211, the second start opening switch a212, the gate switch a214, the special winning opening switch a215, and the normal winning opening switch a217 are sent to the game control unit a200. In addition, the control signal from game control section a200, electric tulip opening and closing section a213, large winning a prize opening opening and closing section a216 and a226, 1st special symbol reservation indicator a218, 2nd special symbol reservation indicator a219, normal symbol reservation indicator It is sent to a220, the first special symbol display a221, the second special symbol display a222, the normal symbol display a223, and the status display a224. Thereby, the game control unit a 200 performs various controls related to the above-described payout award ball number.

  Further, the game control unit a200 is connected to a panel external information terminal board a250 for transmitting various types of information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit a200 transmits, to the host computer via the board external information terminal board a250, information relating to the number of prize balls paid out, which is obtained from the payout control unit a400, and indicating the state of the game control unit a200. Do.

[Configuration and function of effect control unit]
The effect control unit a300 executes a CPUa 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling effects, a ROM a 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU a 301, various data, etc., a RAM a 303 used as a working memory of the CPU a 301, etc. And a real time clock (RTC) a 304 for measuring
The effect control unit a300 sets the content of the effect based on, for example, the determination result as to whether or not it is a winning in the special symbol lottery sent from the game control unit a200 and the fluctuation pattern. At that time, there are also cases where the content of the effect corresponding to the operation input is set in response to the operation input from the user using the effect button a 161 or the effect key a 162. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) according to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button a 161, and the operation content identified by the operation signal is reflected in the setting of the effect.
Further, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit a300 instructs the setting of the screen display for waiting for a customer as one of the effects.
Furthermore, the effect control unit a300 sets the effect content based on the change information between the high probability state, the medium probability state, and the low probability state received from the game control unit a200, and the change information of the time saving state and the time saving state. Do.
Also, the effect control unit a300 sends a command instructing execution of the set effect content to the image / sound control unit a310 and the lamp control unit a320.

[Configuration / function of image / sound control unit]
The image / sound control unit a310 is used for work of the CPU a 311 that performs calculation processing when controlling an image representing the contents of presentation and sound, a ROM a 312 in which programs executed by the CPU a 311, various data, etc. are stored, and the CPU a 311 And a RAM a 313 used as a memory or the like.
Then, the image / sound control unit a310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit a114 and the sound output from the speaker a156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit a300.
Specifically, in the ROM / a 312 of the image / sound control unit a310, a symbol image or background image displayed during the game in the image display unit a114, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result, and notice effect to the player Image data such as characters and items for displaying the image is stored.
The ROM a 312 further stores various sound data such as music and sound to be output from the speaker a 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, and further, sound effects such as jingles. The CPU a 311 selects and reads out the image data and sound data stored in the ROM a 312 that correspond to the command sent from the effect control unit a 300. Furthermore, image processing for background image display, symbol image display, symbol image variation, character / item display and the like is performed using the read image data, and sound processing using the read sound data is performed.
Then, the image / sound control unit a310 controls the screen display on the image display unit a114 according to the image data subjected to the image processing. Further, the sound output from the speaker a 156 is controlled by the sound data subjected to the sound processing.

[Configuration and function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit a320 stores the programs executed by the CPU a 321, various data, etc., which are executed by the CPU a 321 that performs light emission of the panel lamp a 116 and the frame lamp a 157 and arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the movable part a 115. The ROM a 322 and the RAM a 323 used as a working memory or the like of the CPU a 321 are provided.
Then, the lamp control unit a320 controls lighting / flickering of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157, an emission color, and the like based on the command sent from the effect control unit a300. In addition, it controls the operation of the movable part a115.
Specifically, in the ROM a 322 of the lamp control unit a 320, lighting / flashing pattern data and light emitting color pattern data (panel Data) is stored. The CPU a 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM a 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit a 300. Then, the lamp control unit a320 controls the light emission of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM a 322 of the lamp control unit a 320 stores operation pattern data of the movable part a 115 according to the contents of the effect set by the effect control unit a 300. The CPU a 321 controls the operation of the movable part a 115 according to the read operation pattern data.

[Configuration and Function of Payout Control Unit]
The payout control unit a400 performs a calculation process when controlling the payout of the payout balls, the ROMa 402 in which programs executed by the CPUa 401 and various data are stored, and the RAMa 403 used as a working memory of the CPUa 401. And have.
Then, the payout control unit a400 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the game control unit a200.
Specifically, the payout control unit a400 acquires, from the game control unit a200, a command to pay out a predetermined number of winning balls according to the place (first start opening a121 or the like) at which the gaming ball has won a prize. Then, the payout drive unit a 411 is controlled to pay out the number of winning balls specified by the command. The payout drive unit a411 here is configured by a drive motor that sends out the game balls from the storage unit of the game balls.

In addition, the payout control unit a400 includes a payout ball detection unit a412 that detects the number of award balls actually paid out from the storage unit of the game balls by the payout drive unit a411, and the gaming ball in the storage unit (not shown). To detect whether or not there is a ball presence detection unit a413 for detecting the presence or absence of storage, and a tray a153 for holding a game ball used when a player plays a game and a paid-out prize ball. The full tank detection unit a 414 is connected. Then, the payout control unit a400 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit a412, the ball presence detection unit a413, and the full tank detection unit a414, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, to the payout control unit a400, a frame external information terminal board a450 for transmitting various information to the host computer installed in the hall is connected. Then, the payout control unit a400 is, for example, information on the number of winning balls instructed to be paid out to the payout driving unit a411, information on the number of actually paid payout balls detected by the payout ball detecting unit a412, etc. Are transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board a 450. The same information is also transmitted to the game control unit a200.

[Functional Configuration of Game Control Unit]
Subsequently, the functional configuration of the game control unit a200 will be described.
1-4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the game control unit a200. As shown in the figure, the game control unit a200 is a functional unit that executes various lottery processes, a random number acquisition unit a231, a normal symbol determination unit a232, a special symbol variation control unit a233, and a special symbol determination unit a234 , Normal symbol variation control unit a237.
In addition, the game control unit a200 is provided with a variation pattern selection unit a235 as a functional unit that executes a process associated with the special symbol variation.
Furthermore, the game control unit a200 is a functional unit that executes operation control of various prizes and data processing relating to the winning balls, etc. , An output control unit a241, and a random number control unit a242.

The random number acquisition unit a 231 acquires a random number related to a special symbol when the game ball is won in the first starting opening a 121 and the second starting opening a 122. Specifically, one numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from the numerical values in a predetermined range, and is used for the determination by the special symbol determination unit a 234.
When the gaming ball passes through the gate a 124, the random number acquisition unit a 231 acquires a random number regarding a normal symbol. Specifically, one numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from numerical values in a predetermined range, and is used for the determination by the normal symbol determination unit a232.
The special symbol variation control unit a233 controls the variation of the special symbol according to the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is performed.

  The special symbol determination section a 234 uses the random number table as shown in FIGS. 1-17-1 and 1-17-2 at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and whether the lottery result is “big hit or not”, “big hit” Determine the type of jackpot when the player wins ", or" is it a small hit if the jackpot is not won? " That is, the random number acquisition unit a231 acquires a random number value related to a special symbol triggered by detection of passage of a game ball by the first starting opening switch a211 or the second starting opening switch a212 which is detection means, and determines a special symbol. The part a 234 determines whether to play a special game (such as a big hit game) advantageous to the player, based on the acquired random number value. In addition, the lottery (big hit lottery) of the special symbol mentioned above refers to the processing in the random number acquisition part a 231 and the special symbol judgment part a 234.

  Here, the "big hit" is divided into a plurality of types according to the number of rounds (the number of rounds) in which the big winning opening a 125 is opened in the big hit game and the gaming state generated after the big hit game is over. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of rounds of the large winning opening a 125 is the big hit of 16R (round), the big hit of 4R which is open time, and the open time A short 4R jackpot is set. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the gaming state occurring after the end of the jackpot game is either a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state, and one of a high probability state, a medium probability state and a low probability state. A jackpot that is a combination of is set. In other words, as a type of jackpot based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot that becomes a high probability time game state having both time saving state and high probability state Big hit in the short game state), a middle hit in the short game state with both time saving state and medium probability state (hereinafter referred to as medium hit in the short odds game state), both time saving state and low probability state A big hit with a low probability time short game state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability time with a short game state having both a short time absence state and a high probability state) A large probability of becoming a medium probability time short non-playing state with both state of time saving state and medium probability state (hereinafter referred to as middle probability) Time reduction jackpot no gaming state), the jackpot as a low probability time reduction No gaming state having a time reduction of both the stateless and low probability state state (hereinafter, a low probability time reduction of non-gaming state jackpot) is likely. Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

  Also, the "big hit" may be divided into a big hit where the time of big hit game is long and a payout of a large amount of game balls can be expected, and a big hit where big hit game time is short and a payout of game balls is hardly expected. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". In the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, for example, the jackpot of 16R (round) and the jackpot of 4R with a long open time (long open) correspond to “per unit”, and the open time is short (Short opening) The jackpot of 4R corresponds to "short hit". In the "long hit", the number of rounds maintained until the open state of the big winning opening a 125 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds has elapsed or 10 game balls won) is a predetermined number of times (16 times in the above example or It is repeated 4 times). In the “short hit”, the round in which the special winning opening a 125 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) is repeated a predetermined number of times (four times in the above example). In the following description, in order to distinguish the type of jackpot, the number of rounds and the open time (long open or short open) may be indicated and referred to as 4R short, 4R short, and the like per 16R long.

In the "small hit" when the big hit is not won, for example, a small hit game is performed in which the mode in which the first big winning opening a125A is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) is performed for 0.1 seconds . In addition, at the time of small hitting winning, even after the small hitting game ends, the game state before the small hitting winning is continued. That is, when the gaming state at the time of the small hit is the high probability short game state, the high probability short game state is continued even after the end of the small hitting game, and the gaming state does not shift. Similarly, when the gaming state at the time of the small winning is low probability short non-gaming state, the low probability non-short gaming state is continued even after the end of the small hitting game, the gaming state does not shift.
Also, "small hit" is a kind of "dropout", and none of the above-mentioned gaming states that are advantageous to the player are set.

The variation pattern selection unit a235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display a221 or the second special symbol display a222. Here, the variation pattern selection unit a 235 determines the variation pattern based on the determination result as to whether or not to perform the jackpot game, the determination result as to whether or not the reach is to be performed, and the like. Then, the special symbol variation control unit a233 controls the variation of the special symbol based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit a235. Details of operations of the variation pattern selection unit a235 and the special symbol variation control unit a233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" is an effect for making a player expect a jackpot in a decorative symbol to be described later.

The normal symbol determination portion a 232 determines whether the normal symbol lottery result is “winning or losing” when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The normal symbol variation control unit a237 controls the variation of the normal symbol according to the lottery result of the normal symbol.
When it is determined that the electric tulip operation control unit a239 is “winning” by lottery of the normal symbol, the electric tulip a123 is opened for a specified time and a specified number of times, and the game ball is easily won in the second starting opening a122 Generate a condition. In addition, when it is determined that "the detachment", such an open state of the electric tulip a123 is not generated.

The special winning opening operation control unit a238 controls the opening operation of the first large winning opening a125A and the second large winning opening a125B.
The prize ball processing unit a 240 sets a control command of the management of the number of prizes to various prizes related to winning and lottery and the payout balls according to the winning.
The output control unit a241 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit a200 to the effect control unit a300 and the payout control unit a400.
The random number control unit a 242 controls updating of various random number values used in processing by the main control unit.

[Basic operation of gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine a100 configured as described above will be described.
The basic operation of the pachinko game machine a100 is performed by the game control unit a200 which is the main control means. Then, under the control of the game control unit a200, the effect control unit a300 which is a sub control unit controls the effects on the game, and the payout control unit a400 controls the payout of the winning balls.

FIG. 1-5 is a flowchart showing the main operation of the game control unit a200.
The game control unit a 200 repeatedly executes each process shown in FIGS. 1-5 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the normal operation except for special cases such as power on and power off. Referring to FIGS. 1-5, the random number update process, the switch process, the symbol process, the electric part process, the winning ball process, and the output process are sequentially executed (steps a501 to a506).

  In the random number updating process (step a501), the random number control unit a242 of the game control unit a200 updates the values of various random numbers used in the processing by the main control unit. Details of the setting of the random number and the update of the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (step a502), the start port switch process and the gate switch process are performed.
In the starting opening switch process, the random number acquisition unit a231 of the game control unit a200 monitors the states of the first starting opening switch a211 and the second starting opening switch a212 in FIG. Execute processing for special symbol lottery.
In the gate switch process, the normal symbol determination unit a232 of the game control unit a200 monitors the state of the gate switch a 214 in FIG. 1-3, and executes the process for the normal symbol lottery when the switch is turned on. .
The detailed contents of these switch processes will be described later.

As symbol processing (step a 503), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol process, a special symbol variation and a process associated with this symbol variation are performed by the special symbol variation control unit a233, the special symbol determination unit a234, and the variation pattern selection unit a235 of the game control unit a200.
In the normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control unit a 237 of the game control unit a 200 performs a normal symbol variation and a process associated with this symbol variation.
The detailed contents of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric role processing (step a 504), a special winning opening process and an electric tulip process are performed.
In the special winning opening process, the special winning opening operation control unit a238 of the game control unit a200 controls the opening operation of the first large winning opening a125A and the second large winning opening a125B based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit a239 of the game control unit a200 controls the opening operation of the electric tulip a123 based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these motorized role processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (step a505), the prize ball processing unit a240 of the game control unit a200 sets a control command for the management of the number of winnings and the payout balls according to the winnings.
In the output process (step a506), the output control unit a241 of the game control unit a200 outputs a control command to the effect control unit a300 and the payout control unit a400. The control command is generated in each process up to step a505, is set in the RAM a 203, and is output in this output process.

[Starting port switch processing in the game control unit]
1-6 is a flowchart which shows the content of the starting opening switch process of the switch processes shown to step a 502 of FIG. 1-5.
In this starting opening switch processing, processing for winning in the first starting opening a121 and processing for winning in the second starting opening a122 are sequentially performed. With reference to FIGS. 1-6, the game control unit a200 first determines whether the game ball has won the first starting opening a121 and the first starting opening switch a211 has been turned on (step a601). If the first starting opening switch a211 is turned ON, then the game control unit a200 determines whether the pending number U1 of unchangeable portions in the winning of the first starting opening a121 is less than the upper limit (step a602) ). In the example shown in FIGS. 1-6, the upper limit value is four. When the number U1 of holdings has reached the upper limit (No in step a602), it is not possible to hold the winnings of the unchangeable part any more, so the processing for the winnings in the first starting opening a121 is ended.

  On the other hand, if the number of reservations U1 is less than the upper limit (Yes in step a602), the game control unit a200 then adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U1 (step a603). Then, the random number acquisition unit a 231 of the game control unit a 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery by the current winning, and stores it in the RAM a 203 (step a 604). Here, since the winning of the first starting opening a121, a random value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of step a 501. And by this random number value, the result of the special symbol lottery is decided in the special symbol processing later. As the random number value mentioned here, the big hit random number value which decides the big hit, the small hit or the out, the kind of big hit (time saving state or time saving state after the end of the big hitting game, high probability state or medium probability state or low probability state, Design random number value (big hit design random number value) to decide the long hit or short hit, fluctuation pattern random number value to specify the fluctuation pattern in the symbol fluctuation, reach to decide whether to perform with reach at the time of losing It includes random numbers, etc.

Next, the game control unit a200 performs a prior determination process for performing a notice effect of a lottery result on the winning balls (holding balls) for which the variable display operation of the special symbol is suspended (that is, not drawn). (Step a605). This prior determination processing is to perform determination of the lottery result not at the start of the symbol variation but at the starting opening winning (i.e., at step a 605). In addition, in the gaming machine in which the advance notice effect based on the prior determination is not performed, the prior determination process may be omitted.
After this, the game control unit a200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit a300 of the increase in the hold number U1 at step a603 in the RAM a 203 (step a606), and processing for winning in the first starting opening a121. Finish. When the predetermination process of step a605 is performed, the information on the determination result of the predetermination obtained in step a605 is included in the pending number increase command.

  Next, processing for winning in the second starting opening a122 is performed. With reference to FIGS. 1-6, next, the game control unit a200 determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starting opening a122 and the second starting opening switch a212 has been turned on (step a607). When the second starting opening switch a212 is turned ON, next, the game control unit a200 determines whether or not the pending number U2 of unchangeable portions in the winning of the second starting opening a122 is less than the upper limit (step a608) ). In the example shown in FIGS. 1-6, the upper limit value is four. When the number U2 of holdings has reached the upper limit (No in step a 608), it is not possible to hold the winnings for the non-changeable portion any more, so the processing for the winnings in the second starting port a 122 is ended.

  On the other hand, if the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit (Yes in step a608), then the game control unit a200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations U2 (step a609). Then, the random number acquisition unit a 231 of the game control unit a 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery by the current winning, and stores it in the RAM a 203 (step a 610). Here, since the second starting opening a122 is a prize, as in the above step a604, random numbers (big hit random number, big hit random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random value, etc.) for the special symbol lottery are obtained Be done. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of step a 501. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the subsequent special symbol processing by this random number value.

Next, the game control unit a200 performs a prior determination process for performing a notice effect of a lottery result on the winning balls (holding balls) for which the variable display operation of the special symbol is suspended (that is, not drawn). (Step a611). The content of this prior determination process is the same as that of step a 605 described above. This prior determination process may be omitted in the gaming machine in which the advance presentation effect based on the prior determination is not performed.
After this, the game control unit a200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit a300 of the increase in the hold number U2 at step a609 (step a612), and processing for the winning at the second starting opening a122 Finish. When the predetermination process of step a611 is performed, the information on the determination result of the predetermination obtained in step a611 is included in the pending number increase command.

[Gate switch processing in the game control unit]
FIGS. 1-7 is a flowchart which shows the content of the gate switch process when a game ball passes gate a124.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit a200 first determines whether the game ball passes through the gate a124 and the gate switch a214 is turned on (step a701). When the gate switch a 214 is turned on, next, the game control unit a 200 determines whether the hold number G of the unvaried part is less than the upper limit value (step a 702). In the example shown in FIG. 1-7, the upper limit value is four. If the number of reservations G has reached the upper limit value (No in step a 702), it is not possible to hold the non-fluctuation winnings any more, so the gate switch processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit (Yes in step a702), the game control unit a200 then adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations G (step a703). Then, the random number acquisition unit a 231 of the game control unit a 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery by the current winning, and stores it in the RAM a 203 (step a 704). Here, since the winning of the gate a 124 is performed, a random number value (such as a random number value) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

  After the random number value is obtained in step a704, the game control unit a200 sets a hold number G increase command for notifying the effect control unit a300 of the increase in the hold number G in step a703 in the RAM a 203 (step a705), The processing for the winning at the gate a 124 is ended.

[Special symbol processing in the game control unit]
1-8 is a flowchart which shows the content of the special symbol process among the symbol processes shown to step a 503 of FIG. 1-5.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit a233 of the game control unit a200 first checks whether or not the hit game flag is ON in the setting of the flag set in the RAM a 203 (hereinafter, the flag setting) Step a801). Here, the hit game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Either a long game flag or a short game flag is set according to the type of hit. In the present embodiment, these are collectively referred to as a hit game flag.

  If the hit game flag is ON, since the pachinko game machine a100 is already in the jackpot, the special symbol processing is ended without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in step a801). On the other hand, if the winning game flag is OFF (No in step a801), then the special symbol variation control unit a233 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in the special symbol variation (step a802). . If the special symbol is not changing (No in step a802), the special symbol change control unit a233 then performs processing regarding the number U1 and U2 (refer to FIG. 1-6) of the non-fluctuating part of the special symbol (step a803 to a806). In this embodiment, since the number U1 of holding for the winning of the first starting opening a121 and the number U2 of holding for the winning of the second starting opening a122 are distinguished, this processing is also performed separately for each corresponding starting opening. .

  Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit a233 first determines whether the number of reservations U2 pertaining to the winning of the second starting opening a122 is 1 or more (step a803). If the number U2 of reservations is 1 or more (Yes in step a803), the special symbol variation control unit a233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number U2 of reservations (step a804). On the other hand, if the number of reservations U2 = 0 (No in step a803), the special symbol variation control unit a233 next determines whether the number of reservations U1 pertaining to the winning of the first starting opening a121 is 1 or more (step a805) . If the number U1 of reservations is one or more (Yes in step a805), the special symbol variation control unit a233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number U1 of reservations (step a806). On the other hand, if the number of reservations U1 = 0 (No at step a 805), it means that there is no winning for starting the drawing of the special symbol, so the special symbol variation is not started, and the customer waiting setting of another routine is set. The process is executed to end the process (step a816).

  After subtracting the number of reservations U1 or the number of reservations U2 in step a804 or step a806, the special symbol variation control unit a233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM a 203 (step a807). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (step a816, see FIG. 1-12).

  Next, the special symbol variation control unit a233 executes the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process according to another routine (steps a808 and a809). Although it will be described in detail later, the setting information (big hit symbol, gaming state, variation pattern, etc.) for the variation of the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display a 221 is determined by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. Be done. These pieces of information are included in the change start command sent to the effect control unit a300.

  After that, the special symbol variation control unit a233 uses the first special symbol indicator a221 and the second special symbol indicator a222 shown in FIG. 1-2 based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The variation of the special symbol displayed is started (step a810). Then, the change start command including the setting information (the jackpot symbol, the game state, the change pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM a 203 (step a811). The change start command set in step a811 is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 in FIG.

  If it is determined in step a802 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in step a802), or after the change start command is set in step a811, the special symbol change control unit a233 determines whether the change time has elapsed (Step a812). That is, it is determined whether the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol in step a810 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of step a809. If the fluctuation time has not passed (No in step a812), the special symbol fluctuation is continued, and the special symbol processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has passed (Yes in step a812), the special symbol fluctuation control unit a233 firstly causes the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display a221 and the second special symbol display a222 as a big hit in step a808. The process is stopped at the symbol determined by the determination process (step a813). A change stop command for stopping a decorative pattern to be described later is set in the RAM a 203 (step a 814). Then, the in-stop processing of another routine is executed (step a815). The contents of the in-stop process will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in step a 814 is transmitted to the effect control unit a 300 in the output process shown in step a 506 in FIG.

[A big hit judging process by the game control section]
FIG. 1-9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (step a806 in FIG. 1-8).
In the jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit a234 of the game control unit a200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (step a901), and determines whether the jackpot or the small hit ( Steps a 902, 905). Whether the jackpot or jackpot has occurred is determined by setting the jackpot random number obtained in step a 604 or step a 610 in FIG. 1-6 as the jackpot value for the jackpot or the value for the jackpot value for the small jackpot. It is determined by judging whether or not they match (see FIG. 1-17-1).

  If the result of the random number determination in step a901 is a big hit (Yes in step a902), next, the special symbol determination section a234 determines a big hit symbol random number value (step a903). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (high probability state or medium probability state or low probability state, short or short state, short or long state, long or short) is determined. Which jackpot will be made is determined depending on which of the values preset for each jackpot type the value of the jackpot symbol random number obtained in step a 604 or step a 610 in FIG. (See Figure 1-17-2).

  After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit a 234 sets a symbol (big hit symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM a 203 as setting information (step a 904).

  If the result of the random number determination in step a 901 is a small hit (No in step a 902, Yes in step a 905), the special symbol determination unit a 234 then displays a small hit symbol (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol). The setting information is set in the RAM a 203 (step a 906).

  If the result of the random number determination in step a 901 is neither big hit nor small hit (step a 902, step a 905 No), then the special symbol determination section a 234 sets a symbol (hereinafter referred to as “disappeared symbol”) to indicate that the lottery is lost. The information is set in the RAM a 203 (step a 907).

[Variation pattern selection process by game control unit]
1-10 is a flowchart which shows the content of a fluctuation pattern selection process (step a807 of FIG. 1-8).
In this variation pattern selection process, first, whether or not the variation pattern selection unit a235 of the game control unit a200 has made a big hit in the special symbol lottery this time using the determination result of step a 902 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 1-9) Is determined (step a1001). If it is a big hit (Yes at step a1001), the variation pattern selection unit a235 reads a variation pattern table for the big hit from the ROM a 202 and sets it in the RAM a 203 (step a1002).

On the other hand, if the player does not make a big hit (No at step a1001), then the variation pattern selection unit a235 determines the random value to determine whether or not to perform so-called reach effect to make the player expect a big hit. Perform (step a1003). Whether or not the reach effect is to be performed is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in step a 604 or step a 610 in FIG. 17-3 (a)).
As a result of the determination using the random number value, when performing reach effect (Yes in step a1004), the fluctuation pattern selection unit a235 reads out the fluctuation pattern table for reach from the ROM a 202 and sets it in the RAM a 203 (step a1005). When the reach effect is not performed (No in step a1004), the fluctuation pattern selection unit a235 reads out the fluctuation pattern table for removal from the ROM a 202 and sets it in the RAM a 203 (step a1006).
Here, the variation pattern table is a table in which a plurality of variation patterns (variation time 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) prepared in advance are associated with values of variation pattern random numbers.

  Next, the variation pattern selection unit a235 uses the variation pattern random number value acquired in step a604 or step a610 of FIG. 1-6 and the variation pattern table set in steps a1002, a1005, and a1006 to obtain the variation pattern random number value. A determination is made (step a1007). That is, the variation pattern selection unit a 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM a 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation referred to according to the difference in the state, such as whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is the big hit, and whether the reach effect is performed if the big hit is not made. Because the pattern table is different, the variation pattern to be determined is different.

  Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit a235 sets the variation pattern selected in step a1007 in the RAM a 203 as setting information (step a1008). The setting information of the fluctuation pattern set in step a1008 is included in the fluctuation start command set in step a811 in FIG. 1-8, and transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 in FIG. 1-5. Be done.

[Stopping process by the game control unit]
FIG. 1-11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the in-stop process (step a 815 in FIG. 1-8).
In the stop processing, the game control unit a200 first checks whether a flag (hereinafter referred to as a time saving flag) indicating that the time saving state is set in the flag setting of the RAM a 203 is ON (step a1101). If the time saving flag is ON (Yes in step a1101), the game control unit a200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of times of drawing (the number of times of fluctuation) J in the time saving state (step a1102) It is checked whether or not it is (step a1103). Then, if the lottery number J = 0 (Yes at step a1103), the time saving flag is turned off (step a1104). The operation of turning on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 1-15) in the special winning opening process (FIG. 1-14) described later.

  If the time saving flag is OFF (No at step a1101) or after setting the time saving flag to OFF at step a1104, or if the value of the lottery number J is not 0 (No at step a1103), then the game control unit a200 In the flag setting of the RAM a 203, it is checked whether a flag indicating a high probability state or a medium probability state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variation flag) is ON (step a 1105-1). It should be noted that if both the probability change flag and the earlier time saving flag are ON, then the high probability time short game state or the medium probability time short game state, and if the probability change flag is ON and the time short flag is OFF, the high probability time short No-play state or medium probability no-play state.

  If the probability change flag is ON (Yes at step a 1105-1), then the game control unit a 200 determines whether the game state has fallen (step a 1105-2). Here, the falling of the gaming state refers to the transition of the gaming state from the high probability state or the medium probability state to the low probability state (also refers to the pachinko game machine a100 having such a specification as a falling machine or the like). In this type of pachinko gaming machine a100, in the gaming state where the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is high (in the present embodiment, the high probability state and the medium probability state), the gaming state is fallen whenever the special symbol lottery is performed. A determination is made as to whether or not. In this determination, for example, similarly to the determination of the big hit, the determination of the big hit symbol, etc., random number value (fall random number value) is acquired at the time of winning in the first starting opening a121 or the second starting opening a122. This can be done using a table configured to cause a fall of state to occur. As an aspect of the fall, the high probability state or the medium probability state may be directly shifted to the low probability state. Further, in the case of the high probability state, transition to the medium probability state may be performed once, and further, two stages of fall may be generated such as transition from the medium probability state to the low probability state. In an embodiment in which two stages of fall occur, for example, a setting that falls to a medium probability state with a probability of 1/60 in a high probability state and falls to a low probability state with a probability of 1/60 in a medium probability state can be considered . In addition, the probability that the game state falls may be made different at each stage, for example, in the high probability state it falls to the medium probability state with a probability of 1/40, and in the medium probability state it has the low probability with 1/100 It may be set to fall into the state.

  When it is determined that the gaming state is to be dropped (Yes in step a1105-2), the game control unit a200 turns off the probability change flag (step a1108). Further, at this time, if the time saving flag is not ON, it is set to ON, and the value of the lottery number J in the time saving state is set to 100.

  When it is determined that the gaming state is not to fall (No in step a1105-2), the game control unit a200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of times of drawing (number of times of fluctuation) X in the high probability state or the medium probability state (step a1106) Then, it is checked whether or not the number of times of drawing X has become 0 (step a1107). Then, if the lottery number X = 0 (Yes at step a1107), the probability change flag is turned OFF (step a1108). The operation of turning on the probability change flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 1-15) in the special winning opening process (FIG. 1-14) described later.

  If the probability change flag is OFF (No in step a 1105-1) or after turning off the probability change flag in step a 1108, or if the value of the lottery number X is not 0 (No in step a 1107), then the game control unit At a200, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made in the special symbol lottery this time (step a1109). Then, if it is a jackpot (Yes in step a1109), next, the game control unit a200 determines whether or not the type of jackpot is long (step a1110).

  Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot can be made based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 1-9). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 1-17-2 described later is set, it is Yes at step a1109. If the out-of-round symbol or the small hit symbol is set in the RAM a 203 by the big hit determination processing, it is No at step a1109.

  If the type of jackpot is long (Yes at step a 1110), the game control unit a 200 turns on the long-running game flag (step a 1111). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM a 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state (long playing state) in which the type of the jackpot is long. In addition, here, in long, it does not distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. Whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state is specified by turning on the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 1-15) in the special winning opening process (FIG. 1-14) described later .

  If the type of jackpot is not long (No at step a 1110), the game control unit a 200 turns on the short hit gaming flag (step a 1112). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM a 203 becomes a jackpot gaming state (short hitting gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is short. As in the case of the long case, the short case does not distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state.

  After the win game flag is turned on in step a1111 or step a1112, the game control unit a200 initializes the values of the number of times of drawing J and X (step a1113). If the time saving flag is ON in step a1101 and the number of times of drawing J is not 0 in step a1103, the game control unit a200 turns off the time saving flag (step a1114). Similarly, if the probability variation flag is ON at step a1105-1 and the number of times of drawing X is not 0 at step a1107, the probability variation flag is turned OFF (step a1114).

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (No in step a1109), next, the game control unit a200 determines whether the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a small hit (step a1115) ). If it is not a small hit (No in step a 1115), the process during stoppage is ended.
On the other hand, if the game is a small hit (Yes in step a1115), the game control unit a200 starts a small hit game (step a1116). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM a 203 becomes the small hitting gaming state. In the small hitting game, as described above, the first large winning opening a 125A is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times, and the process ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After initializing the values of the lottery numbers J and X in step a1113, the game control unit a200 starts the opening operation (step a1117). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on which of the steps a1111 and a1112 the hit game flag is turned on. That is, depending on the state of the hit game flag, any one of the opening operations set in the long hit game and the short hit game is performed.
Thereafter, the game control unit a200 sets an opening command for performing effects in the opening operation according to the winning game flag in the effect control unit a300 in the RAM a 203 (step a1118), and ends the process during suspension. The opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 of FIG.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 1-12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (step a816 in FIG. 1-8).
In the customer waiting setting process, the game control unit a200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM a 203 (step a1201). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine a 100 is in a customer waiting state.

  When the customer waiting flag is ON, since the pachinko game machine a 100 is in the customer waiting state, the process is ended as it is (Yes in step a 1201). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit a200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM a 203 (step a1202), and turns on the customer waiting flag (step a1203). The customer waiting command set in step a1202 is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 of FIG. In addition, with the customer waiting flag, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and it is set in the state where there is no hold.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 1-13 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing of the symbol processing shown at step a 503 in FIG. 1-5.
In this normal symbol process, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 of the game control unit a200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM a 203 (step a1301). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when winning in the normal symbol lottery. In the state where the auxiliary game flag is set, the electric tulip a123 is opened in accordance with the electric tulip process (FIG. 1-16) described later (FIG. 1-16), and the second start port a122 is likely to be won (auxiliary game state).

  When the auxiliary gaming flag is ON, the auxiliary gaming state is already in progress, and the normal symbol is stopped, so the normal symbol processing is ended without starting the normal symbol variation (Yes in step a1301). On the other hand, if the auxiliary gaming flag is OFF (No in step a1301), then the normal symbol variation control unit a237 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in the normal symbol variation (step a1302). . If the normal symbol is not changing (No at step a1302), then the normal symbol change control unit a237 determines whether the number of holdings G (see FIG. 1-7) of the non-fluctuating part of the normal symbol is 1 or more (step a1303) . If the number of reservations G = 0 (No at Step a 1303), it means that there is no winning for starting the lottery of the normal symbol, so the processing is ended without starting the normal symbol variation.

  On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is 1 or more (Yes in step a1303), the normal symbol variation control unit a237 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations G (step a1304), and the random number per hit in the current regular symbol lottery It is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won (step a1305). Whether or not the player has won is whether the value of the random number acquired in step a704 of FIG. 1-7 matches the value set as the winning value in a table or the like shown in FIG. 1-17-3 (b) described later It is decided by judging whether or not.

  Next, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (step a1306). That is, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol (hereinafter referred to as a winning symbol) representing that it has been won is set in the RAM a 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol representing that the lottery has fallen (hereinafter referred to as an out symbol) is set in the RAM a 203 as setting information.

  Next, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 sets the variation time of the normal symbol (step a1307). This fluctuation time is set based on the time saving flag set in the process of steps a1104 and a1114 in FIG. 1-11 and steps a1504 and a1507 in FIG. 1-15 described later. That is, when the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting by step a1307, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, for a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds) It is set. After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 starts the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display a 223 shown in FIGS. 1-2 (a) and 1-3 based on the setting contents of step a1307 a1308).

  After starting the variation of the normal symbol in step a1308, or when it is determined that the normal symbol variation is in progress in step a1302 (Yes in step a1302), the normal symbol variation control unit a237 determines whether the variation time has passed (Step a1309). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol in step a1308 has reached the variation time set in step a1307. If the fluctuation time has not passed (No in step a1309), the normal symbol fluctuation is continued, and the normal symbol processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is over (Yes in step a1309), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit a237 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display a 223 (step a1310). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery has been won based on the stopped normal symbol (step a1311). If the player is won (Yes in step a1311), the auxiliary gaming flag is set to ON (step a1312). On the other hand, if it is out of the lottery (No in step a1311), the normal symbol processing is ended without turning on the auxiliary gaming flag.

[A special winning opening process by the game control unit]
FIG. 1-14 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special winning opening process of the electric winning combination process shown in step a 504 of FIG. 1-5.
In the special winning opening process, the special winning opening operation control unit a 238 of the game control unit a 200 first checks whether or not the hit game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM a 203 (step a 1401). If the winning game flag is OFF, there is no winning of the first large winning opening a125A (or the second large winning opening a125B), so the special winning opening process is ended (No in step a1401). On the other hand, when the winning game flag is ON (Yes in step a1401), the big winning opening operation control unit a238 operates the jackpot operation started in the pachinko gaming machine a100 stopping process (FIG. 1-11). It is judged whether it is in the middle of the opening operation in control (step a1402).

  If the pachinko game machine a100 is in the process of opening (Yes in step a1402), then the special winning opening operation control unit a238 determines whether or not the time (opening time) in which the preset opening operation should be performed has passed. It judges (step a1403). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation in the special winning opening a 125 is continued, and the special winning opening process is ended (No in step a 1403). On the other hand, if the opening time has passed (Yes in step a1403), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 then sets the special winning opening a125 to be activated (step a1404), and initializes the winning number C (C =). 0) (step a1405), the value of the number of operation rounds R of the special winning opening a125 is added 1 from the current value (step a1406), and the special winning opening a125 is activated (opened) (step a1407).

  In the operation setting of step a 1404, the operation pattern of the special winning opening a 125 and the number of rounds to be operated by the operation pattern (the number of operation rounds) are set. As a case where large winning a prize opening a125 operates, when it is the big hit with special symbol pulling out, there are times when it was the small hitting. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are set variously according to the types of these hits. As an example, in the case of long (per 16R length or per 4R length), for example, 16 rounds (16R) or 4 rounds (4R) are operated depending on the type of jackpot, and 29.5 seconds open in one round Do it once. In the case of per short (4R per short), for example, four rounds (4R) are operated, and one round of opening for 0.1 second is performed once. In the case of a small hit, for example, one round (1R) is operated, and in this one round, 0.1 seconds of opening is performed four times. Here, when the operation in the short period and the operation in the small period are compared in the above example, the opening of 0.1 seconds is performed four times. That is, the action of the big winning opening a125 seen from the player is the same in the case of the short hitting and the case of the small hitting, and the short hitting and the small hitting are distinguished only from the action of the big winning opening a125 on the game board a110 You can not do it.

  Also, as another example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated per long, one 29.5 second opening is performed in one round, two rounds (2R) are operated per short, and 0 in one round. .9 seconds of opening are performed twice, and for small hits, one round (1R) is operated, and in this one round, opening of 0.9 seconds is performed twice. Also in this case, when the operation in the short hit and the operation in the small hit are compared, the opening of 0.9 seconds is performed twice for both, and the operation of the first big winning opening a 125A seen from the player is short The same applies in the case of and in the case of a small hit.

  In the case of a small hit, the law stipulates that the open cumulative time of the first large winning opening a 125A must be set within 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long hit or short hit), the first large winning opening a 125A must be opened a plurality of times continuously. Therefore, in the case where it is difficult to distinguish the operation in the small hitting and the operation in the short hitting apparently as described above, in the small hitting, the open cumulative time in one operation is within a range satisfying 1.8 seconds or less. The operation mode in which the first large winning opening a 125A is opened two or more times is set, and in the case of the short winning, the number of rounds equal to the number of times of opening the small hitting is set.

  Next, the special winning opening operation control unit a 238 determines whether the opening time in the operation pattern set in step a 1404 has passed (step a 1408). If the open state at the special winning opening a125 has not passed the opening time (No at step a1408), then the special winning opening operation control unit a238 determines that the number of winnings C to the special winning opening a125 is a prescribed number (for example, It is judged whether or not it is 9 or more (step a1409). If the opening time has not passed and the winning number C is less than the specified number, the operating state (opening state) of the special winning opening a 125 is continued, so the special winning opening process is ended (at step a1409). No). On the other hand, if the opening time has passed (Yes at step a1408), or if the winning number C has reached the specified number (Yes at step a1409), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 ends the operation of the special winning opening a125 ( Close the mouth) (step a1410).

  Next, the special winning opening operation control unit a 238 determines whether or not the number of rounds R of operation of the special winning opening a 125 has reached the maximum value set in step a 1404 (step a 1411). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operation is performed, and the special winning opening process is ended (No in step a1411).

When the number R of rounds of operation of the special winning opening a 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in Step a1411), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 then starts an ending operation (Step a1412). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the winning game flag among the ending operations set in the long hitting game and the short hitting game.
Thereafter, the special winning opening operation control unit a 238 sets an ending command for effecting in the ending operation according to the winning game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM a 203 (step a 1413). The opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 of FIG.

  Next, the special winning opening operation control unit a 238 resets the number of rounds R of operation of the special winning opening a 125 to 0 (step a 1414), and then an ending operation with a preset time elapsed from the start of the ending operation is performed. It is determined whether the time to be checked (ending time) has passed (step a1417). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, and the special winning opening process is ended (No in step a1417). On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (Yes at step a1417), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 then turns the hit game flag OFF after passing through the game state setting processing by the game control unit a200 (step a1418). The special winning opening process is ended (step a1419). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

  If it is determined in step a1402 that the pachinko gaming machine a100 is not opening (No in step a1402), then the special winning opening operation control unit a238 determines whether it is in ending (step a1415). Then, if it is in the process of ending (Yes at step a 1415), the operations after step a 1417 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine a100 is not in the ending mode (No in step a1415), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 then determines whether the special winning opening a125 is in operation (open) (step a1416) . If it is not in operation (No at step a1416), the operations after step a1405 are executed. If it is in operation (Yes at step a1416), the operations after step a1408 are performed.
In addition, the effect performed in the small hit game mentioned above is the same as the effect performed in a short hit game, and can not distinguish a short hit and a small hit from an effect.

[Playing state setting processing]
The contents of the game state setting process (step a1418) by the game control unit a200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in step a1417), is shown in FIG. 1-15.
When the gaming state setting process is performed, it is assumed that the winning game flag is ON in step a1401 of FIG. 1-14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1-15, the game control unit a200 first determines the type of the hit (steps a1501, a1502, a1503, a1506). These determinations can be made based on, for example, the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM a 203 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 1-9). In addition, since these determinations are substantially the same as steps a902, a903, and a905 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 1-9), the determination results of steps a902, a903, and a905 may be used.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 1-15, the high probability state and the medium probability state are assumed to be definite variation (set the probability variation flag ON), and the low probability condition is set non definite variation (do not set the definite variation flag ON).

If it is a small hit (Yes in step a1501), the gaming state (the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine a100) is not changed, so the gaming state setting process is ended.
In addition, when the kind of a hit is a small hit, it is possible to perform control which changes a game state. For example, this is a control example in which a low probability state becomes a medium probability state by a small hit (a probability change flag ON of step a1509 described later). In addition, there can be mentioned a control example in which the medium probability state becomes a high probability state by a small hit.

  If the type of winning is a jackpot in the low probability time short game state (No in step a1501, Yes in steps a1502 and a1503), the game control unit a200 turns on the time saving flag (step a1504). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM a 203 becomes the low probability at-time gaming state. Further, the game control unit a200 sets an initial value of the number of times of lottery J (step a1505), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low probability time short game state is performed 100 times, the low probability time short game state is ended, and the low probability time short non-play state occurs.

  On the other hand, if the type of winning is a low probability and short non-gaming state jackpot (No in step a1501, Yes in a1502, Yes in step a1503), the game control unit a200 does not turn on both the time saving flag and the probability variation flag Finish. Therefore, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM a 203 with respect to the game after this jackpot becomes the low probability time short non-gaming state.

  If the type of winning is a high probability time short game state jackpot or a medium probability time short game state jackpot (No in steps a1501 and a1502, Yes in step a1506), the game control unit a200 turns on the time saving flag (step a1507) And an initial value of the number of times of drawing J is set (step a1508). The initial value of the lottery number J in this case is 10000 in the illustrated example. In addition, the game control unit a200 turns on the probability change flag (step a1509), and sets an initial value of the lottery number X (step a1510). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10000 in the illustrated example. As a result, depending on the type of winning, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM a 203 becomes the high probability time short gaming state or the medium probability time short gaming state. Then, if the lottery in the high probability time short game state or the medium probability time short game state is performed 10000 times, the high probability time short game state or the medium probability time short game state is ended, and the low probability time short no game state is attained.

On the other hand, if the type of hit is a high probability / short non-gaming jackpot or a medium probability / non-gaming jackpot (No at steps a1501, a1502, and a1506), the game control unit a200 turns ON only the probability change flag (Step a1509) The initial value (10000 times) of the lottery number X is set (Step a1510). As a result, depending on the type of winning, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM a 203 is in the high probability time short non-playing state or the medium probability time short playing state. And if the lottery in this high probability time non-playing state is performed 10000 times, the high probability time non-playing state or the medium probability time short playing state ends, and the low probability time non-playing state becomes.
In addition, depending on the specification of the pachinko gaming machine a100, there is one that is set to shift to the high probability state or the medium probability state when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In such a case, the determination in step a1502 in FIG. 1-15 is always No, and the processes in steps a1503 to a1505 are not performed.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIGS. 1-16 is a flowchart which shows the content of the electrically-driven tulip process among the electrically-driven part processes shown to step a 504 of FIG. 1-5.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit a 239 of the game control unit a 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM a 203 (step a 1601). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip a 123 is not opened, and the electric tulip processing is ended (No in step a 1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in step a1601), the electric tulip operation control unit a239 next determines whether the electric tulip a123 is in operation (step a1602).

  When the electric tulip a123 is not in operation (No in Step a1602), the electric tulip operation control unit a239 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip a123 (Step a1603), and operates the electric tulip a123 in the set operation pattern ( Step a1604). Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in the process of steps a1104 and a1114 in FIG. 1-11 and steps a1504 and a1507 in FIG. 1-15. For example, when the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting in step a1603, an operation pattern of opening once at an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and when the time saving flag is ON, 1.80 seconds of The actuation pattern is set to open three times at the opening time. As described above, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when in the time saving state), the electric tulip a123 is opened for a plurality of times for a long time, and the prize support (electric chew support) Is done.

  When it is determined in step a1602 that the electric tulip a123 is in operation (Yes in step a1602) or after the electric tulip a123 is operated in step a1604, the electric tulip operation control unit a239 opens the set operation pattern. It is determined whether time has elapsed (step a1605). If the open time has not elapsed, the operation state (open state) of the electric tulip a 123 is continued, and the electric tulip processing is ended (No in step a1605). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes at step a1605), the electric tulip operation control unit a239 turns off the auxiliary gaming flag, and ends the electric tulip processing (step a1606).

[Method of judgment by random number]
Here, the method of determination by random numbers performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 1-9), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 1-10), the normal symbol process (FIG. 1-13) and the like will be described in detail.
FIGS. 1-17 is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the random number (determination table) used by this Embodiment.
Fig. 1-17-1 shows a configuration example of big hit random number, Fig. 1-17-2 shows a configuration example of big hit symbol random number, Fig. 1-17-3 (a) shows a configuration example of reach random number, Fig. 1-17 A configuration example of the random number is shown in -3 (b).

  Referring to FIG. 1-17-1, three types of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine a100 are set as jackpots of low probability state, jackpots of medium probability state, and jackpots of high probability state as judgment values of jackpot random numbers. . The range of the value of the random number (big hit random number) is 400 in each of 0 to 399. In the case of the special symbol lottery in the low probability state (big hit lottery), only one winning value (value "0") is set, and the winning probability is 1/400. In the case of the special symbol lottery in the middle probability state, four winning values (values "0" to "3") are set, and the winning probability is 1/100 (= 4/400). Further, in the case of the special symbol lottery in the high probability state, 10 winning values (value "0" to "9") are set, and the winning probability is 10/400 (= 1/40). That is, in the illustrated example, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the middle probability state, the winning probability becomes four times as compared with the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the low probability state, and the special symbol lottery is performed in the high probability state And the probability of winning is 10 times. In addition, in the example of illustration, although it is not shown about the judgment of whether it is a small hit performed at the time of a gap in a special symbol lottery, the setting of the random number as shown in Figure 1-17-1 also about a small hit Thus, a lottery is won to win a small hit with a predetermined probability.

  Referring to FIG. 1-17-2, the jackpot symbol has a type of jackpot based on a special symbol triggered by winning in the first starting opening a121, 1 per 16R, 2 per 4R, and 4R per There are seven types of 2 per 1 and 4 R lengths, 1 per 4 R short, 2 per 4 R short and 3 per 4 R short. In addition, 4 types of 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16 R length, 1 per 4 R length and 2 per 4 R length are set as types of jackpot based on special symbols triggered by winning in the second starting opening a122 There is. That is, there is no short hit in the jackpot winning when the second starting opening a122 is won.

  Here, 1 per 16R length is a jackpot of the high probability time short game state. 2 per 16R length is a jackpot of high probability time short game state, is a jackpot where control of the round game by the aspect of the rank up bonus (RUB) in the jackpot game is performed. The rank up bonus will be described later. 1 per 4R length is a jackpot of high probability time short game state. 2 per 4R length is a jackpot of medium probability time short game state. 4R short per 1 is a jackpot of high probability time short game state. 4R short 2 is a jackpot of high probability time non-playing state. The 4R short 3 is a jackpot of medium probability time non-playing state.

  In the example of illustration, the range of a random number value (big hit symbol random number value) is 100 pieces of 0-99, also when it wins any of the 1st starting opening a121 and the 2nd starting opening a122. When winning in the first starting opening a121, the winning value of 1 per 16R length is set to 20 (value "0" to "19"), and the winning probability is 20/100. One winning value of 2 per 16R length is set (value "20"), and the winning probability is 1/100. Thirty-five winning values of 1 per 4R length (values “21” to “55”) are set, and the winning probability is 35/100. 35 winning values of 2 per 4R length (values “56” to “90”) are set, and the winning probability is 35/100. Three winning values of 1R per 4R are set (values "91" to "93"), and the winning probability is 3/100. Three winning values of 4R short 2 are set (values “94” to “96”), and the winning probability is 3/100. Three winning values of 4R short 3 are set (values “97” to “99”), and the winning probability is 3/100. On the other hand, when winning in the second starting opening a122, 50 winning values (value "0" to "49") are set for 1 per 16R length, and the winning probability is 50/100. Four winning values of 2 per 16R length (values "50" to "53") are set, and the winning probability is 4/100. Twenty-three (values “54” to “76”) are set as 1 winning value per 4R length, and the winning probability is 23/100. Twenty-three (2 "77" to "99") winning values are set per 4R length, and the winning probability is 23/100.

2 per 16R long, in the big hit game, the control of the round game by the aspect of the rank up bonus (RUB) is performed. In this rank-up bonus, 16 long round games are played, but in the effect, the number of rounds is not notified at the start of the jackpot game. Then, for example, by performing the remaining round games after the effects such as illusion with 4R long and the operation control of the big winning opening a 125, it appears as if the number of rounds has increased during the big hit game.
In the case of 2 per 16R length, it is determined by another symbol how many rounds of 16 rounds the long opening of the second big winning opening a 125 B (see FIG. 1A) is to be executed. For example, the second large winning opening a125B performs a long opening in all rounds, or performs a long opening in a predetermined number of rounds and then performs a short opening in the remaining number of times (long after short) is there. An example of the long and short per long is, for example, the case where four rounds are long open and eight rounds are short open. By providing a different opening pattern for such a second large winning opening a125B, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of how many rounds the second large winning opening a125B will be.
In addition, an example may be considered in which such long-per-short control is executed for the first large winning opening a125A (see FIG. 1A) in addition to the second large winning opening a125B.

The 1R per 1R, the 2R per 4R short and the 3R per 4R are both open short round games. Among them, 4R short per 1 is a jackpot to shift to a high probability time short game state with a short time state with a short time state after sock game (so-called sudden). On the other hand, 2R per 4R and 3R per 3R are jackpots that transition to high probability non-playing state or non-playing state during non-time-saving state or non-playing state after playing a big hit (so-called latent) . When the 4R short 2 and the 4R short 3 are won, a latent effect is not clearly notified that the gaming state transitions to the high probability state or the medium probability state as a jackpot game or a subsequent effect.
In addition, it is also conceivable to shift 1 per 4 R short (probable) to a high probability non-game state without a time-short state.

In the jackpot determination process, when the jackpot is won by the judgment based on the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 1-17-1, the jackpot symbol random number value acquired when winning in the first starting opening a121 or the second starting opening a122 (FIG. According to 1-6), a special symbol corresponding to any of the jackpots shown in FIG. 1-17-2 is specified (see FIG. 1-9). Then, based on the identified special symbol, the content of the jackpot game and the subsequent gaming state are determined.
The various jackpots shown in FIG. 1-17-2 are all shifted to the high probability state or the medium probability state (probable change) after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in the illustrated example, the probability change rush rate when winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 100%. In addition, in pachinko game machine a100 of this form where fall of game state is done, when it moves to low probability state due to fall of game state, it becomes time saving state until the special symbol lottery is done 100 times, electric tulip a123 The prize support (electric chew support) to the second starting opening a122 is performed by the opening of.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 1-17-2, the jackpot when winning in the first starting opening a121 has a high probability of being won per 4R long (3 per 1 to 4 R long). The jackpot in the case of winning in the mouth a122 is highly likely to be won per 16R length (1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length). Thus, various game characteristics can be provided by making the winning probability of the type of jackpot different when winning in the first starting opening a121 and winning in the second starting opening a122. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting opening a121 and the second starting opening a122 in the game board a110 is devised, and it becomes easy to aim at either one of the first starting opening a121 and the second starting opening a122 in a specific state (mode) It is also possible to encourage the player to more actively participate in the game by configuring the

Next, determination of reach random numbers will be described.
Referring to FIG. 1-17-3 (a), the range of random number values is 250 pieces of 0 to 249, and 22 random number values are assigned to the lottery result (reach presence) for performing the reach effect, and the reach effect 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (without reach). That is, in the example of illustration, reach presentation is performed with the probability of 22/250 (= 11/125), when it does not make a big hit by a special symbol lottery.

Note that the reach presence effect and the reach no effect determined by the reach random numbers indicate an aspect of the effect performed in the image display unit a 114. That is, during the variable display of the special symbol, for example, the symbol consisting of a number line in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction is displayed in three lines, and the variable display of the special symbol is started At the same time, these symbols start to scroll.
Then, in the effect with reach, when the scroll is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the scroll and each symbol is stopped and displayed, first, any two symbols (number sequence) stop first. At this time, the same number will be displayed on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally, and the last row will gradually decrease the scroll speed, and there is an expectation that three identical numbers will be aligned on the straight line. Give to the player. Such reachable effects include so-called super reach effects in which various characters appear and stories develop before the last row of scrolls is stopped. On the other hand, in the no reach effect, unlike in the reach effect, the symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the same number is not aligned on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally, without an effect giving an expectation to the player. It is a thing.
As described above, the reach random number is for determining whether the effect with reach or the effect with no reach is to be performed in the image display unit a114 when the determination result of the big hit random number is a loss. The reach presence effect appears with probability, and the player is given a sense of expectation moderately.
In addition, in the case of winning the jackpot, the presence effect with reach is always performed, and finally the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a state in which the same number is aligned on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally. On the other hand, when there is a reach effect in the case of winning a small hit or in the case of a loss, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, determination of the random number used for the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 1-17-3 (b), the range of the random number is ten, from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned as winning values for. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate a 124 and the normal symbol lottery (opening and closing lottery) is performed in the time saving state, the player is elected with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate a 124 and the normal symbol lottery (opening / closing lottery) is performed in the time saving state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number value as determination information used for various types of lottery is incremented by one each time the random number updating process (step a501) shown in FIG. 1-5 is performed. And the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired by the starting opening switch processing (FIG. 1-6) and the gate switch processing (FIG. 1-7), special symbol processing (FIG. 1-8) and ordinary symbol processing ( It is used in Figure 1-13). The random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and returns to 0 again after reaching the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 1009 for the jackpot random number). In addition, since the random number updating process is performed at fixed time intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a possibility that the winning value may be estimated based on the information. Therefore, in general, a mechanism for randomly changing the initial value of each random number at an appropriate timing has been introduced.
Note that the range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIGS. 1-17-1 to 1-17-3 are merely examples, and are limited to the values illustrated. It is not a thing.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control unit a300 will be described.
FIG. 1-18 is a flowchart showing the operation of the effect control unit a300.
The operation of the effect control unit a300 includes the main process shown in FIG. 1-18 (a) and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 1-18 (b). With reference to FIG. 1-18 (a), the effect control unit a300 first performs initial setting at startup (step a1801), and after setting the cycle of CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) (step a1802), is set. While updating the random numbers used in the effect control according to the cycle (step a1803), the interrupt process is accepted.

  The interrupt process is periodically performed according to the cycle set in step a1802. Referring to FIG. 1-18 (b), in this interrupt processing, the effect control unit a300 receives a command from the game control unit a200 and performs command reception processing (step a1811). In this command reception process, an effect pattern is selected. Further, the effect control unit a300 performs effect button processing for accepting an operation of the effect button a161 or the like by the player (step a1812). Thereafter, the effect control unit a300 performs command transmission processing to transmit a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image / sound control unit a310 and the lamp control unit a320 (step a1813). As a result, effects such as image display and sound output to the image display unit a 114, operation of the movable part a 115, and light emission of the panel lamp a 116 and the frame lamp a 157 are performed.

[Command reception process by effect control unit]
FIG. 1-19 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing (step a 1811 in FIG. 1-18 (b)).
In the command reception process, the effect control unit a300 first determines whether the received command is a command for increasing the number of holdings (holding number increasing command) (step a1901). The hold number increase command is set in the game start control process shown in FIG. 1-6 in the game control unit a200 (steps a606 and a612), and the effect control is performed in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. It is sent to part a300. If the command is a hold number increase command (Yes in step a1901), the effect control unit a300 adds 1 to the hold number value held in the RAM a 303 (step a1902), and holds that indicates the hold number value after addition Several commands are set in the RAM a 303 (step a 1903).

If the received command is not the pending number increase command (No at step a1901) or if a command is received after setting the pending number increase command at step a1903, the effect control unit a300 determines whether the received command is a change start command (Step a1904). This variation start command is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 1-8 in the game control unit a200 (step a811), and transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output processing (step a506) shown in FIG. 1-5. Be done.
If the received command is a change start command (Yes in step a1904), the effect control unit a300 executes an effect selection process (step a1905). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a change start command (No at Step a1901 and Step a1904), or if a command is received after execution of the effect selection process at Step a1905, the effect control unit a300 determines whether the received command is a change stop command It is determined (step a1906). This fluctuation stop command is set in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 1-8 in the game control unit a200 (step a 814), and transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. Be done.
If the received command is a change stop command (Yes in step a1906), the effect control unit a300 executes a process during change effect end (step a1907). Details of the process during the end of the variation production will be described later.

When the received command is not the fluctuation start command and the fluctuation stop command (No in steps a1901, step a1904 and step a1906), or when a command is received after execution of the processing during completion of the fluctuation in step a1907, the effect control unit a300 It is determined whether the received command is an opening command for starting the opening in the jackpot effect (step a1908). The opening command is set in the in-stop process shown in FIG. 1-11 (step a1118), and transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. 1-5.
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in step a1908), the effect control unit a300 executes a hit effect selection process (step a1909). Details of the hit presentation selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not the fluctuation start command, the fluctuation stop command and the opening command (No at Step a1901, Step a1904, Step a1906, and Step a1908), or if a command is received after execution of the winning selection process at Step a1909, The control unit a300 determines whether the received command is an ending command for starting ending in the jackpot effect (step a1910). This ending command is set in the special winning opening process shown in FIG. 1-14 (step a1413), and is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. 1-5.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in step a 1910), the effect control unit a 300 executes an ending effect selection process (step a 1911). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

  If the received command is not the fluctuation start command, the fluctuation stop command, the opening command and the ending command (No at step a1901, step a1904, step a1906, step a1908 and step a1910), or after the ending effect selection process at step a1911 is finished Is received, the effect control unit a300 next executes customer waiting command reception processing for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state (step a1912). Details of customer waiting command reception processing will be described later.

FIG. 1-20 is a diagram showing an example of setting of the mode flag.
When an effect is performed by the effect control unit a300, various effect patterns are selected and executed based on the effect mode to be set. The effect mode is determined by the mode flag set in the RAM a 303. Here, one of the values 0 to 4 is set as the mode flag, and five types of effect modes from A mode to E mode are assigned respectively. The mode flag is set in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol lottery or the number of lottery times of the special symbol lottery.
Mode flag 1 for long transitions (1 per 16 R length, 2 per 16 R length, 1 per 4 R length, 2 per 4 R length) for transition to high probability state or medium probability state, mode flag for jackpot with low probability state The mode flag 3 is assigned to 2 for a non-latent short (1 per 4R short), and the mode flag 4 is assigned to a low and a low probability for a low probability. Here, the types of these jackpots (patterns) are the same as those shown in FIG. 1-17-2. In the pachinko gaming machine a100 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 1-17-2, the jackpot that is in the low probability state after the jackpot game is not provided. Therefore, there is no jackpot corresponding to mode flag 2. Also, in FIG. 1-20, the mode flag 0 is not assigned to either. In mode flags 1 to 4, mode flag 0 is set by executing the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times.
Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 1-20, the parameter M (M value) used in the processing during the end of the variation effect is set individually for each mode except the A mode.

1-21 is a flowchart which shows the content of the presentation selection process (step a1905) of FIG. 1-19.
In the effect selection process, the effect control unit a300 first analyzes the received change start command (step a2101). Further, the effect control unit a300 refers to the current mode flag of the pachinko gaming machine a100 from the setting of the RAM a 303 (step a2102), and subtracts 1 from the value of the holding number held in the RAM a 303 (step a2103). Then, the effect control unit a300 is based on the effect mode determined by various setting information (type of jackpot, information on gaming state after jackpot game, fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained from analysis result of fluctuation start command and mode flag In the effect mode, an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of pattern variation by an image displayed on the image display unit a 114 is selected (step a2104). Finally, the effect control unit a300 reads out from the ROM a 302 the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern, and sets, in the RAM a 303, a variation effect start command instructing the start of execution of the selected effect. Then, the effect selection process is ended (step a2105).
Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting an effect pattern of symbol variation in step a2104, an effect mode, a variation pattern, and an effect random number (one of the random numbers updated in step a1801 of FIG. The effect pattern is determined based on the fact that the effect random number value is acquired). Based on the effect pattern determined here, the variable display of the decorative symbol, the background effect, and the advance effect are determined. In addition, the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol is an effect display performed by the image display unit a114 in accordance with the fluctuation display of a special symbol performed by the first special symbol display a 221 or the second special symbol display a 222. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, reach effect and the like are executed.

FIG. 1-22 is a flowchart which shows the content of the processing (step a1907) in process of completion | finish of change production of FIG. 1-19.
In the processing during the end of the fluctuation effect, the effect control unit a300 first analyzes the received fluctuation stop command (step a2201). Further, the effect control unit a300 refers to the current mode flag of the pachinko gaming machine a100 from the setting of the RAM a 303 (step a2202). Then, the effect control unit a300 determines whether the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is hit (large hit or small hit) based on the information indicating the type of symbol when the special symbol change obtained from the analysis result of the change stop command is stopped. It is judged whether or not it is (step a2203). If it is a hit (Yes at step a 2203), the mode flag set in the RAM a 303 is changed based on the setting example shown in FIG. 1-20 according to the type of the hit (step a 2204).

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a hit (No in step a2203), the effect control unit a300 next checks whether the value of the mode flag is 0 (step a2205). If the mode flag is not 0 (No at step a2205), the effect control unit a300 subtracts 1 from the parameter M (step a2206), and checks whether the value of M has become 0 (step a2207). If the value of M becomes 0 (Yes at step a2207), the effect control unit a300 sets the mode flag to 0 (step a2208).

  If the mode flag is 0 in step a2205 (Yes in step a2205), the value of parameter M does not become 0 in step a2207 (No in step a2207), or the mode flag is set to 0 in step a2208 After or after changing the mode flag in step a2204, the effect control unit a300 sets the change effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol change to the RAM a 303, and ends the processing during the end of the change effect ((2) Step a2209). Here, referring to FIGS. 1-20, when the mode flag is changed in step a2204, the effect mode after the end of the variation effect becomes the effect mode according to the type of win. When the mode flag is 0 at step a2205 and when the mode flag is set to 0 at step a2208, the effect mode after the end of the variation effect is A mode. If the value of the parameter M does not become 0 at step a2207, the effect mode up to this point is continued.

FIGS. 1-23 is a flowchart which shows the content of the hit presentation selection processing (step a1909) of FIG. 1-19.
In this winning effect selection process, the effect control unit a300 first analyzes the received opening command (Step a 2301), and selects a pattern (per effect pattern) of effects according to the contents of the effect mode based on the mode flag (Step a 2302). Then, the effect control unit a300 reads out from the ROM a 302 the image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern, and sets a winning effect start command for instructing the selected effect in the RAM a 303 together with these data. The effect selection processing ends (step a2303). Thereby, the effect during the jackpot is determined.

FIG. 1-24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (step a1911) of FIG. 1-19.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit a300 first analyzes the received ending command (step a2401), and selects a pattern (ending effect pattern) of effects according to the contents of the effect mode based on the mode flag (step a 2402). Then, the effect control unit a300 reads image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern from the ROM a 302, and sets an ending effect start command for instructing the selected effect in the RAM a 303 together with these data. The effect selection processing ends (step a2403).

FIGS. 1-25 is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process (step a1912) of FIGS. 1-19.
The effect control unit a300 determines whether a customer waiting command for shifting to a customer waiting state has been received (step a2501). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in step a 2501), the effect control unit a 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (step a 2502), and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM a 303 (step a 2503). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in step a 2501), the effect control unit a 300 determines whether the measurement flag held in the RAM a 303 is ON (step a 2504). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in step a 2504), the customer waiting command reception process is ended.

  If the measurement flag is ON (Yes in step a 2504 or after it is ON in step a 2503), the effect control unit a300 then determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time ( Step a 2505). If the time is not up (No in step a 2505), the customer waiting command reception process is ended. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in step a 2505), the effect control unit a 300 turns off the measurement flag stored in the RAM a 303 (step a 2506), and sets the customer waiting rendering command for performing customer waiting rendering in the RAM a 303 Then, the customer waiting command reception process is ended (step a2507).

  As described above, when the command reception process is completed, one of the variation production start command, the variation production end command, the hit presentation start command, the ending presentation start command, and the customer waiting presentation command is set in the RAM a 303.

FIG. 1-26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button process (step a 1812 in FIG. 1-18 (b)).
In the effect button process, the effect control unit a300 first determines whether the player has operated the operation means such as the effect button a161 (step a2601). Here, the operation of the operation means includes that the effect button a 161 is pressed and turned on, and that the center key and the surrounding key of the effect key a 162 are pressed and turned on. Also, in the case where an operation device other than the effect button a 161 and the effect key a 162 such as a touch panel is provided in the pachinko gaming machine a 100, the detection of the operation of the device is included. The effect control unit a300 receives an operation signal from the controller of these devices, and detects that the operation has been performed.

  If the operation means such as the effect button a161 is operated (Yes in step a2601), the effect control unit a300 sets the effect button command including the information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM a 303, and ends the effect button processing Step a2602).

  Thereafter, the effect control unit a300 performs the command transmission process (step a1813) shown in FIG. 1-18 (b), and the command set in the RAM a 303 by the above-described command reception process and effect button process is processed by the image / sound control unit. It transmits to a310 and the lamp control unit a320. Then, based on the command received by the image / sound control unit a310 and the lamp control unit a320, the image display to the image display unit a114, the sound output, the operation of the movable part a115, the light emission of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157, etc. To control the set effect.

[Notice effect based on prior judgment]
Next, advance notice effects based on the prior determination according to this embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment of the first form example, as described with reference to FIGS. 1-6, the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting opening a121 (see FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1-3). When the starting opening switch a211 (see FIG. 1-3) is turned ON, the gaming ball wins the second starting opening a122 (see FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1-3), and the second starting opening switch a212 ( Prior to the judgment by lottery at the time of symbol fluctuation (refer to steps a 808 and a 809 in FIG. 1-8) when the symbol 1-3 is turned ON, the prior judgment (prereading) of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (See steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a notice effect is given to notify or suggest the determination result to the player based on the result of the above-mentioned prior determination. This advance presentation effect is executed in the case of the symbol change with respect to the other winning balls which is performed prior to the symbol change with respect to the winning balls (holding balls) for which the preliminary determination has been made. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of holding balls is four per one starting opening (the first starting opening a121 or the second starting opening a122) (see FIG. 1-6). Moreover, priority is given to digestion of the holding ball of the second starting opening a122. In this case, for example, in the case where the holding ball having the second starting opening a122 is determined in advance, a maximum of four winning balls, including those which are fluctuating, before the symbol fluctuation of the holding ball is performed. The symbol variation about will be performed. In the notice effect pertaining to the holding ball for which the pre-judgment has been performed, even if the symbol change is performed multiple times before the symbol change for the hold ball is performed, even if the notice effect straddling the plural pattern changes is performed good.

[Configuration of RAM of game control unit for performing advance notice effect and RAM of effect control unit]
In order to execute the advance notice effect based on such a prior determination, the RAM a 203 of the game control unit a 200 and the RAM a 303 of the effect control unit a 300 in the present embodiment have the following configuration.
FIG. 1-27 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM a 203 (see FIG. 1-3) of the game control unit a 200 according to the present embodiment. (A) of the figure is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area a 204, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in (a).

  As shown to (a) of the figure, RAMa203 is provided with the storage area a204 as a special symbol reservation storage area which memorize | stores the big hit random number acquired by big hit random number lottery. This storage area a 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum number of pending numbers of the first starting port a 121 and the pending number of the second starting port a 122 (when the upper limit value of each pending number is 4) . Specifically, the storage area a 204 includes a first storage unit a 204 a, a second storage unit a 204 b, a third storage unit a 204 c, a fourth storage unit a 204 d, a fifth storage unit a 204 e, a sixth storage unit a 204 f, and a seventh storage unit. A section a 204 g and an eighth storage section a 204 h are provided.

  In addition, as shown in (b) of the same figure, each of these storage units a 204 a to a 204 h has an area in which the number of fluctuations N when a big hit is won is stored and a winning opening (a first starting aperture a 121 Or an area where information representing another of the second starting port a122) is stored. Each of the storage units a 204 a to a 204 h has an area in which the acquired jackpot random number is stored, an area in which the symbol random number is stored, and an area in which the reach random number is stored. That is, the jackpot random number, the symbol random number and the reach random number are stored in each of the storage units a 204 a to a 204 h. Each of the storage units a 204 a to a 204 h has an area in which the prior determination information is stored. The prior determination information is information obtained by the above-described prior determination process based on each random number (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6). The content of the prior determination information is the same as the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 1-8), and specifically, the type of hit (big hit, small hit, missing), big hit If there is, the type of the jackpot, the content of the effect is information for indicating whether it is a reach effect or no reach effect.

  Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit a 204 a. More specifically, for example, when the random number is not stored in any of the first storage unit a 204 a to the eighth storage unit a 204 h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit a 204 a. Also, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit a 204 a to the fourth storage unit a 204 d, the acquired random numbers are stored in the fifth storage unit a 204 e.

FIG. 1-28 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration example of the RAM a 303 of the effect control unit a 300 according to the present embodiment. (A) of FIG. 1-28 is a block diagram showing the configurations of the pending storage areas a305 and a306 and the lighting number storage area a307, and (b) is a block showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in (a) FIG.
As shown in (a) of FIG. 1-28, the RAM a 303 is provided with a first pending storage area a305 and a second pending storage area a306 as a pending status storage area for storing the status in which the pending ball is suspended. . The first reserve storage area a305 and the second reserve storage area a306 respectively correspond to a reserve for winning in the first starting opening a121 and a reserve for winning in the second starting opening a122, each having four storage units. Have. Specifically, the first storage area a305 includes a first storage unit a305a, a second storage unit a305b, a third storage unit a305c, and a fourth storage unit a305d. The second storage area a306 includes a first storage unit a306a, a second storage unit a306b, a third storage unit a306c, and a fourth storage unit a306d.

  Further, as shown in (b) of the same figure, each of these storage units a 305 a to a 305 d and a 306 a to a 306 d has a hold flag storage area for turning ON / OFF the hold flag and a notification flag for turning ON / OFF the notification flag. And a storage area. The suspension flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a suspension ball for each of the storage units a 305 a to a 305 d and a 306 a to a 306 d. That is, for example, when the number of reservations due to the winning to the first starting opening a121 is 3, the holding flag is turned ON in the three holding flag storage areas of the first to third storage units a305a, a305b, and a305c. The notification flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a notification command of a pre-reading result, which will be described later, for each holding ball. That is, for example, prior determination processing (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6 and FIG. 1-29 described later) is performed on the three holding balls, and a notification command is set for the third holding ball. In this case, the notification flag is turned on in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit a 305 c.

  That is, the RAM a 203 and the RAM a 303 function as holding ball information storage means for storing information (holding ball information) including the result of the prior determination regarding the holding ball in the game control unit a 200 and the effect control unit a 300. The game control unit a200 is a lottery unit that performs a jackpot lottery, and is a prior determination unit that performs a prior determination process. The effect control unit a300 is effect control means for performing preview notification effect.

To explain further, as shown in (a) of FIG. 1-28, the RAM a 303 includes four drum lamp portions a11, a12, a13 and a14 (see, eg, FIGS. 1-36) disposed on the game board a110. A lighting number storage area a 307 is provided which stores the number of lighting (0 to 4), which is the number of lighting (0 to 4) among the lighting.
In addition, these drum lamp parts a11 to a14 have drums as a motif, and are used for effect as a board lamp a116. Control of lighting / extinguishing of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 and emission color is performed by the lamp control portion a320 according to a command from the effect control portion a300.

[Predetermination processing]
Here, the predetermination process (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6) in the case of pending prefetching will be described in detail.
First, the method of determination using random numbers in the prior determination process will be described.
FIGS. 1-29-1 to 1-29-3 are diagrams showing configuration examples of random numbers used in the prior determination processing according to the present embodiment.
Fig. 1-29-1 shows a configuration example of the big hit random number in the prior determination processing, Fig. 1-29-2 shows a configuration example of the symbol random number in the prior determination processing, and Fig. 1-29-3 shows the prior determination processing Examples of reach random numbers are shown.

Referring to FIG. 1-29-1, the jackpot random number in the predetermination process has the same configuration as the jackpot random number in the jackpot determination process illustrated in FIG. 1-17-1. That is, three types of gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine a100 are set: jackpot of low probability state, jackpot of medium probability state, and jackpot of high probability state. The range of values of random numbers is 400 in the range of 0 to 399. The winning probability in the predetermination is 1/400 (winning value "0") in the low probability state, and 4/400 (= 1/100) (winning value "0" to "3") in the medium probability state. In the high probability state, it is 10/400 (= 1/40) (the winning values “0” to “9”).
In addition, in the example of illustration, although it is not shown about the judgment whether it is a small hit performed at the time of a gap in a special symbol lottery, the small hit is also based on the random numbers as shown in FIG. 1-29-1. By prior determination, a lottery is won to win a small hit with a predetermined probability.

  With reference to FIG. 1-29-2, the jackpot symbol random number in the prior determination process has the same configuration as the jackpot symbol random number in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 1-17-2. That is, as a type of jackpot based on the special symbol triggered by winning in the first starting opening a121, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length, 2 per 4R length, 1 per 4R short There are 7 types of 2 per 4 R and 3 per 4 R short. In addition, 4 types of 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16 R length, 1 per 4 R length and 2 per 4 R length are set as types of jackpot based on special symbols triggered by winning in the second starting opening a122 There is.

  The range of the random number value is 100 in the range of 0 to 99 even when winning is made in any of the first starting opening a121 and the second starting opening a122. The winning probability in the prior determination is 20/100 (winning value “0” to “19”) for 1 per 16R length and 1/100 for 2 per 16R length when winning in the first starting opening a121. It is “20”), and 1 per 4R length is 35/100 (winning value “21” to “55”), and 2 per 4R length is 35/100 (winning value “56” to “90”) 4R short 1 is 3/100 (winning value "91" to "93"), 4R short 2 is 3/100 (winning value "94" to "96"), 4R short 3 It is 3/100 (the winning values "97" to "99"). On the other hand, when winning the second starting opening a122, 1 per 16R length is 50/100 (winning value "0" to "49"), and 2 per 16R length 4/100 (winning value "50" to " 53)), 1 per 4R length is 23/100 (winning values "54" to "76"), and 2 per 4R length is 23/100 (winning values "77" to "99").

  Referring to FIG. 1-29-3, the reach random numbers in the predetermination process have the same configuration as the reach random numbers in the variation pattern selection process illustrated in FIG. 1-17-3 (a). That is, the range of the random number value is 250 pieces of 0 to 249, and 22 random number values are allocated to the lottery result (reach presence) for performing the reach effect, and the lottery result (reach nothing) for not performing the reach effect is 228 Random numbers are assigned. Therefore, it is determined in advance determination that reach effect is to be performed with a probability of 8.8 / 100 (= 22/250) when the player does not make a big hit in the special symbol lottery.

[Predetermination processing by the game control unit]
1-30 is a flowchart which shows the content of the prior determination processing (step a605 of FIG. 1-6, a611) which concerns on this Embodiment.
In the flowchart shown in FIG. 1-30, the CPU a 201 of the game control unit a 200 determines whether the internal state is a high probability state or a medium probability state (hereinafter, described as a high (medium) probability state) (step a3001). Then, if it is determined that the state is a high (medium) probability state (Yes in step a3001), the CPU a 201 then performs predetermination on the fall (step a3002). As described with reference to FIGS. 1-11, the pachinko gaming machine a100 of this embodiment has a low probability state of playing state when the special symbol lottery is performed in the high (medium) probability state of playing state. A determination is made as to whether or not to fall. Therefore, also in the prior determination process, if the gaming state is a high (medium) probability state, it is determined whether or not there is a fall. In addition, prior to the determination of the fall, for example, when a lottery based on the fall random value is performed in the determination of step a1105-2 in FIG. 1-11, it can be performed using a table similar to the table used in the lottery .

  If the CPU a 201 determines in advance that the gaming state is not to fall (No in step a3002), the prior determination information relating to the "big hit" to change the internal state thereafter to the low probability state is the starting opening switch process (see FIG. 1-6) It is determined whether or not it is stored before the start of (a 3003). However, in the pachinko gaming machine a100 of the present embodiment, there is no jackpot that is in a low probability state after the jackpot game, and therefore, it is not determined Yes in step a3003. Therefore, the CPU a 201 determines No in step a3003 and selects a collision determination table for high (medium) probability state (step a3005).

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the low probability state (No in step a3001) or if the current gaming state is the high (medium) probability state, it is dropped from the high (medium) probability state to the low probability state If it is determined in advance (Yes in step a3002), the following processing is performed. That is, the CPUa 201 changes the subsequent gaming state to the high (medium) probability state in the storage area a 204 (see FIG. 1-27) of the RAM a 203, and the predetermination information related to the big hit is the starting opening switch process (FIG. 1-6) It is determined whether or not it is stored before the start of reference (step a3004). For example, when the random number is stored in the sixth storage unit a 204 f (see FIG. 1-27) of the storage area a 204 in step a 605 of the starting opening switch process (see FIG. 1-6), the first storage unit a 204 a 5) It is determined whether or not the prior determination information related to any of the jackpots that are in the high (medium) probability state is stored in the storage unit a 204 e (see FIG. 1-27). That is, it is determined whether there is any one of the holding balls that is digested prior to the holding ball reserved in the starting opening switch processing (see FIG. 1-6) and that the internal state is changed to the high (medium) probability state. This is because if such a holding ball is reserved first, the internal state will be in a high (medium) probability state when digesting the holding ball reserved in the start port switch processing. .
Therefore, if it is determined No at Step a3004, the collision determination table for the low probability state is selected (Step a3006), and if it is determined Yes, the collision determination table for the high (medium) probability state Are selected (step a3005).

  Thus, the processing of step a3003 and step a3004 makes it possible to determine the jackpot based on the internal state at the time of special symbol processing. Therefore, even when the internal state changes from the high probability state to the low probability state, or when the internal state changes from the low probability state to the high probability state, it is possible to derive an accurate prior determination result.

  Then, each random number is determined based on a table selected from the low probability random number determination table and the high probability random number determination table (step a3007), and the determination result is used as the prior determination information as the storage area a 204 (FIG. 1). Storage) (step a3008). Then, it is judged whether the judgment result is a big hit or a small hit (step a3009), and if it is a big hit or a small hit (Yes in step a3009), a predictive command is set (step a3010), and If it is a loss (No in step a3009), a normal command is set (step a3011). Thus, the predetermination process ends. The set prior determination command is sent to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (see step a506 in FIG. 1-5).

  In the predetermination process, it may be considered to adopt control not illustrated in FIG. 1-30. For example, when it is a loss (No in step a3009), it is determined whether or not reach effect is performed during the change, and when it is determined that reach effect is performed, a reach command is set. If the jackpot is determined in advance to be a jackpot (Yes in step a3009), the type of jackpot is determined in advance.

  Here, these predetermination commands are to send information to the effect control unit a300 that the number of first U1 or second U2 pending has been changed, and the information is newly reserved. It contains information on whether the result is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Further, the pre-determination command also includes information for notifying whether or not to perform staged rendering using drum lamp portions a11, a12, a13 and a14 (see, for example, FIGS. 1-36).

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the transition from the high probability state to the medium probability state or the low probability state or from the medium probability state in the falling lottery (see step a1105-2 in FIG. 1-11) It may shift to a low probability state. When such a fall occurs, it may happen that the result of the prior decision on the holding ball is different from the result of the jackpot lottery in the variation. Therefore, when there is a pre-decision falling thing among the holding balls (see Yes in step a3002 in FIG. 1-30), until the falling balls are dropped due to the change being digested (FIG. 1-11) Step a1105-2), and control (prohibition process) not to be based on the result of the prior determination.
Moreover, it is customary that the result of the prior determination is the same as the result of the jackpot lottery, and the effect is performed based on the prior determination result. However, when falling to a medium probability state or a low probability state, the result of the prior determination made before the fall may be different from the result of the jackpot lottery performed after the fall. Therefore, when fall occurs, control which cancels the presentation under execution based on a priori judgment is also considered.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, an operation performed by the effect control unit a300 in response to each command transmitted from the game control unit a200 will be described. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit a300 performs the prior determination command reception process, the effect execution command reception process, and the effect control process. These processes are executed by the CPU a 301 of the effect control unit a 300 reading a program stored in the ROM a 302 and executing the program.
FIG. 1-31 is a flowchart showing a part of the operation of the effect control unit a300. Note that various commands transmitted from the game control unit a200 in the output process (see step a506 in FIG. 1-5) are temporarily stored in a command storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM a 303 of the effect control unit a300. Then, the CPU a 301 of the effect control unit a 300 looks at the commands stored in the command storage device (not shown) at predetermined intervals, and controls the effect based on the stored commands.
The effect control unit a300 repeatedly executes each process shown in FIG. 1-31 every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. Referring to the figure, the advance determination command reception process, the effect execution command reception process, and the effect control process are sequentially executed (steps a3101 to a3103).
As shown in FIG. 1-31, when the production control unit a300 receives the prior determination command from the game control unit a200, it performs the prior determination command reception processing (step a3101), and when the production execution command is received from the game control unit a200 An execution command reception process is performed (step a3102). Then, the effect control unit a300 performs effect control processing (step a3103).
The detailed contents of the preliminary determination command reception process, the effect execution command reception process, and the effect control process will be described later.

Pre-determination command reception processing by the effect control unit
FIGS. 1-32 is a flowchart which shows the content of the prior determination command reception process in the production | presentation control part a300.
In the flowchart shown in the figure, the CPU a 301 determines whether a predetermination command is stored in a command storage unit (not shown) (step a3201). If it is determined that the predetermination command is stored (Yes in step a3201), the CPUa 301 receives the pending flag storage area (see FIG. 1-28) of the first pending storage area a305 to the second pending storage area a306 of the RAMa 303 The hold flag is turned on (step a3202).
If the predetermination command is not stored (No in step a 3201), the predetermination command reception process is ended.

Next, the CPU a 301 determines whether or not the indication flag is turned on in any of the storage units a 305 a to a 305 d and a 306 a to a 306 d (see FIG. 1-28) of the first storage area a 305 to the second storage area a 306 of the RAM a 303. It is determined (step a3203). As a result, when the CPU a 301 determines that the indication flag is ON in any of the storage units a 305 a to a 305 d and a 306 a to a 306 d (see FIG. 1-28) (Yes in step a 3203), The command is set (step a3204).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the indication flag is not turned on in any of the storage units a 305 a to a 305 d and a 306 a to a 306 d (see FIG. 1-28) (No in step a 3203), The setting is made (step a3205).
Note that these commands are for notifying the player of the number of reservations in the effect control process, and include information relating to the first suspension U1 and the second suspension U2. In addition, the number-of-holds indication command also includes information as to which storage unit the indication flag is turned on.
When the command is set in this manner, the predetermination command reception process is ended.

[Effect execution command reception processing by the effect control unit]
FIGS. 1-33 is a flowchart which shows the content of the presentation execution command reception processing in the presentation control part a300.
In the flowchart shown in the figure, the CPU a 301 of the effect control unit a 300 determines whether an effect execution command is stored in the RAM a 303 (step a 3301). The effect execution command said here means the one generated by the special symbol processing (see step a 503 in FIG. 1-5), and at least information related to the determination result of the big hit of "big hit", "small hit" and "loss" , The variation time of the special symbol and the form of the effect (reach with effect or reach without effect), and has information related to. More specifically, the effect execution command has information on the contents of the special symbol whose variable display is to be started from this, that is, whether the variable symbol of the special symbol concerning large hit, small hit, or lose is started . In addition, the effect execution command has information concerning whether the effect to be performed at the time of the variable display of this special symbol is the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and further, the time of the reach effect.

If CPUa 301 determines that the prior determination command is stored (Yes at step a3301), CPUa 301 selects one of the plurality of effect tables stored in ROM a 302 based on the effect execution command (step a3302) ).
Note that the ROM a 302 of the effect control unit a 300 stores a long-performing effect table, a short-performing and a small-performing effect table, a losing reach producing effect table, and a losing reach non-producing performance table.

  Thereafter, the CPU a 301 randomly extracts and acquires one random number from random numbers from 0 to 250 (step a3303), and determines the random number based on the selected effect table. In the effect table, the random number and the effect pattern are associated with each other, and one effect pattern is determined from a large number of effect patterns according to the random number. Thus, the CPU a 301 determines the contents of the effect (step a3304). More specifically, the decorative pattern pattern in the image display unit a114, the operation pattern of the movable part a115, the irradiation pattern of the board lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157, and the sound pattern output from the speaker a156 are respectively determined.

Further, at the time of random number determination, it is determined by the CPU a 301 whether or not an increase in the number of lights, which is an effect using drum lamps a11 to a14 (see FIG. 1-36) as the board lamp a116, is performed. The lighting number increase effect is not only the case where the random number judgment is a big hit but also the case where it is not a big hit under a predetermined condition (for example, when the symbol variation time is shortened to 2 seconds or 4 seconds (shortened variation)). It is possible to do also (so-called gusset). In addition, when the number-of-lights-up effect is already being executed, no determination is made on the execution of the number-of-lighting-up effects.
Note that, for example, it is conceivable to store a flag indicating that the lighting number increase effect is being performed in the RAM a 303 and to control according to the flag.

  In this manner, after the effect pattern to be performed during the variable symbol display of the special symbol is determined, the CPU a 301 sets an effect determination command according to the determined effect pattern (step a3305). Then, the CPU a 301 shifts the pending storage areas a 305 and a 306 of the RAM a 303 (step a 3306). For example, when the received effect execution command relates to the first hold U1, the flag stored in the fourth storage unit a 305 d is shifted and stored in the third storage unit a 305 c. Then, the flag stored in the third storage unit a 305 c is shifted and stored in the second storage unit a 305 b, and the flag stored in the second storage unit a 305 b is shifted and stored in the first storage unit a 305 a. In this case, the flag stored in the first storage unit a 305 a is deleted.

  The CPU a 301 determines whether the indication flag is ON in any of the storage units a 305 a to a 305 d and a 306 a to a 306 d of the pending storage areas a 305 and a 306 (step a 3307). If it is determined that the indication flag is ON in any of the storage units a 305 a to a 305 d and a 306 a to a 306 d (Yes in step a 3307), the CPU a 301 sets a suspension indication command (step a 3308). If it is determined that the above is not the case (No at Step a3307), a number-of-holds normal display command is set (Step a3309). These commands are for notifying the player of the number of holdings in the effect control process, and have information on the number of holdings of the first holding U1 and the number of holdings of the second holding U2. In addition, the number-of-holds indication command also includes information as to which of the storage units a 305 a to a 305 d and a 306 a to a 306 d stores an indication flag.

Although not specifically shown, when the CPU a 301 of the effect control unit a 300 executes the routine process, there may be a case where the preliminary determination command and the effect execution command are simultaneously received. In this case, in the step a 3204 or the step a 3205 of the prior determination command reception process shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the effect execution command reception process shown in FIGS. 1-33, separately from the prior determination command reception process, based on the information after the shift process in step a3306, the number-of-holds indication command or the number of holds normally Set the display command. Therefore, the command set in step a 3204 or step a 3205 is different from the command set in step a 3308 or step a 3309.
As described above, when the preliminary determination command and the effect execution command are received simultaneously, the command set in the preliminary determination command reception process is erased, and then a new command is set in the effect execution command reception process. It becomes.

If it is determined that the indication flag is ON (Yes in step a3307), the CPU a 301 performs lighting number increase effect command processing (step a3310). The lighting number increase effect command processing is processing for setting the lighting number increase effect, the details of which will be described later.
When the command is set in this manner, the effect execution command reception process is ended.

[Lighting number increase effect command processing]
1-34 are flowcharts showing the contents of lighting number increase effect command processing (step a3310 in FIG. 1-33) according to the present embodiment, and when it is determined to execute lighting number increase effect (step a3304 described above) See the description of).
In the flowchart shown in FIGS. 1-34, the CPU a 301 of the effect control unit a300 first determines the content of the lighting number increase effect by the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 (see, for example, FIG. 1-36) (step a3401). More specifically, the CPU a 301 confirms the number (0 to 4) of the previous lighting number stored in the lighting number storage area a 307 of the RAM a 303 (see (a) in FIG. 1-28). If the number is not the upper limit of the number of lightings, the CPU a 301 adds one to the number of lightings immediately before and stores the number in the lighting number storage area a 307. When the number is 4 as the upper limit of the number of lights, since the effect of increasing the number of lights is ended, the number of lights is reset to 0, and stored in the number-of-lights storage area a307.
As described above, the current lighting number (0 to 4) in the lighting number increase effect is stored in the lighting number storage area a 307 of the RAM a 303 (see (a) in FIG. 1-28) and updated.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of lighting is set to four because the maximum number of pending positions for the first starting hole winning is four, but other numbers may be considered. For example, in the case where not only the number of reservations for the first starting hole winning but also the number of holding for the second starting opening winning is used, the number of lights is set to an upper limit of eight. In addition, it is also conceivable to set the upper limit of the number of lightings to a number other than four or eight.

The lighting number increase effect determined in this way is due to the light in which the number of lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 (for example, see FIGS. 1-36) increases for each digestion of the holding ball pertaining to winning in the first starting opening a121. It is an effect, and all the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 light up in the end. In other words, the number of lights increases in order from one to four for each variable display of the special symbol toward full lighting which is the final effect form. When all lights are on, the game shifts to an advantageous state for the player, for example, a dedicated effect that increases the possibility of becoming a big hit. That is, the degree of expectation increases by increasing the number of lightings by the effect of increasing the number of lightings.
Therefore, since the number of lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 increases each time the holding ball is digested, the player has the expectation that the jackpot may be reached when the effect of increasing the number of lightings is started. The game can be enjoyed by holding it, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, lighting number increase production is one of the indication production which suggests the result where pre-judgment with pre-reading was done concerning the non drawing lot of special design lottery, it is one of the indication production which makes the reservation pre-reading production the continuous production which straddles plural fluctuation Makes it possible to have a story. Note that the lighting number increase effect may be accompanied by an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the image display unit a114 in relation to the lighting of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14.
The lighting number increase effect said here is an example of a specific effect.

  In addition, when the upper limit of the number of lights is set to four, the CPU a 301 of the effect control unit a 300 determines in advance the number of lights smaller than the upper limit in addition to the effect of constantly increasing the number of lights to the upper limit A control example may be considered in which the number of lightings is increased in order up to the determined lighting number).

Here, it is conceivable to set an aspect to shift to an exclusive effect and an aspect not to shift to an exclusive effect (so-called gusset) when all illuminations are performed in the lighting number increase effect.
In addition to the effect control in which all the lights are always turned on when the effect to increase the number of lights is started, it is also possible to control effects in which the effect to increase the number of lights is ended halfway through all the lights. For example, in the case of two states of lighting, this is an example of control in which the effect of increasing the number of lighting is ended without being in three states in the next variable display.
In the case of such a control example, the player can enjoy the excitement by having a sense of anticipation and fear that it may become a big hit when the effect of increasing the number of lights is started, and it is possible to play the game. It can further enhance the interest.

In addition to the effect control example of increasing the number of lighting of drum lamp portions a11 to a14 for each variable display, the number of lighting of drum lamp portions a11 to a14 is temporarily set even if the next variable display is performed. A modification is conceivable in which the number of lighting is maintained as it is without being increased, and the number of lighting is increased again in any of the subsequent variable display. That is, in the modified example, the number of lighting of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 does not temporarily change, and the lighting number increasing effect does not progress and the stepping state is obtained. In other words, it can be said that such an effect is an effect (freeze effect) or a progress in which the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 freeze.
Further, in the present embodiment, an effect (so-called one-way effect) in which the number of lighting of drum lamp portions a11 to a14 is sequentially increased toward the full lighting state is performed. Lighting number increase / decrease effect) is also conceivable. For example, when the number of lighting is 2 at the time of a certain variable display, after the number of lighting is decreased to 1 in the next variable display, the number of lighting is further increased to 3 in the next variable display. Note that the effect of incorporating the decrease in the number of lights into the effect of increasing the number of lights can be referred to as the effect of changing the number of lights.
Moreover, the effect which took in the above-mentioned freeze production and the above-mentioned reduction number of lighting effects in the lighting number increase production is also considered.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, although the effect of increasing the number of lighting by drum drum parts a11 to a14 (refer to FIG. 1-36) is executed, a modification for displaying an image instead of drum lamps part a11 to a14 on image display part a114 An example is also conceivable. In such a case, it is necessary to set the image replacing the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 as an image that the player does not misidentify as the hold display.

Thus, when the content of the lighting number increase effect is determined, the CPU a 301 determines whether or not there is a holding ball relating to the winning to the second starting opening a 122 (step a 3402). That is, the CPU a 301 determines whether or not there is a hold flag ON in the second hold storage area a 306 (see FIG. 1-28) of the RAM a 303.
If there is a hold flag ON in the second hold storage area a306 (see FIG. 1-28) (Yes in step a3402), the CPUa 301 sets the stop flag ON (step a3403), and executes the lighting number increase effect. Are set (step a3404). The significance of setting the rendering interruption command will be described later. Note that the set interruption flag is stored in the RAM a 303.

  Here, although such a setting of the effect suspension command is performed when satisfying the condition that there is a holding ball relating to the winning to the second starting opening a122, it is possible to add other conditions or other conditions. It is conceivable to replace it. For example, it is a condition that a fall of the gaming state occurs as a result of the fall lottery. As described above, the falling mode of the gaming state includes transitioning from the high probability gaming state to the medium probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state, and transitioning from the medium probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state Can.

  On the other hand, if the hold flag is not ON in the second hold storage area a306 (see FIG. 1-28) (No in step a3402), the CPUa 301 then determines whether the stop flag is ON (step a3405). That is, it is determined by the interruption flag whether or not the lighting number increase effect is interrupted. More specifically, the interruption flag is ON if the lighting number increase effect is being interrupted, and the interruption flag is OFF if not being interrupted.

  To explain further, the timing to restart the interrupted lighting number increase effect is the time of the variation where the holding ball relating to the holding pre-reading, which is the trigger to start the lighting number increase effect, is digested. Therefore, when the interruption flag is ON (Yes in step a3405), the CPU a 301 determines whether or not the change is present (step a3406). Then, in the case of the change (Yes in step a3406), the CPUa 301 sets an interruption flag to OFF (step a3407), and then sets an effect execution command instructing execution of the lighting number increase effect (step a3408).

If the interruption flag is not ON (No in step a 3405), the CPU a 301 sets an effect execution command (see step a 3408 described above) because the lighting number increase effect is not interrupted.
In addition, when it is not the fluctuation (No in step a3406), the CPU a 301 sets the interruption flag ON (see the above-mentioned step a3403) and sets the effect interruption command (the above-mentioned) because it is not time to restart the lighting number increase effect. Of step a3404).
When the command is set in this manner, the lighting number increase effect command processing is ended.

[Effect control process by effect control unit]
FIG. 1-35 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect control process in the effect control unit a300.
In the flowchart shown in the figure, when the number-of-holds indication display command is set in the above-described preliminary determination command reception process or presentation execution command reception process, the CPU a 311 of the image / sound control unit a 310 reads the program from the ROM a 312 The effect display device control as the number-of-holds indication display control for the image display unit a114 is started (step a3501). That is, the display of the predetermined image is performed while the decorative symbol of the image display unit a 114 is changed. When the number-of-holds display is displayed on the image display unit a114, the number-of-holds display is changed.
Further, when the effect execution command is set in the above-described lighting number increase effect command processing, the CPU a 321 of the lamp control unit a 320 reads the program from the ROM a 322 and uses the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 for effecting lighting control. Lighting device control is started (step a 3503), and CPU a 311 of image / sound control unit a 310 reads a program from ROM a 312 and starts effect display device control as display control accompanied by lighting of image display portion a 114 (step a 3501).
On the other hand, when the effect interruption command is set in the above-described lighting number increase effect command processing, the CPU a 321 starts effect lighting device control as all-off control for the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 (step a 3503).

Here, in addition to the control example in which the color of light at the time of lighting the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 is made constant, a control example may be considered in which the color of the light to be lit is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition to the control example in which the brightness of the light to be lit is made constant, a control example may be considered in which the brightness of the light is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition to the lighting state in which the lighting state is maintained, a control example may be considered in which the lighting state is repeatedly turned on and off.
When such a control example is adopted, it is conceivable that, for example, the gaming state is a predetermined one as the above-mentioned "predetermined condition". More specifically, the color and / or brightness of light are different between the low probability gaming state, the medium probability gaming state, and the high probability gaming state, or the low probability gaming state It is conceivable to make the case (non-deterministic change) different from the other case (probability change). That is, this is a control example in which the light emission mode in the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 is changed according to the gaming state.

It should be noted that when performing such a light emission mode change control, in addition to the effect example in which the gaming state is accurately reflected, the effect example in which the effect is not completely reflected in the gaming state or the gaming example is considered Be
For example, even if the fall of the gaming state occurs as a result of the fall lottery, it is to perform an effect that makes it appear that the high probability gaming state or the medium probability gaming state is maintained, and conversely, the falling of the gaming state does not occur In this case, it is to provide an effect that makes the player appear to have fallen into the low probability gaming state or the medium probability gaming state.

Further, the CPU a 321 of the lamp control unit a 320 reads a program from the ROM a 322 and starts the effect combination device control as the hold number indication display control for the movable combination a 115 (step a 3502). Similarly, the CPU a 321 of the lamp control unit a 320 starts effect lighting device control as display control of the number of reservations for the panel lamp a 116 and the frame lamp a 157 (step a 3503). Also, the CPU a 311 of the image / sound control unit a 310 starts sound output device control as display control of the number of reservations for the speaker a 156 (step a 3504).
When the number-of-holds normal display command is set, the effect display device control (step a3501) as the number-of-holds normal display control of the image display unit a114 by the CPUa 311 (step a3501) The effect combination device control (step a3502) as display control is performed. In addition, lighting equipment control for effect as display control of panel lamp a116 and frame lamp a157 by CPU a 321 as normal display control (step a3503), and sound output device control as display control of speaker a 156 by CPU a 311 as normal display I do.

[A concrete mode of the lighting number increase production]
Next, specific modes of the lighting number increase effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1-36, 1-37, and 1-38. As mentioned above, although the lighting number increase effect is performed using drum drum parts a11 to a14 as described above, an image related to lighting of drum drum parts a11 to a14 may also be displayed on the image display part a114. Conceivable.
Here, the drum lamp part a11 is a first lighting lamp among the drum lamp parts a11 to a14. The drum lamp part a12 is a second lighting lamp, the drum lamp part a13 is a third lighting lamp, and the drum lamp part a14 is a fourth lighting lamp.

[First mode in effect of increasing the number of lights]
FIGS. 1-36 is a figure explaining the 1st specific aspect of lighting number increase production, and shows the case where it transfers to the production mode of the eventuality, without interruption of the lighting number increase production. Each of (a-1), (b-1), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1) in FIGS. 1-36 is a diagram mainly for explaining the suspension state. , (A-2), (b-2), (c-2), (d-2) and (e-2) of the same figure respectively explain the lighting number increase presentation of the drum section a11 to a14 FIG.
(A-1) in FIGS. 1-36, together with (a-2), describe the relationship between the holding ball and the lighting of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 when the suggestion image a10A is displayed during variation. That is, the combination of (a-1) and (a-2) shows the state when displaying the suggestion image a10A during variation. Similarly, (b-1) and (b-2) in FIG. 1-36 both show the state when displaying the suggestion image a10B during variation, and (c-1) and (c-2) in the same figure both It shows the state when displaying the suggestion image a10C during fluctuation. Also, (d-1) and (d-2) in FIGS. 1-36 show the state when displaying the suggestion image a10D during variation, and (e-1) and (e-2) in the figure are suggestive images during variation It shows the state when a10E is displayed. In the following, (a-1) and (a-2) may be simply referred to as (a) for convenience of explanation. Similarly, (b-1) and (b-2) are referred to as (b), (c-1) and (c-2) as (c), respectively, and (d-1) and (d-2) Are sometimes referred to as (d), (e-1) and (e-2) as (e) respectively.
(A), (b), (c), (d) and (e) in Fig. 1-36 are shown in chronological order, and transition in the order of (a) to (e) as time passes It shall be.

At the time shown in (a) of FIG. 1-36, in addition to the suggestion image a10A during variation, the prior determination of the retention ball a10B, the retention ball a10C, the retention ball a10D and the retention ball a10E has already been made by the CPUa 301 of the effect control unit a300. It is And as shown to (a-1) of the same figure, the symbol change based on the big hit lottery concerning the change suggestion picture a10A which is the first reserve is performed (digestion), and it is called holding balls a10B to a10E. There are four holds.
To explain further, it is determined by the CPU a 301 that a jackpot and an increase in the number of lights are to be performed as a result of the preliminary determination on the newly held holding ball a10E. Therefore, in (a-1) of FIGS. 1-36, the character of "I" is attached | subjected and shown to holding ball a10E. The start of the lighting number increase effect is the next change (see (b-2) in FIG. 1-36).

  And at the time shown to (a) of Drawing 1-36, lighting number increase production is not started, therefore, as shown to (a-2) of the same figure, any of drum lamp part a11-a14 , Is off. The drum lamps a11 to a14 may be controlled by the CPU a 321 of the lamp control unit a 320 so that the normal lighting is performed instead of the lighting up effect instead of turning off. .

At the time shown in (b) of FIG. 1-36, as shown in (b-1) of the same figure, the earliest reserve is digested (refer to the suggestion image a10B during variation), and the reserve spheres a10C, a10D, a10E In addition to the above, a hold ball a10F, which is a new hold, is generated. There are still four reservations at this point. In addition, the result of the prior determination about holding ball a10F was not a big hit.
Then, the lighting number increasing effect is started, and as shown in (b-2) of the same figure, only the drum lamp portion a11 located at the uppermost side among the four drum drum portions a11 to a14 is lit, and the other drums are lit The lamp parts a12 to a14 are extinguished (one is lit).

(C) in FIG. 1-36 shows that the earliest reserve is digested (see suggested image a10C during variation), and the symbol is being varied (see (c-1) in the same diagram). In addition to the holding balls a10D, a10E, and a10F, a holding ball a10G, which is a new holding amount, is generated.
Also at the time shown in (c) of FIG. 1-36, the effect of increasing the number of lighting is continuously performed, and as shown in (c-2) of the same figure, from the state of (b-2) in the same figure. The number of lights increases by one and becomes two. That is, the drum lamp part a11 and a12 located below the drum lamp part a11 and adjacent to the drum lamp part a11 are on (two lights on). The other drum lamps a13 and a14 are off.

(D) in Fig. 1-36 is at the time of digestion of the first retention (refer to the suggestion image a10D during fluctuation), and in addition to the retention balls a10E, a10F, and a10G, a retention ball a10H which is a new retention is generated (See (d-1) in the same figure).
In addition, the effect of increasing the number of lighting is continued even at the time shown in (d) of FIG. 1-36, and as shown in (d-2) of FIG. . That is, the drum lamp portions a11 and a12 are lighted, and a13 located below the drum lamp portion a12 and adjacent to the drum lamp portion a12 is lighted (three lights).

  As shown in (e-1) of the same figure, at the time shown in (e) of FIGS. 1-36, the earliest reserve is digested (refer to the suggestion image a10E during variation), and the symbol variation is made. It is a state. That is, it is the time of the said fluctuation | variation of the holding ball a10E by which the jackpot prior determination was made. In addition to the holding balls a10F, a10G, and a10H, a holding ball a10I, which is a new holding amount, is generated.

Then, even in (e) of FIG. 1-36, since the effect of increasing the number of lightings is continuing, and as described above, it is the fluctuation, and thus the transition to the effect mode of finalization is made. The final presentation mode is determined in advance according to a predetermined procedure, and is, for example, three lights, two lights, etc. in addition to four lights (all lights). In the case shown in (e-2) of the same figure, the number of lighting by the lighting number increase effect is four which is the maximum value, and in addition to the drum lamps a11 to a13, it is located at the bottom and the most external The large drum lamp part a14 is also lit (four lights). That is, all four drum lamp parts a11 to a14 are lit (predetermined final presentation mode). The symbol change of the holding ball a10E is started, and the effect leading to the jackpot is started by the change of the holding ball a10E which is the jackpot as a result of the prior determination.
As described above, the lighting number increase effect using the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 is performed over a plurality of symbol variations. The lighting mode of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 changes with each of a plurality of symbol variations, and the change is directed to the final effect mode of all lighting of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14.
In addition, as above-mentioned, when the big hit lottery of holding ball a10E is not a big hit, after shifting to the production | presentation aspect of the end, the control example which starts the next symbol fluctuation without performing the production which reaches a big hit can be considered.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the pre-reading effect, the number-of-lighting-up effect of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 is gradually increased. Although such an increase in the number of lights is made to allow the player to easily sense that the player is approaching the jackpot, the present invention is not limited thereto. The direction of is also conceivable.
For example, in the pre-reading effect, control is performed such that any one of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 is lit. More specifically, for example, the drum lamp part a11 is turned on in (b-2) in FIG. 1-36, and the drum lamp part a12 is turned on in (c-2) in the same drawing; , And the drum lamp part a13 is lit, and the drum lamp part a14 is lit at (e-2) in FIG. In other words, it is control which changes the drum lamp part a11-a14 to light one by one in order.

[Second mode of effect of increasing the number of lights]
FIGS. 1-37 is a figure explaining the 2nd specific aspect of the lighting number increase presentation, and shows the case where the lighting number increase presentation is interrupted. That is, the second mode shown in the figure is different from the first mode shown in FIGS. 1-36 in that the effect of increasing the number of lighting is interrupted.
It is to be noted that since the illustration in FIG. 1-37 is the arrangement common to FIG. 1-36 described above, the description of the common arrangement may be omitted. In addition to showing (a) to (e) in chronological order, Fig. 1-37 also shows (f-1) and (f-2) as the next variation of (e) It shows. In addition, (d-2) and (e-2) in FIG.

In FIGS. 1-37 which show a 2nd aspect, until it interrupts, it is the same as the case (the 1st aspect) of FIGS. 1-36. That is, the respective points of time shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 1-37 correspond to the respective points of time shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. Omit. In addition, in FIG. 1-37 (a), all lights are off, (b) is one lighted, and (c) is two lights.
In addition, as a result of prior judgment (refer to FIG. 1-30) for the holding ball a10E, it is a big hit and it is determined by the CPU a 301 to perform the lighting number increase effect (refer to (a) in FIG. The effect of increasing the number of lighting is started (see (b) and (c) in the same figure. See step a3408 in FIG. 1-34).

If the game ball enters the second starting opening a122 before the symbol variation of the holding ball a10C ends, as shown in (d-1) of FIG. A big hit lottery for the second start-up winning of the preferential digestion is performed (see FIG. 1-9).
At the time point shown in (d) of FIG. 1-37, the variable display based on the second starting opening winning is thus performed.

  To explain further, as shown in (d-2) of the same figure, none of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 are on and off as shown in (d) of FIG. That is, in (c) of FIG. 1-37 which is the time of one before, drum lamp part a11, a12 is lighted, and the number increase production of lighting is already performing ((c-2 of FIG. 1-37) See No in step a 3405 in FIG. 1-34, step a 3408). However, at the time shown in (d) of FIG. 1-37, the effect of increasing the number of lighting is interrupted in response to the symbol variation based on the second start opening winning (see (d-2) of FIG. 1-37). Yes in steps a3402 of 1-34, see steps a3403 to a3404).

  Such interruption of the lighting number increase effect continues even at the time shown in (e) of FIG. 1-37 which is the next change (see (e-2) of FIG. 1-32. In step a3406 of FIG. 1-34) No, see steps a3403 to a3404). That is, at the time shown in (e) of FIG. 1-37, the drum lamp portion a13 does not light up, and the three do not light up.

Then, at the time of the fluctuation in which the big hit lottery (see FIG. 1-9) is performed for the holding ball a10E, that is, at the time shown in (f) of FIG. More specifically, the final presentation mode in which all the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 are turned on is executed (see (f-2) in the same figure. Yes in steps a3406 in FIG. 1-34, steps a3407 to a3408). reference). In addition, when all drum drum parts a11 to a14 are lit by CPU a 321 of lamp control part a320, first drum drum part a11 is turned on and then drum lamps part a12 and a13 are lit in order, and finally drum lamp part a14 The aspect which lights all can be considered, and the aspect which lights all the drum lamp part a11-a14 at a stretch is also considered.
The point of time shown in (f) of FIG. 1-37 corresponds to the point of time shown in (e) of FIG.

[Third mode of effect of increasing the number of lights]
FIG. 1-38 is a diagram for explaining a specific third aspect of the lighting number increase effect, and shows a case where the lighting number increase effect is interrupted as in the second aspect shown in FIG. 1-37. That is, the third mode shown in FIGS. 1-38 differs from the first mode shown in FIGS. 1-36 in that the effect of increasing the number of lighting is interrupted.
In addition, since FIGS. 1-38 are illustrated by the arrangement | positioning common to above-mentioned FIGS. 1-37, it may abbreviate | omit about description of a common arrangement | positioning. In addition, (c-2), (d-2) and (e-2) in FIG.

In the third aspect, the second start-up winning of the preferential digestion occurs before the time point shown in (d) of FIG. For this reason, as shown in (c-1) in FIG. 1-38, the jackpot lottery for the storage ball a10C, which is the earliest reserve, is not performed at the time shown in (c) in FIG.
And as shown to (c-2) of FIG. 1-38, the lighting number increase presentation which was being performed until then is interrupted, and all the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 are light-extinguished (FIG. 1-34 Yes at step a3402, see steps a3403 to a3404).

  In addition, the symbol change for the holding ball a10C is performed at the time shown in (d) of FIG. 1-38 (see (d-1) in FIG. 1-38) and the symbol change for the holding ball a10D is Even at the time point shown in e) (see (e-1) in the same drawing), the effect of increasing the number of lighting is still interrupted (see (d-2) and (e-2) in the same drawing). No at step a3406, see steps a3403 to a3404).

  Then, at the time of the change of the holding ball a10E shown in (f) of FIG. 1-38, the effect of increasing the number of lighting is resumed as in the case of (f) of FIG. See (f-2) of-38. Yes in steps a3406 of Fig. 1-34, see steps a3407 to a3408).

As described above, in the second mode shown in FIGS. 1-37 and the third mode shown in FIGS. 1-38, when the second starting opening winning is generated, the reserve settlement of the first starting opening winning is delayed, and The execution of the lighting number increase presentation is interrupted. A supplementary explanation is given below.
One of the conditions under which the lighting number increase effect is executed by the CPU a 321 of the lamp control unit a 320 is the occurrence of a holding ball pertaining to the first starting opening winning, not the second starting opening winning. And, in the pachinko gaming machine a100 according to the present embodiment, the second starting opening winning is a specification that is digested in preference to the first starting opening winning.
Therefore, when there is a second starting opening winning, even if the holding ball pertaining to the first starting opening winning is generated, the interruption processing is carried out for the jackpot of the second starting opening winning and the symbol fluctuation effect etc. (second starting opening Priority processing of winning, see step a 803 in FIG.
In the present embodiment, since there is a possibility that the second starting opening winning will occur during the lighting number increase effect, in order to avoid complication of the effect control, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect A suspend command is set (see step a 3404 in FIG. 1-34). By such an effect suspension command, the effect of increasing the number of lighting of the determined content is interrupted. That is, the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 are all turned off, and the execution of the image effect and the sound effect accompanying it is all suspended. In other words, it returns to the rendering state before the lighting number increase rendering is started.

To explain further, the CPU a 301 of the effect control unit a300 starts the processing of the holding ball pertaining to the first starting hole winning after the interrupting process of the second starting opening winning is finished ((e) in FIG. 1-37 or FIG. -38 (d)). However, the timing of the lighting number increase effect resumption is not necessarily the start time of the holding ball processing related to the first starting hole winning (see (e) in FIG. 1-37), but is the time of the change (FIG. 1-37) (F) or see (f) in FIG. In other words, the interrupted increase in the number of lights is not resumed until the time of the change. Therefore, a player who does not know in detail the circumstances that the lighting number increase effect is interrupted due to the second starting opening winning combination, for example, anxious feeling, giving up feeling, etc. Remember
And at the time of resumption of the lighting number increase production, regardless of the lighting number of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 before the interruption, the final production mode (all lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14) in the lighting number increasing line is a line It will be. Therefore, a player who does not know much about detailed circumstances feels that all the lighting has been performed suddenly by the increase in the number of lightings, and the feeling of accomplishment of pulling back is felt, and feeling of happiness is felt in the development of future games. It becomes possible to provide the player with fun of the game.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the complication of the lighting number increase presentation control after the interrupt process of the second starting opening winning performed by the CPU a 301 of the presentation control unit a300, and reduce the control load.

[A fourth mode of the effect of increasing the number of lights]
FIG. 1-39 is a diagram for explaining a specific fourth aspect of the lighting number increase presentation, and shows a case where the lighting number increase presentation is interrupted as in the second aspect shown in FIG. 1-37. That is, the fourth mode shown in FIGS. 1-39 differs from the first mode shown in FIGS. 1-36 in that the effect of increasing the number of lights is interrupted.
Note that since FIG. 1-39 is illustrated in the same arrangement as FIG. 1-38 described above, the description of the common arrangement may be omitted.

The respective points of time shown in (a) to (c) of FIGS. 1-39 showing the fourth aspect correspond to the respective points of time shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. Detailed description of is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 1-39 (a), all lights are off, (b) is on, and (c) is all off.
Moreover, each time shown in (d) to (f) of FIGS. 1-39 showing the fourth aspect is the case where the lighting number increase effect is not interrupted (c) of FIGS. 1-36 showing the first aspect. It corresponds to each time shown in (e). That is, in the fourth aspect, even if the lighting number increase effect is interrupted due to the interruption of the second starting opening winning, if the fluctuation display based on the first reserved portion in the first starting opening winning is performed, the fluctuation (see FIG. Regardless of whether it is (f) of 1-37 or (f) of FIG. 1-38, the lighting number increase presentation resumes. More specifically, when the number-of-lights-up effect that has been interrupted once resumes, the effect mode at the end is not always executed, but the effect mode (for example, four at the end) from the effect mode (for example, two lights on the way) A lighting effect is performed which gradually shifts to lighting).

Specifically, in the fourth mode, as shown in (d-2) in FIG. 1-39, two are lit when resuming the effect of increasing the number of lights, and the drum lamp portions a11 and a12 are lighted. There is. In the next variable display shown in (e-2) of the figure, the drum lamp part a13 is turned on, and three are turned on.
And in (f-2) of the figure which is the fluctuation where the storage ball a10E which relates to the reservation pre-reading which becomes the opportunity which starts the lighting number increase production being digested the taiko lamp section a14 lights up, 4 lights up ( All lights on).

  As described above, in the fourth aspect, although the lighting number increase effect is interrupted by the priority process of the second starting opening winning, the lighting number increase effect is resumed at the next variable display when the priority process is finished. For this reason, although the effect control of drum lamp part lighting becomes more complicated than the second aspect and the third aspect, the method of the effect that drum lamp parts a11 to a14 are sequentially lighted in stages for each variable display It will be possible to execute on

  As described above, in the first to fourth embodiments, the enjoyment is improved by executing the lighting number increase effect using the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 according to the result of the hold pre-reading. It is possible to reduce the control load on the effect control unit a300 associated with the execution or interruption of such a more entertaining lighting number increase effect.

  In addition, based on the result of prior determination, according to the kind of big hit symbol, you may vary the lighting color of drum lamp part a11-a14. Specifically, when the jackpot is determined to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game, the jackpot to transition to the middle probability state is determined, and the jackpot to shift to the low probability state is determined by the prior determination. The color of light emitted when the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 are lighted may be different depending on the case.

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described.
By the way, for example, in order to urge the player to participate, the effect of notifying or suggesting the determination result based on the operation of the operation means of the player, instead of simply notifying the determination result of the preliminary determination and performing the notice effect. May do.
Here, in the gaming machine, with the progress of the game, effects associated with the fluctuation and stop of the special symbol are executed one after another. Along with this, in the control unit that performs the effect, for example, processing for display control of the image display device is performed, and the load of the processing is also increased. Therefore, the effective period for validating the operation in the operation means is set in advance, and the effect of notifying or suggesting the determination result is performed on the condition that the operation of the operation means is executed within the effective period. There is a case. On the other hand, when configured as described above, there is also a request to appropriately inform the player of the timing at which the operation of the operation means becomes effective.
However, for example, in order to change the display mode of the effective period in the image display device according to the effective period, in addition to the display control for the effect described above, processing of display control for displaying the effective period is required. Again, the load on the control unit that performs the rendering is increased.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the gaming machine that executes advance notice effects based on the operation of the operation means, in order to appropriately suggest the operation timing of the operation means to the player while reducing the load on the control unit, The following configuration is adopted.

That is, determining means b200 (b234, b234 determines whether or not the gaming machine b100 according to the second embodiment will shift to the special gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the satisfaction of the predetermined determination condition. And a determination result notification means b300 for notifying the image display unit b114 of the result of the determination by the determination means b200 (b234, b234), and an operation portion b161P, which allows the player to operate the operation portion b161P. Suggestion effects that perform suggestion effects suggesting the result of determination by the determination means b200 (b234, b234) on the condition that the operation of the operation part b161P of the operation means b161 is performed in the means b161 and the predetermined effective period Instructing the operation of the operation means b 161 and the operation means b 161 in a specific period including the effective period An operation instruction display means b300 for causing the image display unit b114 to display an instruction display, and a notification means b161L provided in the operation means b161 and notifying that the effective period is in the effective period. It is a gaming machine that
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 2) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 2-”. In the second embodiment, the drawing (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment may be referred to, and in that case, the upper one digit “a” of the code described in FIG. It may be described as being replaced by b.

2-2-2 is a figure for demonstrating the presentation button b161 in the example of a 2nd form. The effect button b161 is equivalent to the effect button a161 of FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2-2-2 (a), the effect button b161 according to the present embodiment includes an operation unit b161P which is formed in a button shape and can be operated by the player and a button lamp b161L which emits light doing. The light emission of the button lamp b161L is controlled by the lamp control unit b320 (corresponding to the lamp control unit a320 in FIGS. 1-3). Then, the button lamp b161L can be turned on and off at a predetermined timing. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2-2-2 (b), when the preview notification effect to be described later is executed, it lights up when the operation by the effect button b 161 is valid. Moreover, as shown to FIG. 2-2-2 (b), when operation of production | presentation button b161 becomes invalid, it is comprised so that it may turn off. Then, the button lamp b161L notifies the player that it is a valid period during the valid period of the operation of the operation unit b161P of the effect button b161 in the predictive notification effect.
In addition, the notification of the effective period by light emission of the button lamp b 161 L of the prefetch notification effect and the effect button b 161 will be described in detail later.

[Notice effect based on prior judgment]
The present embodiment of the second embodiment has a configuration for the advance presentation effect based on the prior determination (pending look-ahead) described in the first embodiment and performs control for that (FIGS. 1-27 to 1 -31). Therefore, explanation or illustration may be omitted about the same composition or control.

[Receiving process of notification command]
FIG. 2-30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process of receiving a notification command by the effect control unit b300. Although the same figure includes a portion common to the prior determination command reception process shown in FIGS. 1-32 in the first embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the common portion will also be described below.
After the processing at the time of reception of the hold number increase command, the effect control unit b300 determines whether or not the notification command (or the prior determination command) extracted from the hold number increase command is stored in the RAM b 303 (step b3001). If it is determined that the notification command is stored (Yes in step b3001), the effect control unit b300 receives the storage area corresponding to the current holding ball in the RAM b 303 (first to fourth storage units b305 a to b 305 d and first to fourth storage In any one of the units b 306 a to b 306 d, the hold flag and the notification flag (or the anticipatory flag (see step a 3202 in FIG. 1)) are turned ON. If a normal command instead of a notification command is extracted from the hold number increase command, only the hold flag is turned on (step b3002). When the notification command is not stored (No in step b3001), the notification command acceptance process is ended.

In addition to the control example in which the notification flag is always turned ON when the notification command is stored in the RAM b 303, various control examples can be considered. An example will be described. When the notification command is stored in the RAMb 303, a lottery (notification lottery) is performed to determine whether the notification flag is turned ON and the result of the notification lottery turns the notification flag ON (winning It is an example of control which makes a notice flag ON at the time).
The winning probability in this case may be fixed regardless of the gaming state, or may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, the winning probability is higher than in the low probability gaming state, and the winning probability in the medium probability gaming state is between the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state Set to
Further, in the case where the result of the fall lottery in the predetermination is to shift to the low probability gaming state, an example may be considered in which the winning probability is 100% or 0%.

  Next, the effect control unit b300 determines whether the notification flag is ON in any of the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d of the RAM b 303 (step b3003). If it is determined that the notification flag is ON in any of the storage units b 305 a to b 305 d and b 306 a to b 306 d (Yes in step b 3003), then the effect control unit b 300 determines that the fluctuation time H is larger than the predetermined value K It is determined whether or not (step b3004). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time H is larger than the predetermined value K (Yes in step b3004), a notification effect command (or a number-of-holds indication display command for performing notice effect) (step in FIG. 1-32) a) 3204)) is set (step b3005), and the notification command acceptance process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification flag is not ON in any of the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d (No in step b3003), the fluctuation time H is a predetermined value. If it is determined that it is K or less (No in step b3004), the effect control unit b300 does not notify the pre-read result, a normal effect command (or a hold number normal display command for performing normal effect) (step a3205 in FIG. )) Is set (step b3006), and the notification command acceptance process is ended.

  These commands are for notifying the player of the number of reservations in the effect control process, and the individual information for each holding ball (the holding ball pertaining to any of the first starting opening b121 and the second starting opening b122 Or the number of holding balls at each starting opening, etc.). The notification effect command also includes information as to which of the first to fourth storage units b 305 a to b 305 d and the first to fourth storage units b 306 a to b 306 d the notification flag is ON.

  More specifically, the fluctuation time H referred to herein is a time during which the special symbol fluctuates due to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 1-9), and can also be referred to as a fluctuation time relating to the fluctuation. Further, the predetermined value K is a value larger than the time (scale) required to perform the advance presentation effect. For example, when the scale of the advance notice effect to be executed is 3 seconds, it is conceivable to adopt a value of 4 seconds as the predetermined value K. This is because if the variation time H is not longer than the length of the advance notice to be executed, the advance notice can not be performed during the symbol change. Therefore, even when the notification flag is ON in any of the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d, the fluctuation time H is equal to or less than the predetermined value K. Is not a notification effect command but a normal effect command is set (see steps b3003, b3004, b3006).

[Flag setting process at the time of effect selection]
As described above, the effect control unit b300 that receives the hold number increase command sets the hold flag or the like based on the notification command or the normal command included in the received hold number increase command. Then, based on the holding flag and the like and the information on the holding ball before that, setting of a command (notification effect command or normal effect command) for notifying information on the holding ball in the effect is performed.

  However, the storage areas b305 and b306 corresponding to the respective holding balls are switched each time the special symbol is changed and the holding balls are digested. For example, consider first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d. In this case, when the first one of the holding balls winning in the second starting opening b122 is consumed, the second to fourth holding balls move up to the first to third holding balls. Therefore, the storage area b306 to which each storage ball corresponds is switched from three in the second to fourth storages b306b to b306d to three in the first to third storages b306a to b306c. Therefore, for example, when the number of reservations is subtracted in the effect selection process (see FIG. 1-21) (see step a2103), the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units are added as additional processes. The flags b306a to b306d are reset.

  In addition, when the above-described flag is reset, a command (notification effect command or normal effect command) for notifying information on the holding ball in effect is also reset accordingly. The processing procedure of the command set is the same as the procedure shown in step b3003 to step b3006 of FIG. 2-30.

  Although not specifically illustrated, when the effect control unit b300 executes the routine process, there may be a case where the preliminary determination command and the effect execution command are simultaneously received. In this case, in step b3005 or step b3006 of the notification command reception process shown in FIG. 2-30, the notification effect command or the normal effect command has already been set. On the other hand, at the time of effect selection, a notification effect command or a normal effect command is set based on information after the holding ball and the storage areas b 305 and b 306 are switched, separately from the notification command reception process. Therefore, the command set in step b3005 or step b3006 is different from the command set in effect selection.

Subsequently, the preread notification effect will be specifically described.
[Specific example of pre-reading indication effect]
Here, a specific example of the pre-read notification effect according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, information on the holding ball is notified by the effect image displayed on the image display unit b114. The information to be notified includes the presence or absence of the holding ball, the number of holdings, and the pre-reading information (the judgment result of the prior judgment) on each holding ball.
FIGS. 2-31 are figures which show the example of the holding ball display displayed on the image display part b114.
In the example illustrated in FIG. 2C, positions where the first holding ball object b51 to the fourth holding ball object b54 and the first holding ball object b51 to the fourth holding ball object b54 are displayed in the lower part of the screen of the image display unit b114 The first holding position display b61 to the fourth holding position display b64 indicating. Furthermore, at the lower part of the screen of the image display unit b114, a pedestal image b71 and a digested object b72 are displayed, which represent that the holding ball has been digested and the change is being executed.

The first holding ball object b <b> 51 to the fourth holding ball object b <b> 54 are images for displaying the holding balls generated by winning in the first starting opening b <b> 121. In the example illustrated in FIG. 2-31 (a), four holding ball displays, which are the maximum value of the number of holdings at the first starting opening b121, are performed. Basically, the first holding ball object b51 to the fourth holding ball object b54 are expressed using the same image. In the present embodiment, an image imitating "Gyoen" is used as a default form.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of lighting is set to four because the maximum number of pending positions for the first starting hole winning is four, but other numbers may be considered. For example, when using not only the number of reservations for the first starting hole winning but also the number of holding for the second starting opening, the number of holding ball objects is set to an upper limit of eight, and so on. It is also conceivable to set the upper limit of the number of holding ball objects to a number other than 4 or 8.

  During an actual game, according to the increase or decrease in the number of reservations by addition of the number of reservations in the command reception process (see step a1902 in FIG. 1-19) and subtraction of the number of reservations in the effect selection process (see step a2103 in FIG. 1-21) As a result, the holding ball display displayed on the image display unit b114 changes. That is, information on the presence or absence of the holding ball and the number of holdings is notified to the player by the holding ball display.

The first hold position display b61, which is the position at which the presence or absence of the first holding ball is displayed as the order for waiting for the drawing, and the second hold position display b62, which is the position at which the presence or absence of the second hold ball is displayed; A third holding position display 63, which is a position for displaying the presence or absence of the holding ball, and a fourth holding position display b64, which is a position for displaying the presence or absence of the fourth holding ball, are provided. In the present embodiment, the first hold position indication b61 to the fourth hold position indication b64 are provided adjacent to the pedestal image b71. Then, the first hold position indication b61 to the fourth hold position indication b64 are arranged in the order of the first hold position indication b61 to the fourth hold position indication b64 from the side close to the pedestal image b71.
The first holding ball object b51 is displayed on the first holding position display b61, the second holding ball object b52 is displayed on the second holding position display b62, and the third holding ball is displayed on the third holding position display 63. The object b53 is displayed, and the fourth holding ball object b54 is displayed in the fourth holding position display b64.

  The digested object b72 is an image displayed on the upper side of the pedestal image b71. The digested object b72 is an image of the same shape as the holding ball object (b51 to b54). Then, by using such an expression that the digestive object b72 is placed on the pedestal represented by the pedestal image b71, the holding ball is digested to indicate that the variation is being executed.

  For example, when the number-of-holds addition (see step a1902 in FIG. 1-19) is performed by command reception processing according to the winning of the first starting opening b121, the first holding ball object b51 is displayed, and the second holding ball object The b52, the third holding ball object b53, and the fourth holding ball object b54 are displayed in this order.

Then, when subtraction of the number of reservations (see step a2103 in FIG. 1-21) is performed by the effect selection processing according to the variation of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. Erase and display the digested object b72 on the pedestal image b71. As a result, the first holding ball object b51 moves on the pedestal image b71, and the movement as if the second holding ball objects b52 to the fourth holding ball object b54 moved to the pedestal image b71 side is expressed.
In addition, when the hold is newly generated, the fourth hold ball object b54 is displayed on the fourth hold position display b64.
Here, although the holding ball object display of the holding ball based on the winning in the first starting opening b121 has been specifically described, the same applies to the holding ball based on the winning in the second starting opening b122.

FIG. 2-32 is a diagram for explaining pre-reading notification effect.
[Execution of pre-reading notification effect]
In the pachinko gaming machine b100 to which the present embodiment is applied, a pre-reading notification effect that is an effect of notifying the determination result of the prior determination of the present embodiment is executed. The preread notification effect is configured to include two stages. That is, the display mode of the holding ball object is changed based on "operation instruction effect" which instructs the player to operate the effect button b161 and the fact that the operation part b161P of the effect button b161 is actually operated. And execute “Result indication effect” to notify the result of the prior determination. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notification flag corresponding to the holding ball is ON, the determination result of the prior determination is not immediately notified as it is, but the determination is performed based on the player's operation of the effect button b161. Execute notification of the result.

(Operation instruction effects)
The operation instruction effect is, as shown in FIG. 2-32 (a), an operation instruction object b73 which is an image for instructing the operation of the effect button b 161 (see FIG. 2-2-2) on the screen of the image display unit b114. indicate. Then, the image display unit b114 indicates that there is a holding ball to be notified, and urges the user to operate the effect button b161 for executing the notification result effect on the holding ball. In the present embodiment, the operation instruction object b73 is an image imitating the form of the effect button b161. Then, the operation instruction object b 73 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the holding object of the corresponding holding ball. In the example illustrated in FIG. 2-32 (a), the third instruction ball object b53 is displayed so as to overlap the operation instruction object b73. The player can grasp that it is possible to execute the pre-read notification effect regarding the holding ball corresponding to the holding ball object.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the button lamp b161L (see FIG. 2-2-2 (a)) in the effect button b161 is also lighted as the operation instruction effect. Thus, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the effect button b161 not only for the image display unit b114 but also for the effect button b161 at hand.

[Result indication production]
In the present embodiment, when the operation instruction effect is executed and the effect button b 161 is actually operated, the prefetch notification effect is executed and the determination result of the prior determination process is notified. Here, the prefetching information of the holding ball is the information obtained by the prior determination process (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6), and specifically, the type of hit (big hit, small hit, missing), If it is a big hit, the type of big hit (for example, high probability length, medium probability length, low probability short hit, etc.), whether the content of the production is a production with a reach or a production without a reach It is information to show. However, when changing the aspect of the first holding ball object b51 to the fourth holding ball object b54, the judgment result is suggested using not only the information indicating the judgment result as it is but also an ambiguous expression or figurative expression The information which makes the player guess the judgment result may be output.

For example, as shown in FIG. 2-32 (b), when it is determined in advance that the type of the hit is a big hit, the third holding ball object b53 is set as the default image based on the operation of the effect button b161. Apply different white glowing effects. As described above, by making the display mode of the first holding ball object b51 to the fourth holding ball object b54 different from the default form depending on, for example, the type of the hit, the player is made to have a sense of expectation. There is. Note that, in addition to the effect of making the form of the default different, it is conceivable to make the display mode recognizable by the player at a glance, such as the color and size of the default being different.
Moreover, when performing a fall lottery by a prior determination process, it is possible to display the result of a fall lottery as a 3rd holding ball object b53 in a display mode different from a default image triggered by operation of production button b161.

  In addition, based on the result of prior determination, you may differ the aspect which displays a determination result in a pending | holding object according to the kind of big hit symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot is determined to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game, the jackpot to transition to the middle probability state is determined, and the jackpot to shift to the low probability state is determined by the prior determination. In this case, the mode of displaying the determination result in the hold object may be different.

The final determination result may not be notified by one operation of the effect button b161, but the determination result may be notified based on a plurality of operations of the effect button b161. In this case, the form is changed in stages according to the number of operations toward the final display form of the holding ball object. As a result, the player can be encouraged to participate more positively, and the player's sense of expectation is increased, and the interest can be further enhanced.
Also, information (in other words, cassette information) that is not related at all to the determination result of the prior determination may be output. As described above, by providing information other than the information directly indicating the determination result of the prior determination as it is provided, the player guesses the determination result as compared with the case where only the information directly indicating the determination result is provided. Can be expected to have an effect of enhancing interest.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2-32 (c), if the operation by the effect button b 161 is not performed until the holding ball is digested after the operation instruction effect is executed, the holding ball to be notified Continues to display the operation instruction object b 73 so as to overlap the holding ball object corresponding to. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 2-32 (a), a notification target is set initially as the third holding ball, and the operation instruction object b73 is displayed superimposed on the third holding ball object b53. Then, if the effect button b161 is not operated, the holding order is advanced by holding the hold, and as shown in FIG. 2-32 (c), the holding ball of the notification target is the second holding ball object b52. When it is displayed, the operation instruction object b73 is displayed superimposed on the second holding ball object b52.

  Thereafter, the player may not operate the effect button b 161 until the holding ball to be notified is digested. In this case, when the notification object holding ball is digested and the digested object b72 is displayed on the pedestal image b71, the image of the digested object b72 is not in the default form, but as described above. Change the display mode, such as applying light effects. By this, the player who did not operate the effect button b161 this time changes the display mode of the holding ball object by operating the effect button b161, and it is possible to know the existence of the pre-reading notification effect.

[Effective period of operation of result suggestion production]
Subsequently, the setting of the effective period in the result suggestive presentation and the display (notification) of the effective period will be described.
FIG. 2-33 is a timing chart for illustrating operation instruction display and notification related to the effective period.
In the example shown in Fig. 2-33, there is a situation where there are two holding balls in one fluctuation that is exactly changing (the said fluctuation), and the notification flag is set to ON in the second holding ball ing. That is, the second holding ball is the target of the preview notification effect. Then, the operation instruction display of the effective period related to the prefetch notification effect of the holding ball and the notification of the effective period will be described.

First, the effective period of the operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 2-33 (a) and (b).
In the present embodiment, the effective period in which the operation by the effect button b 161 is possible in order to execute the result suggestion effect is defined. The effective period is set, for example, to a partial period during fluctuation of one fluctuation as shown in FIG. 2-33 (a). On the other hand, immediately before the end of one fluctuation, or until the end of one fluctuation and the start of the next fluctuation, the operation by the effect button b 161 for the execution of the result suggestion effect is invalidated.

Specifically, until the end of one fluctuation (the fluctuation stops), the processing during the fluctuation effect end is executed as described with reference to FIGS. 1-22. When the process during the end of the fluctuation effect is executed, the effect control unit b300 analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step a2201 in FIG. 1-22) and sets the fluctuation effect end command (step a2209 in FIG. 1-22) Do the processing for Therefore, until the change is actually stopped, the burden of various processes in the effect control unit b300 becomes large.
Further, in the period from the end of one fluctuation to the start of the next fluctuation, the effect selection processing is executed as described with reference to FIGS. When this effect selection process is executed, the effect control unit b300 analyzes a change start command and sets a change effect start command (step a2105 in FIG. 1-21). Therefore, until the next change is actually started, the burden on the various processes in the effect control unit b300 is large.

Then, also with regard to the above-described prefetch notification effect, it takes a certain amount of processing load to draw and process the result indication effect in the prefetch notification effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (b), in the process for executing the fluctuation effect in the effect control unit b300, as described above, in the period when the processing load is particularly large in the preview notification effect In order not to execute the result suggestive presentation, an ineffective period is provided for a certain period of time during one fluctuation time.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (b), during one fluctuation time (or during the next fluctuation time), except for the period during which the processing during fluctuation effect completion is executed, for pre-read notification effect The operation by the effect button b 161 is enabled. That is, the effective period in which the operation by the effect button b 161 is effective only in a predetermined period of the specific period in which one change is performed is set.

Then, in the present embodiment, regarding the operation instruction for performing the operation effect to the player, different instruction modes are performed by the image display unit b114 and the effect button b161.
First, in the operation instruction performed by displaying the operation instruction object b73 on the image display unit b114, as long as the holding ball object is displayed, it is continuously displayed along with the holding ball object. That is, the display on the image display unit b 114 is performed regardless of the valid / invalid period. In the present embodiment, the holding ball object corresponding to the holding ball to be notified is displayed with the change as a break. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (c), the operation instruction object b73 is displayed corresponding to the period during the variable display operation (while the variable display for one winning is performed). That is, since the holding ball object is updated in units of the variable display for one winning, the display period of the operation instruction object b73 is set corresponding to a series of periods of the fluctuation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (a), there is a fixed period between the fluctuation period of one fluctuation and the fluctuation period of the other fluctuation. Then, when the player does not operate the effect button b 161, when one change and the other change are sequentially executed, the operation instruction object b 73 is not displayed during the fixed period. However, in reality, this fixed period is very small, and it appears that the operation instruction object b73 is continuously displayed across the one change and the other change in the player's appearance.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation instruction object b73 is displayed superimposed on the holding ball object corresponding to the holding ball of the notification target. Here, for example, an aspect may be adopted in which an object instructing an operation is displayed separately from the holding ball object. In this case, it is not necessary to display the operation instruction object b73 accompanying the update of the display of the holding ball object of the holding ball to be notified. Therefore, for example, the operation instruction object b73 can be continuously displayed across one fluctuation period or another fluctuation period until the operation of the effect button b161 is performed.

On the other hand, in the effect button b161, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (d), the button lamp b161L is turned on in accordance with the operation valid period to notify that the valid period is valid during the operation valid period. That is, the button lamp b161L of the effect button b161 is turned on in accordance with the effective period of the set operation, and the button lamp b161L of the effect button b161 is turned off in accordance with the invalid period of the operation.
The lighting process of the button lamp b161L is performed separately from the process for displaying the variable display and the holding ball, so the processing load in the effect control unit b300 is suppressed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation instruction in accordance with the effective period of the operation is configured to be performed by the button lamp b161L of the effect button b161.

In particular, the player pays attention to the image display unit b 114 on which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Therefore, it is preferable that the operation indication object b73 (see FIG. 2-32 (a)) be displayed on the image display unit b114 that the prefetch notification effect is executed and the prefetch result can be known. Further, by keeping the mode of the operation instruction display in the image display unit b114 of the effect button b161 unchanged and displaying the same, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load of the drawing process in the effect control unit b300.
On the other hand, the player can execute the operation of the effect button b161 at an appropriate timing by accurately displaying the effective period of the button lamp b161L having a relatively small processing load.

  In addition, for example, when there are many opportunities for entering the second starting opening b122 (corresponding to the second starting opening a122 in FIG. 1-1) in the time saving state, etc., processing for holding balls and processing for variable display The processing of display control in the image display unit b114 is mixed with the other processing. In such a gaming state, in particular, by applying the configuration of the present embodiment, the operation timing can be appropriately notified while suppressing the load of the effect control unit b300.

Moreover, in this embodiment, in order to alert | report an effective period, the lamp | ramp was lighted at the time of effectiveness of operation, and the aspect which light-extinguishes a lamp | ramp at the time of invalidation of operation was used, However
For example, a speaker is provided on the effect button b161 and a sound is output so that the effective period can be recognized during the operation effective period, or a fan is provided on the effect button b161 and the effective period is effective during the operation effective period You may ventilate so that it can be grasped.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an effect that suggests the result of the determination of the result of the predetermination (prefetching) is performed in association with the holding ball display, but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect that suggests the result of the predetermination may be performed in association with an aspect other than the display of the holding ball. Even in this case, when instructing the player to operate the operation means in order to display the result of the prior determination, the operation of the effect button b161 is performed in the specific period including the effective period set on the screen of the image display unit b114. The operation instruction image for instructing is displayed. On the other hand, the effect button b 161 may be configured to notify that it is in the valid period in the valid period.

Moreover, the following presentation can be illustrated as another example of the presentation which suggests the result of determination of the result of the result of prior determination (prefetching).
For example, an effect of displaying the result of the determination is executed on condition that the operation of the effect button b161 is continued for a certain period, such as by continuously hitting or pressing the effect button b161.
At this time, the display of the operation instruction display of the effect button b 161 displayed on the image display unit b 114 is rounded up earlier than the effective period of the operation. Then, in the late stage of the effective period, the player seems as though the effective period has ended although it is actually a period in which an operation can be received. Here, after the display of the operation instruction display on the image display unit b 114 is finished, the determination result is notified when the player continues operating the effect button b 161 and satisfies the operation of the predetermined period which is the condition. This makes it possible to improve the mood of the player who has operated the effect button b 161 without giving up.

  Then, in the above-described effect, the notification of the operation on the effect button b 161 (the lighting of the button lamp b 161 L) is made to coincide with the predetermined effective period of the operation. By configuring in this manner, the player who thinks that the effective period has ended by the screen display of the image display unit b114 notices the lighting state of the button lamp b161L in the effect button b161, thereby operating the effect button b161. You can create an opportunity to continue. As a result, the determination result is notified as described above, and the player can feel good.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described.
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, various information is presented to the player by displaying an image on the image display device, but this kind of image is used as an effect to be performed with the progress of the gaming state or the game. It was what was displayed. Therefore, it was displayed on the image display apparatus only in the predetermined scene which presents information. Moreover, since the image for such an effect is used in the effect controlled with advancing of a game, the scene displayed is limited.
Here, if a specific image is continuously displayed on the image display device separately from the gaming state and the progress of the game, the player is playing a game on the gaming machine regardless of the gaming state and the contents of the effect It can be expected to be effective to enliven the player's mood and to make him interested in the game. In addition, if the display mode of this specific image is changed according to the specific game control or effect, it is suggested to the player that the specific game state or effect is performed by the display mode of the specific image. be able to. Therefore, the player's interest in this particular image can be further enhanced.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to enhance the player's interest by displaying a specific image on the image display device separately from the effect performed according to the progress of the game. .

That is, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment is:
Game control means c200 which acquires game information according to establishment of starting conditions and performs game control based on the game information,
Effect control means c300 for controlling execution of a game effect corresponding to the progress of the game based on information on game control from the game control means c200;
Image display means c114 for displaying an effect image;
An image control unit c310 that controls the display of the effect image by the image display unit c114 based on the control of the effect by the effect control unit c300;
The image control means c310 is
In a part of the display screen of the image display means c114, a special effect different from the game effect can be executed.
When a specific control predetermined by the game control unit c200 is performed by the game control unit c200, or when an effect by the effect control unit c300 based on the specific control is performed, the special effect is performed. Execute the first production,
When the specific control is not performed, the second effect as the special effect is executed regardless of the control of the gaming state by the game control unit c200 and the control of the effect by the effect control unit c300,
It is characterized by
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 3) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 3-”. In the third embodiment, the drawing (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment may be referred to, and in that case, the upper one digit “a” of the code described in FIG. It may be described as being replaced by c.

[Special presentation using image display unit]
Next, the special effects performed in the present embodiment in the third embodiment will be described.
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine c100, the game control unit c200 (based on the game information obtained by winning in the starting openings c121 and 122 (corresponding to the starting openings a121 and a122 in FIG. 1-1) of the gaming balls. The game control is performed by the game control unit a200 shown in FIG. 1-3, and the effect control unit c300 (corresponding to the effect control unit a300 shown in FIG. 1-3) according to the progress of the game based on the game control Execution is controlled. In the present embodiment, the image display on the image display unit c114 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 1A or 1C) separately from the effect (game effect) corresponding to the progress of the game Perform special effects by

FIGS. 3-27 is a figure explaining the special presentation in the 3rd example of a form.
FIG. 3-27 shows an image display portion c114 on which the variation display of the decorative symbol as the game effect is performed and the special effect according to the present embodiment is displayed. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 3-27 is composed of three symbols. A number is described in each of the symbols constituting the decorative symbol. In the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, each symbol is cyclically fed forward from the top to the bottom, for example, and a display such as scrolling on the display screen of the image display unit c114 is performed. In addition, as for the decoration design, with the stop of the fluctuation indication of the special design which is done with the 1st special symbol display c221 or the 2nd special symbol display c222, the fluctuation indication stops, with the combination of the number in each design when stopping , Indicates the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, although not particularly illustrated, a game effect is usually executed on the image display unit c114 to display various background images together with the decorative symbol.

  The special effect according to the present embodiment is performed by displaying a specific image c114a in a partial area (upper right in the illustrated example) of the display screen of the image display unit c114, as shown in FIG. 3-27. . This specific image is displayed in front of the player as viewed from the background image in the game effect. In the illustrated example, a moving image of a specific person (character) is displayed as the specific image c114a. As a rule, the image c114a is displayed on the image display unit c114 constantly and continuously regardless of the progress of the game. Then, the character displayed in the image c 114 a performs various actions (actions) or issues words.

  In the special effect of this embodiment, a first effect whose execution condition is that predetermined specific control has been performed by the game control unit c200 or the effect control unit c300, and such specific control is not performed. It can be classified into a second effect that is performed as appropriate and in a single shot, and a third effect that is performed regularly when neither the first effect nor the second effect is performed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first effect is classified into a plurality of categories (divisions) based on the execution condition. In these special effects, in the image c114a, the displayed character performs an action set in advance for each category specified according to the established execution condition, and issues a speech.

FIGS. 3-28 is a figure which shows the example of a structure of special presentation.
In the example shown in the figure, three categories of the first effect "superheat notice", "big hit", "resurrection big hit", the second effect "single shot", the third effect "standby" For each category of, an action, a dialogue, and an execution condition are described. In each category, combinations of a plurality of actions and serifs are illustrated.

  In the special effect shown in Fig. 3-28, the effect of the "super heat notice" category of the first effect is executed under the execution condition that a specific lottery result such as a jackpot is won with a predetermined reliability in the special symbol lottery. Ru. The production of the "big hit" category of the first effect is executed under the execution condition that a jackpot other than the below-mentioned revival jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. The production of the "rebirth jackpot" category of the first production is executed with the winning of the resurrection jackpot in the special symbol lottery as the execution condition. Here, the resurrection jackpot is changed again after being temporarily stopped (pseudo-stopped (sometimes referred to as "pseued" in this document)) with a symbol representing a temporary disconnection in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol. It is a jackpot where a game effect such as stopping after that and reporting a lottery result is performed. In addition, it is specified based on the change pattern of the special symbol whether it was won to the revival jackpot or other jackpots.

  In addition, the effect of the “single shot” category of the second effect is executed under the execution condition that a specific change pattern is selected in the change of the special symbol. Further, the effects of the "single shot" category are associated with executable variation patterns for each effect. Then, based on the variation pattern selected in the variation of the special symbol, the effect of the "single shot" category to be executed is determined.

  In addition, the effect of the "standby" category of the third effect is steadily executed when neither of the first effect and the second effect described above is performed. That is, in the special effect, usually, the third effect is continuously executed, and when either the first effect or the second effect is satisfied, the special effect corresponding to the execution condition is executed.

  As described above, in the special effect of the present embodiment, the first effect and the second effect are information on the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command sent from the game control unit c200 to the effect control unit c300. Based on the determination, it is determined whether the execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, the special effect to be executed is determined at the timing when the effect control unit c300 acquires the change start command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which each of the individual effects included in the first effect and the second effect is performed is predetermined. For example, as shown in FIG. 3-28, the effect of the “resurrection jackpot” category of the first effect is executed at the timing at which the variation of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the symbol of the removal. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, the effect of the "big hit" category is executed at the timing when the variation of the decorative symbol stops and the symbol is determined, and the effect of the "superheat notice" category is during the variation of the decorative symbol It is executed at a preset timing. Moreover, the timing by which each presentation of a 2nd presentation is performed, respectively is specified. Therefore, as long as the timing to execute is different, it does not prevent the plurality of effects in the first effect or the second effect from being performed together. However, when the execution timings of the first effect and the second effect overlap, in the present embodiment, the first effect is preferentially executed.

  Although the examples of the special effects shown in FIGS. 3-27 and 3-28 are configured by combining the character action by the moving image displayed in the image c 114 a and the speech by speech as described above, the speech sound is It is also possible to switch between output and non-output depending on the setting. With regard to speech, when an audio output is not performed or regardless of the audio output, a balloon can be displayed on the image c 114 a so that visual presentation can be performed.

[Control of special effects]
The special effect of the present embodiment is executed by the image / sound control unit c310 based on the control of the effect control unit c300 that has received the change start command transmitted from the game control unit c200 as described above. As an example of the control method of the special effect of this embodiment, the special effect to be executed by the effect control unit c300 is selected, and whether the image / sound control unit c310 executes the special effect selected by the effect control unit c300 or not There is a method to determine the

FIG. 3-29 is a flowchart showing an operation example of the effect control unit c300 in the control method of the special effect described above.
In the example shown in FIG. 3-29, when the effect control unit c300 acquires the change start command from the game control unit c200 (step c2901), first, the effect of the "standby" category that is the third effect (hereinafter, standby effect) Is determined (step c2902). Although the standby effect is constantly executed regardless of the type of the jackpot or the variation pattern, the type of the standby effect to be executed is changed based on a predetermined condition. For example, when the variation of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, it is possible to set conditions such as changing the waiting effect in execution to another waiting effect.

When it is determined that the standby effect is to be changed (Yes in Step c2902), the effect control unit c300 selects the standby effect to be executed next (Step c2903). The selection of the standby effect to be executed next can be made based on, for example, a predetermined switching rule. In addition, it is possible to acquire the random value of the random number for standby effect as the effect random number acquired at the time of reception of the change start command, and to select the standby effect based on the acquired random number value.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the standby effect is not changed (No in step c2902), the effect control unit c300 selects the standby effect currently being executed as the standby effect to be executed next (step c2904). Thereby, in the standby effect which is the third effect, the current state is maintained.

  Next, the effect control unit c300 selects the first effect (step c2905). In the present embodiment, the first effect is always selected one by one for each category in this operation accompanying the reception of the change start command. Therefore, here, the selection of the presentation to be performed is performed with respect to the first presentation of the three categories described with reference to FIG. 3-28. The selection of the first effect is, for example, random numbers for effects of each category as effect random numbers acquired at the time of reception of the change start command (random numbers for effect of the "superheat notice" category, effects random numbers for the "big hit" category, "revive It is also possible to obtain random numbers of effect for the jackpot category) and to select each of the first effects based on the obtained random numbers.

  Next, the effect control unit c300 confirms the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation start command acquired in step c2901 (step c2906). Then, the effect control unit c300 selects one effect of the “one shot” category that is the second effect corresponding to the confirmed fluctuation pattern (that is, can be performed with the fluctuation pattern) (step c2907). In addition, when there exist multiple second effects corresponding to the confirmed fluctuation pattern, for example, random numbers for effect random numbers for the “one shot” category are acquired and acquired as effect random numbers acquired at the time of reception of the fluctuation start command. The second effect can also be selected based on the random number value. When there is no second effect corresponding to the confirmed fluctuation pattern, the selection of the second effect is not performed in step c2907.

  The information of the first effect (three in the present embodiment), the second effect, and the third effect (standby effect) selected as described above is the command transmission process shown in FIG. 1-18 (b). By (Step a 1813), the image / sound control unit c 310 is transmitted.

FIG. 3-30 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the image / sound control unit c310 which has acquired the information on the special effect from the effect control unit c300.
Referring to FIG. 3-30, when the image / sound control unit c310 confirms the reception of the command including the information on the special effect from the effect control unit c300 (step c3001), the content of the standby effect is displayed based on the received command. Confirm (step c3002). Here, if an effect different from the currently performed standby effect is selected, the standby effect switches, and if the same effect as the active standby effect is selected, the active standby effect is maintained. It becomes. Thereafter, the image / sound control unit c310 sets the data of the image in the RAM c313 in order to cause the image display unit c114 to display the selected standby effect image as the image c114a shown in FIG. 3-27 (step c3003). .

  Next, the image / sound control unit c310 determines whether each first effect is executable (step c3004). Specifically, based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not the effect of the "superheat notice" category specified by the command received from the effect control unit c300 can be executed. In addition, it is determined whether the effect of the "big hit" category can be executed based on whether the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot other than the resurrection jackpot. Also, based on whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a resurrection jackpot, it is determined whether or not the effect of the "resurrection jackpot" category is executable. Then, if there is an executable first effect, the image data is set in the RAM c 313 in order to cause the image display unit c 114 to display the image of the first effect as the image c 114 a shown in FIG. 3-27 (step c3005).

  Next, the image / sound control unit c310 determines whether the second effect is executable (step c3006). Since the second presentation is selected based on the fluctuation pattern, in principle, it can always be executed. However, if one of the first effects is executable and the execution timing of the first effect and the execution timing of the second effect overlap, the first effect is preferentially executed, so the second I can not carry out the production. Therefore, here, it is determined whether it is possible to execute the second effect based on the execution timing of the first effect that has been made executable and the execution timing of the second effect. In addition, in step c2907 of FIG. 3-29, depending on the variation pattern, the selection of the second effect may not be performed, and there may be no executable second effect. Then, if it is possible to execute the second effect, the image / sound control unit c310 causes the image display unit c114 to display the image of the second effect as the image c114a shown in FIG. Are set in the RAM c 313 (step c 3007).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the special effect using the image display unit c114 is continuously executed separately from the game effect based on the winning of the game ball under the control of the effect control unit c300. . As a result, the player's mood can be continuously enhanced and interest in the game can be obtained regardless of the progress of the game. In addition, when specific game control is performed, such as winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery, information on the game can be presented to the player by the first effect, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced. Can.

  In the above embodiment, in the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 3-29 and 3-30, the standby effect to be executed each time the fluctuation start command is received is selected (see step c2903). ). However, when the order of switching the standby effect is set in the image / sound control unit c310, only whether to switch the standby effect is determined and a command to that effect is sent from the effect control unit c300 to the image / sound It may be sent to the control unit c310.

  Further, in the above operation example, the special effect to be executed by the effect control unit c300 is selected, and it is determined whether or not the special effect selected by the image / sound control unit c310 can be executed, and the special effect that can be executed is Was done. On the other hand, only the category of special effects that can be executed in the effect control unit c300 may be determined, and the image / sound control unit c310 may be configured to select the effects to be executed. In this case, the effect control unit c300 is capable of executing the "superheat notice" category in the first effect, the "big hit" category or the "rejuvenated big hit" category based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation pattern. Determine if it is possible to do either. Then, information of the category of the first effect determined to be executable, and information of the "single shot" category which is the second effect and the "waiting" category which is the third effect which can be executed regardless of the gaming state, The image / sound control unit c310 is notified by a command. Then, based on the acquired category information, the image / sound control unit c310 selects effects of the corresponding category one by one and executes them.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the image c114a by the special effect is continuously displayed on the image display unit c114, but when the special effect is executed by the effect control unit c300, the image c114a is not displayed. It is also possible to control so as not to execute the special rendition. Further, in the above embodiment, a specific character is displayed in the image c 114 a, and special effects are performed by the action and speech of the character, but the specific mode of the special effect is limited to the above embodiment. I will not. Various effects can be taken as long as the effects are executed as effects different from the game effects based on the winning of the game balls and the like.

  In addition, based on the kind of jackpot design, you may make the aspect of special production differ more finely. For example, when a jackpot to shift to a high probability state is determined after a jackpot game, if a jackpot to shift to a medium probability state is determined, or if a jackpot to shift to a low probability state is determined, The action or line of the character may be different.

  Furthermore, although the above-mentioned example shows an example in which the special effect (first effect) to be executed according to the type of the jackpot is selected, the special effect to be selected and executed according to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine c100 It is also conceivable to prepare a In this case, for example, a special effect that can be executed is selected according to the current gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state or low probability state) recognized based on the fluctuation start command acquired previously. Then, as in the second effect and the like performed in one shot, the selected special effect is performed at an appropriate predetermined timing. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the current gaming state by the special effect of the present embodiment.

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment will be described.
Here, during the jackpot game, many prize balls can be won, and the player's mood can be enhanced, and although it can be expected to maintain and recover the concentration on the game, depending on the presentation performed during the jackpot, Rather, the player's concentration may be reduced.
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to make it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game by the effect performed during the big hit game.

That is, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the game control unit d200 performs a big hit game in which the big winning opening d125 is opened and closed according to the result of the determination performed with the winning, and the effect accompanying the big hit game is produced In the gaming machine d100 performed by the control unit d300, the gaming control unit d200 is a continuous long opening that facilitates entering the big winning opening d125 when the result of the determination is the first big hit game. The first opening operation control means d201 that performs continuous short opening operation in which entering into the big winning opening d125 is not easy at the opening following the operation, and the result of the determination is different from the first jackpot game In the case of a big hit game of 2, the second open operation control means d201 that performs the continuous long opening operation and does not perform the continuous short opening operation, and the effect control unit d300, When the end display effect to be performed when the winning game ends is performed in the first jackpot game, the display device further comprises an end display effect control means d301 that performs the end display effect during the continuous short opening operation. It is
Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment, reference may be made to the drawing of the first embodiment (FIG. 1). In that case, the upper one digit "a" of the code described in FIG. It may be described as being replaced by d.

[Opening operation at the time of big hit game]
Next, a special winning opening d125 (FIG. 1-1 in FIG. 1-1) performed by the special winning opening operation control d238 (corresponding to the special winning opening operation control a in FIG. 1-4) of the game control unit d200 in the fourth embodiment. Control of the first large winning opening a 125 A) will be described.
FIG. 4-27 is a view for explaining the opening control of the big winning opening d125 at the time of the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment.
As shown in the figure, the control contents of the big winning opening d125 at the time of the big hit game includes an opening (OP) at the start of operation control and an ending (ED) at the end of operation control, and these opening and ending And a predetermined number of consecutive (n) openings. And such continuous release is performed on both sides of an interval (IN).
More specifically, when the special winning opening operation control unit d238 starts the operation control of the special winning opening d125, the special winning opening operation control unit d238 first performs an opening operation during the opening time. Then, the special winning opening operation control unit d238 sets the first open state at the special winning opening d125, and closes the special winning opening d125 after the opening time (R1). Subsequently, after the interval time has elapsed, the special winning opening operation control unit d238 sets the second open state at the special winning opening d125, and closes the special winning opening d125 after the opening time (R2). After performing such opening and closing of the special winning opening d125 n times which is a predetermined number of times (Rn), the special winning opening operation control unit d238 performs an ending operation only during the ending time, and performs operation control of the special winning opening d125. Finish.
A period (ending) from the end of the continuous opening of the big winning opening d125 to the end of the big hit game can be called the end of the big hit game.

First Embodiment
Next, the relationship between the jackpot game control and the jackpot game effect control according to the first embodiment will be described.
FIG. 4-28 is a view for explaining the relationship between the jackpot game control and the jackpot game effect control according to the first embodiment, and (a) shows a first mode of the effect control, b) shows a second aspect of effect control. In addition, in FIG. 4-28 explaining the example of a 4th form, a long per (refer FIGS. 1-20) is shown as the specific symbol A. FIG. In addition, a long and a short after is shown as a specific symbol B. In addition, although the specific symbol A and the specific symbol B have a short time, the specific symbol A and the specific symbol B may be a non-time hit.
As shown in (a) or (b) of FIG. 4-28, when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol A, the CPU d 201 (corresponding to the CPU a 201 of FIG. 1-3) of the game control unit d200 A long opening operation of 29.5 seconds per round is continuously performed for 16 rounds (long opening 16R), and finally a series of big hit games are ended through an ending operation (ED 16).
Also, when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol B, the CPU d 201 performs four consecutive rounds of the long opening operation of 29.5 seconds per round after the opening operation (long opening 4R), followed by 0 per round A short opening operation of 1 second is continuously performed 12 rounds (short opening 12R), and finally a series of big hit games are ended through an ending operation (ED4).
Such continuous long opening operation is an operation to facilitate entry into the big winning opening d125, and a continuous short opening operation is an operation in which entry into the large winning opening d125 is not easy.

Then, when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol A, the CPU d 301 (corresponding to the CPU a 301 of FIG. 1-3) of the effect control unit d300 starts the jackpot effect with the start of the jackpot game. Then, when the long opening of 16 rounds is completed and the process shifts to the ending operation (ED 16) by the CPU d 201, the CPU d 301 executes an end display effect. The end display effect said here means what is performed when a big hit game is ended. Details will be described later.
More specifically, the start timing of the end display effect in the case of the specific symbol A is the operation completion time of the 16 round long opening (long opening 16R) or the start time of the ending operation (ED 16), and the end display effect The end timing of is the end time of the ending operation (ED 16).

  Further, when the big hit symbol is the specific symbol B, the CPU d 301 performs effect control such that the end display effect is performed during the operation of the short opening 12R. That is, the end display effect in the case of the specific symbol B is not started when the ending operation (ED4) as in the case of the specific symbol A starts, but is started earlier than that.

To explain further, the end display effect needs to be ended when the ending operation (ED4) ends, and is executed by the CPU d 301 during the operation of the short opening 12R so as to satisfy the condition.
More specifically, in the first mode shown in (a) of FIG. 4-28, it is performed with the start of the short opening 12R, and in the second mode shown in (b) of FIG. It is going to be done at a predetermined time after the start of 12R.

That is, in (a) of FIG. 4-28, in the case of the specific symbol B, when the content of the end display effect in the case of the specific symbol A is started with the start of the short opening 12R, the end is ended at the end of the ending operation (ED4) In order to finish the display effect, so-called scale adjustment is performed for the time of the ending operation (ED4). In the case of the specific symbol B, the effect time T4a is the same as the effect time T16a of the end display effect of the specific symbol A.
Further, in (b) of the same figure, the end display effect to be executed in the case of the specific symbol B is at a predetermined time during the short opening 12R so that the end display effect is ended according to the end of the ending operation (ED4). Control to start is performed. In the case of the specific symbol B, the effect time T4b is the same as the effect time T16b of the end display effect of the specific symbol A.

Thus, the reason for performing the end display effect at a timing different from that of the specific symbol A in the case of the specific symbol B is as follows. That is, when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol B, the number of obtainable award balls is smaller than in the case of the specific symbol A. That is, in the case of the specific symbol B, although the award ball can be easily obtained by performing the long opening operation for four rounds, acquiring the award ball even if the short opening operation is subsequently performed for twelve rounds thereafter Is difficult. Therefore, it is assumed that the player who tries to obtain more winning balls with fewer firing balls will stop the firing of the game balls during the short opening operation of 12 rounds (stopping). When such a stop is performed, the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine d100 decreases as the jackpot symbol increases as the specific symbol B increases, and there is a possibility that it may cause an undesirable situation as a hall store.
Also, from the player's point of view, after firing the game ball in the long opening operation (long opening 4R) and obtaining a winning ball, the game ball is stopped in the short opening operation (short opening 12R), and the ending operation is even longer. In the case of (ED4), the end display effect which is information unrelated to the gaming state is to be kept watching. For this reason, there is a risk that the player's concentration on the game which has been maintained until then may be reduced.

  Therefore, in order to cope with such an inconvenient situation, the time (ending time) of the ending operation (ED4) is shortened by advancing the start of the end display effect in the jackpot game when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol B. That is, game control and effect control are performed so that the period from the end of the long opening operation (long opening 4R) to the end of the big hit game becomes short. As a result, a decrease in the operating rate is prevented and the concentration of the player is maintained.

Next, the image displayed by the end display effect will be described.
FIG. 4-29 is a view showing an example of an image displayed on the image display unit d114 in an end display effect, wherein (a) shows an example of an image displayed first, and (b) shows an example of (a) An example of an image displayed next is shown. In addition, the modification which reverses the display order of (a) and (b) of FIG. 4-29 is also considered.
The end display effect is performed on the image display portion d114 (corresponding to the image display portion a114 in FIG. 1A or 1B) at the end of the big hit game, and for example, the positive change continues after the big hit This includes effects such as displaying the word “continue” to notify that, and displaying an image of a company logo indicating the company that manufactured the pachinko gaming machine d100 (corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine a100 in FIG. 1-1). .

In addition, it is possible to employ | adopt the aspect which suggests a game state in end display production. For example, in the case of a definite change (high probability gaming state or medium probability gaming state), it is a suggested effect of displaying the character of "continue" in a color, size, etc. different from that of normal (low probability gaming state).
By performing such suggestion effects when shifting to the low probability gaming state by the fall lottery, it is possible to inform the player that, for example, it has been latent until now.

In addition, as the end display effect, there may be a case that an effect (notice effect) is displayed that displays an image that calls attention so as not to forget the prepaid card. More specifically, the display timing for performing the alerting effect is at the end of the big hit, but it is not necessarily that the alerting effect must be performed at the end of all the big wins. For example, in the case of a jackpot at the first time and latency, effect control may be considered such that it is displayed at the time of jackpot and jackpot completion. Moreover, in the case of a jackpot in the middle of a definite change or time, it may be considered that there is no effect control.
In addition, the content of the end display effect when the big hit symbol is the specific symbol B is the same as the content of the end display effect when the big hit symbol is the specific symbol A.

In the end display effect in the present embodiment, under the control of CPU d 301, first, as shown in (a) of FIG. 4-29, character d11 of "continue" and alert image d12 are displayed on image display unit d114. Ru. In the image example shown in (a) of FIG. 4-29, a modification may be considered in which the attention call image d12 is omitted and the character d11 of "continue" is displayed.
In (a) of FIG. 4-29, an image showing that the player is in the state of playing a game by right-handing is also displayed.
As described above, in order to shorten the effect time T4a of the end display effect, a mode in which the player is notified of a plurality of pieces of information on one screen is adopted.
After that, as shown in (b) of FIG. 4-29, the display content of the image display unit d114 is switched to the image d13 of the company logo “company ○ ○ □”.
The end display effect is based on the ending effect start command (see step a 2403 in FIG. 1-24) set in the ending effect selection process (see FIG. 1-24) performed by the CPU d 301, the image / sound control unit d310. Is performed by the CPU d 311 of

Second Embodiment
Next, effect control of the jackpot game according to the second embodiment will be described. Since the second embodiment has the same configuration and function as the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the common configuration, and the description and illustration of the common configuration and function are given. May be omitted. It is conceivable to apply the various modifications described above for the first embodiment to the second embodiment. Further, part of the configuration or control of the second embodiment can be applied to the first embodiment, and part of the configuration or control of the first embodiment can be used as the second embodiment. It is also possible to apply to the embodiment.

  FIG. 4-30 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the end display effect according to the second embodiment. Note that the same figure shows the case where the alerting image d12 is displayed in the end display effect (upper stage), the case where the alerting image d12 is not displayed (middle stage) and the case where the alerting image d14b is displayed (lower stage). Is also controlled by the CPU d 301 of the effect control unit d300. Further, the end display effect is the effect time T4a, T16a, T4b, T16b, and is assumed to be the same.

  When the alerting image d12 is displayed in the end display effect, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4-30, the alert image d12 is displayed on the image display unit d114 from the start of the end display effect to the time point ta1. Then, the character d11 is switched to the character "done" at time ta1 and is displayed until time ta2. Furthermore, at time ta2, the image is switched to the image 13 of the company logo, and is displayed until the end display effect is completed.

  When the alert display image d12 is not displayed in the end display effect, as shown in the middle of FIG. 4-30, the character d11 of "CONTINUE" is displayed on the image display unit d114 when the end display effect starts. Then, at time tb1, the image is switched to the image d13 of the company logo, and is displayed until the end of the end display effect.

  To explain further, the time from the time point ta2 to the end time of the end display effect when displaying the alerting image d12 in the end display effect, and the time point tb1 when the alerting image d12 is not displayed from the time to the end time of the end display effect Time is the same as each other. That is, the time for displaying the image d13 of the company name logo is constant. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the person in charge of model development.

When the alert display image d14b is displayed in the end display effect, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 4-30, at the start of the end display effect, the image d14 including the character d14a of "continue" and the alert image d14b is displayed It is displayed on the part d114. Then, at time tc1, the image is switched to the image d13 of the company logo, and is displayed until the end of the end display effect.
In the lower part of FIG. 4-30, all of the alert image d14b in the image d14 is not illustrated and partially omitted because of space of the paper surface.
In addition, even in the case of the lower part of FIG. 4-30, the time for displaying the image d13 of the company logo is constant.

  To explain further, in the image d14, the alert image d14b is displayed smaller than the alert image d12 shown in the upper part of FIG. 4-30. That is, the alerting image 12 is displayed more conspicuously, and is displayed as a part of the image d14 so that the alerting image d14b is less noticeable.

  Here, the case of displaying the alerting image d12 and the case of displaying the image d14 including the alerting image d14b will be described. A control example may be considered in which the alert display image d12 displayed so as to stand out on the image display unit d114 is displayed when a long hit (a big hit symbol is a specific symbol A) for acquiring a relatively large number of prize balls. In addition, the alerting image d14b displayed so as not to be very noticeable on the image display unit d114 is displayed when it is difficult to obtain many winning balls after a long hit (big hit symbol is the specific symbol B). Control examples are conceivable. Such proper use of the alerting image d12 and the alerting image d14b enables more appropriate alerting.

  As described above, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the player maintains concentration during the jackpot game including the opening operation of the big winning opening d 125 which is difficult to obtain the winning balls. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decline in the operating rate at halls.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described.
Here, the effect performed on the occasion of the change of the special symbol performed based on the determination is performed to increase the interest of the game in the change, and therefore, is usually started with the start of the change of the special symbol. Here, many of the gaming machines hold the right to the jackpot determination with a predetermined number as the limit when there is a further prize on the starting opening of the gaming ball during the change of the special symbol. And while repeating the change and the stop of the special symbol, the judgment based on the right concerning the held jackpot judgment will be performed. Therefore, when the right for jackpot judgment based on a certain prize is held, it takes some time depending on the number of holds that have been put on hold before the judgment based on the held right is made. Therefore, along with this, it will also take time before the effect at the time of the change of the special symbol to be executed is started by the judgment result based on the held right.
On the other hand, for the player, it is a main operation in the game that the game ball is fired to make a winning opening. Therefore, by performing some effect immediately in response to the winning, it is possible to strongly impress the relation between the operation of the player in the game and the effect, and to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Therefore, the fifth embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to enhance the player's interest in the game by performing an effect associated with the effect accompanying the change of the special symbol, triggered by the winning of the game ball. .

That is, the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment is:
Determining means (e234) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined starting area;
Symbol display means (e114, e221, e222) for displaying a symbol indicating the determination result in a stopped state after fluctuating display of the symbol for a predetermined time according to the determination result by the determination means (e234);
Storage means (e203, e303) for storing the right to be judged by the judgment means (e234) with a predetermined number as a limit according to the winning of the game ball in the start area;
With respect to the right stored in the storage means (e203, e303), prior determination means (predetermining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state) before the determination by the determination means (e234) is performed e200),
An effect control means (e300) for producing an effect according to the display of the symbols by the symbol display means (e114, e221, e222);
The effect control means (e300)
Based on the result of prior determination by the above-mentioned prior determination means (e200), it is decided to perform a special effect,
In response to the winning of the game ball in the start area, prior to the special effect being performed, a prognostic effect is suggested that suggests that the special effect may be performed.
It is characterized by
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 5) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 5-”. In the fifth embodiment, reference may be made to the drawing of the first embodiment (FIG. 1), in which case the first digit “a” of the reference numeral shown in FIG. It may be described as being replaced by e.

[Special presentation based on prior judgment]
Next, special effects based on the prior determination performed in the fifth embodiment will be described.
In the fifth embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 1-6 as the first embodiment, the first starting opening e121 (corresponding to the first starting opening a121 in FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1-3) When the game ball is won and the first starting opening switch e211 (corresponding to the first starting opening switch a211 in FIG. 1-3) is turned on, the second starting opening e122 (FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1- When the game ball wins in the 2nd starting opening a122 of 3 and the 2nd starting opening switch e212 (corresponding to the 2nd starting opening switch a212 in Figure 1-3) becomes ON, when the symbol changes Prior to the jackpot determination (see steps a808 and a809 in FIG. 1-8), a preliminary determination (pre-reading) is performed (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the right of jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball is suspended, the effect control unit e300 determines whether or not to perform the special effect based on the result of the above-mentioned prior determination. . Here, the prior determination is not limited to the prior determination as to whether or not a jackpot, but may be a prior determination regarding the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special symbol. In this case, for example, even when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit by the preliminary determination, the special effect may be performed based on the fact that the specific variation pattern is selected in advance. In addition, when the winning of the game ball to the starting opening which triggers the decision of whether or not to execute the special effect is the winning with the number of pending rights of jackpot judgment being 0, the special effect The decision on the presence or absence of execution will be made not by prior determination but by jackpot determination at the time of symbol variation. In the present embodiment, as this special effect, effect control unit e300 performs an effect of switching the background image displayed on image display unit e114 at the time of special symbol variation to a specific image (for example, an image representing the night background) .

FIGS. 5-27 is a figure which shows the example of the special effects in a 5th example of a form.
FIG. 5-27 (a) shows the display screen of the image display unit e114 before the special effect according to the present embodiment is executed, and FIG. 5-27 (b) shows the special effect according to the present embodiment Is a state of the display screen of the image display unit e114 after the execution of. In the example of illustration, before the switching of the background image by special production, it is an image showing the scenery of daytime, and after the switching of the background image by special production, it is an image showing the scenery of night.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect is executed in response to the winning of the game ball on the starting opening e121, e122. That is, when it is determined that a special effect is to be given in relation to a certain hold, the preceding hold is absorbed, and a special effect is given along with the start of the variation display of the special symbol based on the winning (hold) which is determined to perform the special effect. The special presentation is executed immediately when it is determined that the special presentation is to be executed by the pre-judgment executed by the winning of the starting openings e121 and e122, not being started. As a result, it appears that the special effect is started at the moment when the winning opening in the starting opening e121 and e122 is made, so that the player is strongly impressed with the relation between the special effect and the winning event that has triggered the special effect. Can. The special effect started is continued until the variation display of the special symbol based on the hold determined to perform the special effect is ended.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, two types of modes are set as a mode in which the effect control unit e300 starts the special effect. One is an aspect in which the special effect is immediately started in response to the winning of the game ball on the starting opening e121, e122. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 5-27, the state of FIG. 5-27 (a) is directly switched to the state of FIG. 5-27 (b). The other one is an aspect in which the transition to the special rendition is made after the preluded rendition indicating that the special rendition may be performed.

5-28 is a figure which shows a mode that it transfers to special production | presentation through precursory production.
FIG. 5-28 (a) shows the display screen of the image display unit e114 before the special effect is performed, and FIG. FIG. 5-28 (c) shows the state of the screen of the image display unit e114 after the special effect is performed. 5-28 (a) is the same screen as FIG. 5-27 (a), and FIG. 5-28 (c) is the same screen as FIG. 5-27 (b).

  When the precursor effect of this embodiment is started, as shown in FIG. 5-28 (b), a black haze (see below) is displayed on the screen (see FIG. 5-28 (a)) representing the daytime scenery. , Dark area) occurs. Then, when the area gradually becomes larger and covers the entire screen, the screen is switched to a screen (see FIG. 5-28 (c)) representing the night scene. Here, a plurality of times can be set until the dark area becomes large and the entire screen is covered, and can be dynamically determined by lottery using random numbers. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a display mode in which the whole screen is covered after repeating a motion such that the dark area becomes larger or smaller.

  The precursor effect of the present embodiment is executed triggered by the winning of the game ball on the starting openings e121 and e122. That is, when the prognostic effect is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special effect is to be executed when the gaming ball has won and the suspension is generated. Then, when it is determined that the special effect is to be performed, the precursor effect is performed, and thereafter the special effect is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when transitioning to a special effect after the precursor effect is performed, an inherent sound effect is generated at the moment when the special effect is started. This sound effect may be generated at the moment when the special effect is started even when the forward effect is not performed. As a result, the player can also aurally recognize that the special effect has been started and the timing thereof.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the special effect is not performed, the predictive effect may be performed. In this case, the suggestion of the special rendition by the omen effect is false (so-called gusset). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 5-28, although the dark area is displayed by shifting from the state of FIG. 5-28 (a) to FIG. 5-28 (b), this dark area is the entire screen The effect control is performed such that it disappears without being completely disintegrated and returns to the state of FIG. 5-28 (a).

  As described above, by performing the prognostic effect before starting the special effect, the player has an expectation that the special effect to be executed based on the result of the prior determination may be started. It can be enjoyed. In addition, also in the case where the omen effect is performed, the omen effect is started immediately after the game ball is won. And, as described above, since the omen effect shifts to the special effect along the natural flow, the player is strongly impressed with the relevance between the omen effect and the special effect, and the winning event that triggered the occurrence. Can.

  By the way, when the winning of the game ball to starting opening e121 and e122 occurs during the fluctuation indication of the special symbol, when the remaining time until the end of the fluctuation is short (for example, around 1 second), the pro-event effect is started Immediately after special symbol stops and will be decided. At this time, it is considered that since the player's attention is directed to the start of the admonition effect, the player may fail to recognize that the special symbol has been determined. Therefore, in such a case, the effect control unit e300 may perform control so as to directly start the special effect with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol without executing the prognostic effect.

FIG. 5-29 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an effect image displayed on the image display unit e114.
The effect image shown in FIG. 5-29 is composed of three layers (layers), and as viewed from the player, the first layer e114a, the second layer e114b, and the third layer e114c are arranged in this order. Therefore, in the case where the image drawn in the first layer e114a and the image drawn in the second layer e114b or the third layer e114c overlap, the player draws another image drawn in the first layer e114a. It is viewed in the state of being superimposed on the image. In addition, when the image drawn in the second layer e114b and the image drawn in the third layer e114c overlap, the player draws the image drawn in the second layer e114b on another image. It is viewed visually. In other words, in each layer, the display priority is higher in the order of the first layer e 114 a, the second layer e 114 b, and the third layer e 114 c. In each of the layers e114a to e114c, the degree of transparency can be set by mask processing or the like on an image to be drawn or an area other than the image. Therefore, for example, by setting a portion other than the image drawn in the upper layer to be transparent, the image of the lower layer is viewed through in a portion where the image is not drawn.

  In the first layer e114a, an image including information on a game, such as a decorative symbol and a holding icon for notifying the player of the number of holding rights regarding jackpot determination with effect images, is drawn. These images are drawn in the first layer e 114 a with the highest display priority, which is not hidden from other images, because the player should not be misidentified as to the information indicated by the images. In addition, by setting a portion other than the image drawn in the first layer e114a to be transparent, the image drawn in the second layer e114b or the third layer e114c is kept visible on the other side, It is possible to display a decorative pattern, a holding icon, etc. of the first layer e 114 a.

  In the second layer e114b, an image of a character or an effect used in a specific effect such as a preview effect is drawn. In addition, an image for special effects such as reach effect is also drawn on the second layer e114b. Since these images are effects that are particularly executed satisfying the execution conditions, they are required to be displayed with priority over general effect images. However, the image drawn in the first layer e 114 a should not be hidden as described above. Therefore, the image is drawn on the second layer e114b having the highest display priority next to the first layer e114a. In addition, by setting a portion other than the image drawn in the second layer e114b to be transparent, the character of the second layer e114b is in front of the state in which the image drawn in the third layer e114c is visually recognized. It is possible to make an image move around.

  In the third layer e114c, a background image as a general effect image is drawn. The images of the special effects and the prognostic effects according to the present embodiment are drawn on the third layer e114c. These images are displayed when an image including information related to a game such as a decorative symbol drawn on the first layer e 114 a or an image for a special effect drawn on the second layer e 114 b is displayed. It is drawn on the third layer e 114 c with the lowest display priority so as not to hide the image.

  For example, during the execution of special effects such as reach effects, the game ball may be won to the starting openings e121 and e122, and a omen effect or a special effect may be started. In this case, since the player pays attention to the special effect being executed, if the special effect or the prognostic effect is immediately started in response to the winning, special control in the special effect being executed (so-called It may cause an illusion as if developmental rendition etc. were performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, images of prognostic effects and special effects are drawn in the third layer e114c located behind the second layer e114b on which such images of special effects are drawn. As a result, even if the omen effect or the special effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the images of the omen effect and the special effect are hidden in the image of the special effect and can not be viewed by the player. However, at the moment when the special effect is started, the above-mentioned inherent sound effect is generated, so that the player can recognize that the special effect has been performed.

  It should be noted that exceptional control may be performed to generate a sound effect at the start of the special effect regardless of the execution of the special effect during the execution of the effect in a particularly specified effect (special reach effect or the like). For example, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery related to the variation of the special symbol in which the specific effect is performed, the sound effect is generated. That is, when a sound effect occurs while this particular effect is being performed, it means that the jackpot has been decided. In this way, the player may feel that the special effect has been made due to the generation of the sound effect, but when the specific effect is over, it will be a big hit, which is more advantageous in the game than the player expected. It is possible to provide the player with an entertaining feeling with surprise.

[Control of special effects and prognostic effects]
FIG. 5-30 is a flow chart showing an example of the control procedure of the special effect and the prognostic effect.
As shown in FIG. 5-30, when the game ball is won in the starting openings e121 and e122 (step e3001), the effect control unit e300 adds 1 to the value x of the number of holding rights related to the stored big hit determination ( Step e3002). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of pending reservations x after update is 1 (step e3003).

  When the number of reservations x is other than 1 (that is, 2 or more) (No in step e3003), the effect control unit e300 then performs an advance determination on the right regarding the jackpot determination based on the winning in step e3001 (step e3004). Then, the effect control unit e300 determines whether or not to execute the special effect based on the preliminary determination result (step e3005). When it is determined to execute the special effect (Yes in step e3005), the effect control unit e300 then determines whether or not the time until the current fluctuation of the special symbol stops is equal to or less than a predetermined time (for example, about one second). It judges (step e3006).

  If the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol is longer than the predetermined time (No in step e3006), the effect control unit e300 then determines whether the special effect (reach effect) is being executed (step e3007). When the special effect is not being executed (No in step e3007), the effect control unit e300 then determines whether or not to execute the prognostic effect (step e3008). When it is determined to execute the prognostic effect (Yes in step e3008), the effect control unit e300 immediately executes the prognostic effect, and then executes the special effect (step e3009). On the other hand, when it is determined that the prognostic effect is not performed (No in step e3008), the effect control unit e300 immediately executes the special effect (step e3010).

When the special effect is being executed in step e3007 (Yes in step e3007), the effect control unit e300 is positioned after the second layer e114b (see FIG. 5-29) on which the image of the special effect is drawn. It is determined to draw an image of a special effect on the third layer e114c (step e3011), and the processes after step e3008 (determination of whether to perform a prognostic effect) are executed.
In addition, if the time until the variation stop of the special symbol is equal to or less than the predetermined time in step e3006 (Yes in step e3006), the effect control unit e300 waits for the variation to stop, and the suspension is digested and the next As the change of the special symbol of is started, the special rendition is executed (step e3012).
When it is determined in step e3005 that the special effect is not to be performed (No in step e3005), the effect control unit e300 determines to perform the effect when the special symbol other than the special effect is changed, and ends the process. (Step e3016). Here, effects other than the special effects are determined in accordance with various conditions such as the fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol lottery and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine e100 at the time of fluctuation.

In step e3003, when the number of reservations x is 1 (Yes in step e3003), the effect control unit e300 first determines whether or not the special symbol is currently being changed (step e3013). Then, if it is changing (Yes at step e3013), it is determined whether to perform the special effect based on the prior determination of the suspension, so the effect control unit e300 executes the process after step e3004. . On the other hand, when it is not changing (No in step e3013), the effect control unit e300 determines the determination value regarding the jackpot acquired by the winning of step e3001 (step e3014). Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the special effect is to be executed (step e3015). When it is determined that the special effect is to be performed (Yes in Step e3015), the effect control unit e300 executes the process of Step e3008 (determination as to whether or not to perform the prognostic effect).
On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the special effect (No at step e3015), the effect control unit e300 decides to perform the effect at the time of the change of the special symbol other than the special effect and ends the processing (step e3016) .

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the special effect or the prognostic effect is immediately started on the occasion of the winning of the game ball in the starting opening e121, e122 in the game, thereby, for the player, The relationship between the main operation of the pachinko game machine e100 for winning a game ball and the special effect and the prognostic effect can be strongly impressed.

  In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special effect is to be executed based on the winning of the game balls on the starting openings e121 and e122, and the special effect is immediately executed. In addition, in the case of performing an indication effect before performing the special effect, the indication effect is executed triggered by the winning. That is, on the basis of the same winning, it is decided to perform the adverbial effect and subsequently perform the special effect. On the other hand, it is also possible to perform effect control such that the prognostic effect and the special effect are executed based on different winning combinations.

  For example, it is determined to execute the special effect based on one winning on the starting openings e121 and e122, and the process stands by without starting the execution. Then, when another winning is made next time, a precautionary effect is performed triggered by this, and a special effect which has been on standby is executed subsequently to this precautionary effect. According to such effect control, the special effect is not executed immediately after the winning, but the predictive effect is immediately executed after the winning, so that the player can be strongly impressed with the relevance between the winning and the predictive effect.

  In addition, based on the result of prior determination, according to the kind of big hit symbol, you may differ the content of a omen effect and a special effect. Specifically, for example, regarding a special effect, when it is determined in advance that a jackpot to shift to a high probability state after a jackpot game is determined, a shift to a night background is made and a jackpot to shift to a middle probability state is determined. You may move to the background of the evening. Alternatively, when the jackpot to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game is determined, and the jackpot to shift to the middle probability state is determined, the probability that the prognostic effect is executed before execution of the special effect is made different. You may do so.

  In the prior determination of step e3004 of FIG. 5-30 and the determination of step e3014, the gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state or low probability) of pachinko gaming machine e100 as described with reference to FIG. 1-17-1 The determination is performed using a table of jackpot random numbers provided in accordance with the state). Here, depending on which game state table is used and determined, the probability that the special rendering or the prognostic rendering is performed may be made different.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described.
Here, in the conventional pseudo continuous notice, since the pseudo continuous notice will not be performed after the reach effect is performed, the pseudo continuous notice is not performed, or the number of pseudo continuous notices is small. Then, when reach production was performed, the sense of expectation to the jackpot was to be significantly reduced for the reach production. In particular, even if super reach (variation mode of specific reach) is carried out after so-called normal reach (variation mode of reach), the expectation to the jackpot of super reach is a bad effect that the pseudo continuous advance is not given. I can not hold it.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest of the game while giving pseudo continuous notice.

That is, the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment is a special game determination unit that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player by the determination condition being established (for example, the jackpot determination of step Sf311 A special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the main CPU f 110a for performing a jackpot game process of step Sf 340) when it is determined that the special game is to be executed by the main CPU f 110a) which performs the process and the special game determination means. And effect pattern display means (for example, the image display device f31) for displaying the effect pattern for performing effects based on the determination result by the special game determination means, and of the effect pattern displayed on the effect pattern display means Effect pattern control means for performing display control (for example, effects provided with at least sub CPU f 120 a And your board f120, etc.), with a,
The said variation pattern storage means, when the effect pattern control means is a variation mode storage means (for example, the sub ROM f 120b) for storing a plurality of types of variation modes in the variation display of the effect pattern and the special game determination means Variable display control means (for example, sub CPU f 120a) for stopping display of the effect pattern to notify the determination result by the special game determination means after changing the effect pattern in the change mode stored in the means, and the special Variation mode determination means (for example, sub CPUf 120a) for determining the variation mode to be variably displayed on the variation display control means from the plurality of types of variation modes stored in the variation mode storage means based on the determination result by the game determination means And
The fluctuation display control means is a normal fluctuation pattern control means for fluctuating display of the effect pattern in the normal fluctuation mode (for example, normal fluctuation), and the order of the normal fluctuation mode and the normal reach fluctuation mode (for example, normal reach) In the normal reach pattern control means to fluctuate display of the production pattern, the normal fluctuation mode, the fluctuation mode of the normal reach, and the fluctuation mode of the specific reach (for example, super reach), the fluctuation game (for example, super reach) Reach symbol control means, the normal fluctuation mode, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the fluctuation pattern of the specific reach is displayed in a variable display order of the production pattern, the fluctuation display of the production symbol by the fluctuation mode of the specific reach After being started, the temporary stop display of the effect pattern which is being displayed in a variable manner, and the temporary change of the effect pattern which is displayed in the temporary stop is changed again After illustrated, has a quasi-continuous pattern control means for the variable display of the performance symbols by predetermined fluctuation mode, and symbol stop control means for stopping the display of the performance symbol, at least,
The variation mode storage means stores variation modes (for example, A, B, C, D reach) of a plurality of types of the specific reach,
The variation mode determination means is configured, based on the variation mode of the specific reach performed prior to the re-variation display of the rendering symbol, when the variation display of the rendering symbol is performed by the pseudo run symbol control unit. The predetermined variation mode to be performed after the re-variation display of the effect pattern is determined.
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 6) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 6”. The sixth embodiment may be referred to the first embodiment (FIG. 1) or another embodiment.

In the sixth embodiment, the ROM f 302 (see the ROM a 302 in FIG. 1) of the effect control unit f 300 stores a program for effect control, data necessary for determining various games, and a table.
Specifically, a pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table (see FIG. 6-12) for determining a pseudo continuous notice scenario, a symbol effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 6-13) for determining a symbol effect pattern, and a background A background pattern determination table or the like for determining a pattern is stored in the ROM f302. Note that the above-described tables merely list characteristic tables as an example of the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided in advance of the game. ing.

[Pseudo continuous notice scenario decision table]
FIGS. 6-12 is a figure which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous notice scenario determination table for determining the structure of a pseudo | simulation continuous notice.

  As shown in FIG. 6-12, in the pseudo continuous advance notice scenario determination table, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol received from the game control unit f200 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3) 1 random number value), the pseudo continuous notice scenario, the pseudo run number, and the pseudo run time are associated with each other.

  Here, the "pseudo continuous advance notice scenario" means data for determining the configuration of the pseudo continuous advance notice (the execution time of the pseudo run advance notice, etc.),

  The rightmost column of the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table of FIG. 6-12 illustrates the configuration of each pseudo continuous notice scenario for reference.

  Here, "normal fluctuation" means that the plurality of effect designs f38 fluctuate at high speed separately (see FIG. 6-39 (a)), and "NR" means the left and right effect designs f38. Is temporarily stopped, and the effect pattern f38 in the middle is changed, which means a normal reach (see FIG. 6-39 (b)).

  In addition, “SP reach” is a super reach where the effect pattern f38 makes special variations, special characters are displayed, or all effect symbols f38 are reduced toward the corners of the screen. (See FIGS. 6-42 and 6-43).

Also, "SPSP reach" and "help reach" mean special reach after super reach.
Moreover, "all rotation reach" means the reach which changes and displays at a low speed in a state where all the combinations of a plurality of effect symbols f38 notifying a big hit are aligned, and in the present embodiment, when winning in a big hit lottery It is only a reach to be performed.

  In addition, “development failure” means whether or not the inside design symbol f38 is temporarily stopped at a special symbol (for example, “repetitive” symbol) when the left and right production design f38 is temporarily stopped and becomes normal reach. In the development effect, it means that the effect pattern f38 in the middle is the effect to stop at the symbol corresponding to the loss without temporarily stopping at the special symbol (see FIGS. 6-40 (f) and (g)).

  In addition, with "development success", when the left and right production design f38 is temporarily stopped and becomes normal reach, it is whether or not the inside production design f38 is temporarily stopped with a special design (for example, "run" design) The development effect is given, meaning that the effect pattern f 38 in the inside is temporarily stopped with a special symbol (see FIG. 6-40 (e)).

  In addition, “pseudo development” is pseudo by displaying a predetermined character after temporary rendering design f 38 in the special design is stopped, or by driving a second decorative member f 33 b imitating a “sword”. It means an effect notifying that the change is started (see FIGS. 6-41 (a) and (b)).

  In addition, “pseudo-variation” means an effect in which all the rendering symbols f38 re-fluctuate again after all the rendering symbols f38 are temporarily stopped (after the above “pseudo development” is executed) (FIG. 6) -41 (c) and (d)).

  It should be noted that in the pseudo continuous notice scenario, the specific variation mode etc. of the effect design f38 such as the type of super reach is not determined, and the effect design f38 is performed by a symbol effect pattern determination table (see, eg, FIG. 6-13) described later. The specific change mode etc. of will be determined.

Further, "the number of times of pseudo run" means "the number of times of execution of pseudo continuous notice" as described above, and "the time of pseudo run execution" means "the time of executing the pseudo continuous notice".
In the present embodiment, “G1a” of the pseudo continuous execution time corresponds to the time of executing the first pseudo continuous notice after normal reach, and “G1 b” of the pseudo continuous execution time is the first after super reach "G2a" of the pseudo continuous execution time corresponds to the time of executing the second pseudo continuous advance after normal reach, and "G2b" of the pseudo continuous execution time. "Corresponds to the time to execute the second pseudo continuous notice after super reach," G3 "of the pseudo continuous execution time corresponds to the time to execute the third pseudo continuous notice after super reach ing.

  The CPU f 301 (corresponding to the CPU a 301 in FIG. 1-3) refers to the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, and receives a special symbol variation pattern designation command received from the CPU f 200 (corresponding to the CPU a 201 in FIG. 1-3) Based on the selection rate (first random number value), the pseudo continuous notice scenario, the pseudo run number, and the pseudo run time are determined.

  The CPU f 301 determines the pseudo continuous advance notice scenario, the pseudo run number, and the pseudo run time, and determines the determined pseudo continuous run scenario, the pseudo run number, and the pseudo run time as the RAM f 303 (RAM a 303 in FIG. Stored in a predetermined storage area.

  Also, as a feature of the pseudo continuous advance notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, the pseudo continuous action is performed at two different times of the time of executing pseudo continuous advance notice after normal reach and the time of executing pseudo continuous advance notice after super reach. A pseudo continuous notice scenario is provided to execute the notice.

  Also, as a feature of the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, a first pseudo continuous notice scenario (e.g., In order for the pseudo continuous advance notice scenario A1a-SP1) and the second pseudo continuous advance notice scenario (pseudo continuous advance notice scenario A1b-SP1) executing the pseudo continuous advance notice after the super reach to fall within the variation time of the same special symbol. An effect pattern of the pseudo continuous notice scenario is configured.

  Also, as a feature of the pseudo continuous advance notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, the pseudo continuous advance notice after the normal reach by the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol (class of big hit) and the selection rate (first random number value) It is configured that the expectation of the jackpot is higher if the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach than the execution.

  Furthermore, as a feature of the pseudo continuous advance notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, when the pseudo continuous advance notice is performed again after the pseudo continuous advance notice is performed after the super reach, the pseudo continuous advance notice is not performed after the normal reach. In addition, it is configured to perform pseudo continuous notice again after super reach.

  Also, as a feature of the pseudo continuous advance notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, the pseudo continuous advance notice is executed three times by the variation pattern specification command of the special symbol (class of big hit) and the selection rate (first random number value) In the case where the "four change display" is performed by the normal change and three pseudo continuous notices, it is configured to be a big hit without fail.

[Symbol effect pattern determination table]
FIGS. 6-13 is a figure which shows the symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining the symbol presentation pattern which defined the specific presentation aspect performed during one time of fluctuation | variation of a special symbol.
This figure is the symbol effect pattern determination table 1 which is referred to when the pseudo continuous advance notice is not executed.

  In the symbol effect pattern determination table 1 shown in the figure, the variation pattern specification command of the special symbol received from the CPU f 200 (corresponding to the CPU a 201 in FIG. 1-3), the selection rate (second random number value) and the symbol effect pattern Are associated. Although the symbol effect pattern determination table 1 shown in the figure is a table to be referred to when the pseudo continuous advance notice is not executed, it is associated only with the change pattern designation command of the change pattern which does not execute the pseudo continuous advance notice. . In addition, the fluctuation | variation pattern designation | designated command said here shows what shows the fluctuation | variation aspect of a special symbol.

The CPU f 301 refers to the design effect pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. Do.
Here, even if the variation pattern designation command of the same special symbol is configured to be able to determine a plurality of different symbol presentation patterns based on the selection rate (second random number value), the variation pattern specification of the special symbol The number of commands is reduced to reduce the storage capacity of the CPU f 200.

Here, “pattern effect pattern” refers to a specific effect mode performed by the image display device f31, the sound output device f32, the effect drive device f33, and the effect illumination device f34 during one movement of the special symbol. No, in the image display device f31, it is for determining a specific variation mode of the effect pattern f38.
For example, in the image display device f31, the display mode of the character and the variation mode of the effect pattern f38 are determined by the symbol effect pattern. Moreover, in the "reach" in the present embodiment, a state in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols f38 notifying that it shifts to the special game is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols f38 perform variable display Say. For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect symbol f38 of "777" is set as the combination of the effect symbol f38 notifying the transition to the big hit game, the two effect symbols f38 are temporarily stopped and displayed at "7". And the remaining effect pattern f38 is in a state of performing variable display.

[Example of time chart of pseudo continuous advance notice effect]
As described above, in the same number of times of pseudo run, the whole variation time when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after normal reach and the whole production time when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after super reach is the same variation pattern The effect pattern according to the pseudo continuous notice scenario is configured so as to fall within the fluctuation time of (see FIG. 6-12).

An example of a time chart of pseudo continuous advance notice effects will be described with reference to FIG. 6-38.
Fig. 6-38 (a) shows the pseudo continuous according to the pseudo continuous notice scenario when the fluctuation pattern command (MODE = "E6H / E7H", DATA = 02 H) that becomes a big hit by executing one pseudo continuous notice is received. Fig. 6-38 (b) is an example of a time chart of the effect of the notice, and Fig. 6-38 (b) shows a variation pattern command (MODE = "E6H / E7H", DATA = 03H) that becomes a big hit by executing two pseudo continuous notices. It is an example of the time chart of the production | generation of the pseudo | simulation continuous notice by the pseudo | simulation continuous notice scenario when it receives.

As shown in FIG. 6-38 (a), in the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A1a-SP1, “normal fluctuation” of 10 seconds, “normal reach” of 5 seconds, “development success” effect of 5 seconds, “5 seconds of Performs production in the order of “pseudo development” production, “pseudo fluctuation” for 5 seconds, “normal reach” for 5 seconds, and “super reach” for 10 seconds.
Moreover, in the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A1b-SP1, “normal fluctuation” of 10 seconds, “normal reach” of 5 seconds, “super reach” of 10 seconds, “pseudo evolution” effect of 5 seconds, “false fluctuation of 5 seconds ", Perform in the order of" super reach "of 10 seconds.

  That is, if the fluctuation time (T2) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command (MODE = "E6H / E7H", DATA = 02H) that becomes a big hit by executing one pseudo continuous notice is pseudo continuous, The presentation time of the notice scenario A1a-SP1 and the pseudo continuous notice scenario A1b-SP1 is configured to be the same as 45 seconds.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6-38 (b), in the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A2a-SP1, "normal fluctuation" of 10 seconds, "normal reach" of 5 seconds, "development success" effect of 5 seconds, 5 seconds 'Pseudo evolution' production, 10 seconds' pseudo fluctuation ', 5 seconds' normal reach', 5 seconds' pseudo evolution 'production, 5 seconds' pseudo fluctuation', 5 seconds' normal reach ', 10 seconds' Performed in the order of "Super reach".
Moreover, in the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A2b-SP1, the "normal fluctuation" of 10 seconds, the "normal reach" of 5 seconds, the "successful development" effect of 5 seconds, the "pseudo development" effect of 5 seconds, the "false" of 10 seconds "Divergence", 5 seconds "normal reach", 10 seconds "super reach", 5 seconds "pseudo evolution" production, 5 seconds "pseudo fluctuation", 10 seconds "super reach".
Moreover, in the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A2c-SP1, “normal fluctuation” of 10 seconds, “normal reach” of 5 seconds, “super reach” of 10 seconds, “pseudo evolution” production of 5 seconds, “false fluctuation of 5 seconds” "," Super reach "for 10 seconds," pseudo evolution "production for 5 seconds," pseudo fluctuation "for 5 seconds, and" super reach "for 10 seconds.

  That is, when the fluctuation time (T2) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command (MODE = "E6H / E7H", DATA = 03H) which becomes a big hit by executing two pseudo continuous notices is 65 seconds, the pseudo continuous The presentation times of the notice scenario A2a-SP1, the pseudo continuous notice scenario A2b-SP1, and the pseudo continuous notice scenario A2c-SP1 are configured to be the same as 65 seconds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the entire presentation time when the pseudo continuous announcement is performed after normal reach and the entire presentation time when the pseudo continuous announcement is performed after the super reach correspond to the same variation pattern. The effect pattern by the pseudo continuous notice scenario is configured so as to be within the variation time.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, at least a presentation time (e.g., 10 seconds) of "pseudo fluctuation" when pseudo continuous notice is performed after normal reach, and "pseudo fluctuation when pseudo continuous notice is performed after super reach" "Different from the rendering time (for example, 5 seconds)," the overall rendering time when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the normal reach, and the total rendering time when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach " And are adjusted to be the same presentation time.

  In the present embodiment, by adjusting the presentation time of the “pseudo-variation”, the entire presentation time when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the normal reach and the pseudo continuous notice after the super reach is performed. When it was configured to be the same time as the overall production time, but adjusted the production time such as "normal reach", "pseudo development", "SP reach", etc., when performing pseudo continuous notice after normal reach The entire presentation time may be configured to be the same as the entire presentation time when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach.

[Display screen of pseudo continuous notice effect]
Next, an example of the contents of the pseudo continuous advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 6-39 to 6-43.

  As shown in FIG. 6-39 (a), when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening f121 or the second starting opening f122 (corresponding to the first starting opening a121 and the second starting opening a122 in FIG. 1-1) The three display symbols f38 are subjected to variable display of "normal change".

  As shown in Fig. 6-39 (b), when the time of normal fluctuation elapses, the left production design f38a and the right production design f38a are temporarily stopped, and the middle production design f38c is changed. It will be.

  As shown in FIG. 6-39 (c), a normal reach is reached, and when the permission start time G0s elapses, a drum character f31a prompting operation of the effect button is displayed.

  As shown in Fig. 6-40 (d), when there is an operation of the effect button within the permission period (G0s to G0e) or when the permission end time G0e elapses without the operation of the effect button, the screen is started from outside the screen The character f31b of the fireworks ball with the special symbol ("run" symbol) corresponding to the effect pattern f38c is displayed, and the character "f31b of the fireworks ball" is stopped at the center of the screen or not "The production of failure" is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 6-40 (f) and (g), the fireworks ball character f31b falls below the screen to be the effect of "development failure" and loses the middle as a representation pattern f38c. The symbol to be notified will be stopped and displayed.

  As shown in Fig. 6-40 (e), the character f31b of the fireworks ball temporarily stops with the special symbol at the center of the screen to produce "development success", and a crack and fire occur in the squib of the fireworks ball. There is a stage effect.

  Then, with the effect of firing at the squib of this fireworks ball, the development effect started with the operation of the effect button in the permission period (G0s to G0e) and the permission end time G0e without the operation of the effect button Absorbs the time difference with the developmental effects started after the passage of time.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 6-41 (a) and (b), after the effect of "development success", the fireworks ball explodes and drives the second decorative member f33 b imitating a "sword" An effect of "fake evolution" is also performed, such as the character f31e "Mr. Ochicho" indicating re-variation and a predetermined character.

  As described above, the effect of this “pseudo-evolution” is configured to be the same effect whether it is when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the normal reach or when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 6-41 (c) and (d), after the “pseudo-develop” effect, the background is changed to a background different from that of the normal change, and all the effect designs f 38 change again “ "Pseudo fluctuation" is performed.

  In addition, on the background of the “pseudo-variation”, the number of times of variation f31g including the initial normal variation is displayed to notify that the pseudo continuous advance notice has been performed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 6-41 (e) and (f), a plurality of backgrounds different in the expectation of the jackpot are prepared as the background of the “pseudo-fluctuation”.

  FIG. 6-42 and FIG. 6-43 are examples of the contents of the effect in the case where the pseudo continuous advance notice is given after the super reach. 6-42 correspond to A and B reach as the super reach in the present embodiment, and FIG. 6-43 corresponds to C and D reach as the super reach in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 6-42 (h) and (i), the two characters perform effects to perform the eyebrow piece using the effect pattern f38.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 6-42 (i), effects such as a special symbol and a lost symbol pushing each other are performed as the two internal effect symbols f38c.

  Then, when the pseudo continuous notice is given after the super reach, as shown in FIG. 6-42 (j), the special symbol pushes out the lost symbol and the special symbol is displayed as a temporary stop as the effect symbol f 38 c in the middle .

  On the other hand, if a pseudo continuous advance notice is not given after super reach, and it is a loss, as shown in FIG. 6-42 (k), the lost symbol pushes out a special symbol, and the lost symbol is tentative as a presentation symbol f38c in the middle. It will be displayed stopped.

  Then, when the special symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 6-42 (m), a fireworks ball is displayed on the back of the special symbol, and “pseudo development” and “pseudo variation” shown in FIG. Will be performed.

  Further, as a super reach different from that in FIG. 6-42, as shown in FIGS. 6-43 (n) and (p), the character f31 d performs an effect of punching out the effect pattern f38 with a gun.

  Then, when the pseudo continuous advance notice is given after the super reach, as shown in FIG. 6-43 (q), the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the inside effect pattern f38c.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo continuous advance notice is not given after the super reach and it becomes a loss, as shown in FIG. 6-43 (r), the lost pattern is temporarily displayed as the inside effect pattern f38c.

  Then, when the special symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 6-43 (s), a fireworks ball is displayed on the back of the special symbol, and “pseudo development” and “pseudo variation” shown in FIG. Will be performed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach, even if the super reach is performed without performing the pseudo continuous notice before the reach or after the normal reach. , Can continue the sense of expectation that the pseudo-continuous notice is carried out.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous notice is performed at different execution timings when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the normal reach and when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach. From this, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by giving expectation to the execution of the pseudo continuous notice at a plurality of times.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the expectation of the jackpot is higher because the degree of expectation of the jackpot is higher when the pseudo continuous announcement is performed after the super reach than when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the normal reach. Two pseudo continuous notices can be executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the same number of times of pseudo run, the entire presentation time when the pseudo continuous announcement is performed after normal reach, and the entire presentation time when the pseudo continuous announcement is performed after the super reach However, since the number of fluctuation patterns stored in the ROM f 202 (corresponding to the ROM a 202 in FIG. 1-3) is reduced because the variation pattern is within the fluctuation time of the same fluctuation pattern, the load on the storage capacity of the ROM f 202 is reduced. be able to.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the normal reach, or even when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach, the common as shown in FIG. Since the effect of the pseudo development is performed, the player can easily recognize that the pseudo continuous advance has been performed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach, the probability (the development probability) that the pseudo continuous notice is performed varies depending on the type of the super reach. It is possible to give an expectation that continuous notices will be executed.

  According to the present embodiment, although two pseudo continuous notices are executed when performing the pseudo continuous notice after normal reach and when the pseudo continuous notice is performed after the super reach, It may be configured to execute three pseudo continuous notices in addition to the case where the pseudo continuous notices are performed at.

  In the present embodiment, although the result of the fall lottery is not reflected on the pseudo continuous notice, a control example in which the result of the fall lottery is reflected on the pseudo continuous notice may be considered. For example, when the result of the fall lottery is to shift to a gaming state having a lower probability, the control is to change the development probability by increasing or decreasing the development probability.

[Seventh embodiment]
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described.
Here, conventionally, when the game ball enters the start area, a big hit lottery (first symbol lottery) is performed, the lottery result is notified by the first effect performed on the display screen, and the game ball passes through the passing area. There is a gaming machine which performs a normal symbol lottery (second symbol lottery) and reports the lottery result by a second effect performed on the display screen. In this conventional gaming machine, in the second effect, a suggested effect for suggesting the first effect being executed when a lottery of a normal symbol is performed is also executed interwovenly. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the above-mentioned second effect is performed triggered by the change of the second symbol based on the second symbol lottery, and in terms of controlling the effect while diversifying the execution opportunity. There was room for improvement.
Therefore, the seventh embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to enable control of the specific effect while diversifying the execution trigger of the specific effect.

That is, the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment has special game determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game according to the establishment of the first start condition, and the establishment of the first start condition Accordingly, the first symbol control means for notifying the result of the special game determination and the first start condition are satisfied independently by stopping the first symbol display means after changing the first symbol according to the first symbol display means. In accordance with the establishment of the second start condition, the predetermined game determination means for performing a predetermined game determination as to whether or not to execute a predetermined game different from the special game in response to the establishment of the second start condition, (2) The second symbol control means for notifying the result of the predetermined game determination by changing the second symbol to the second symbol display means and then stopping, and the effect control means for controlling a predetermined effect, The effect control means responds to the fluctuation of the first symbol. Whether or not to execute a specific effect, and if it is determined to execute, whether to execute the specific effect according to the first specific effect executing means for performing the specific effect, and the variation of the second symbol If it is decided to decide whether or not to execute, it is decided to execute the specified effect by the second specified effect executing means for executing the specified effect, the first specified effect executing means and the second specified effect executing means And a priority control means for prioritizing any one of the specific effect by the first specific effect execution means and the specific effect by the second specific effect execution means.
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 7) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 7-”. With regard to the seventh embodiment, the drawings (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment and other embodiments may be referred to.

  FIGS. 7-6 correspond to the liquid crystal display g5 (corresponding to the image display portion a114 in FIG. 7) of the pachinko gaming machine g1 (corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine a100 in FIG. 1-1) according to the seventh embodiment. Is a diagram showing an example of a characteristic effect performed on the screen of.

  As shown in FIG. 7-6, in the pachinko gaming machine g1 of the present embodiment, a specific effect g70 may be performed in the liquid crystal display g5. The specific effect g70 is an effect of fluctuating a plurality of identification displays g71. The variable display of the identification display g71 is performed by moving the highlighting g72.

  Specifically, the specific effect g70 can be executed according to the fluctuation of the normal symbol. In the example shown to FIGS. 7-6, a mode that the 4th symbol g65 corresponding to a normal symbol is variably displayed is shown. On the other hand, FIG. 7-6 shows that the special symbol does not change because the decorative symbol g51 and the fourth symbol g61 and g62 are stopped.

  When the specific effect g70 is executed, the highlighted display g72 is moved and displayed such that the highlighted display g72 is sequentially displayed on any of the plurality of identification displays g71. The identification display g71 of the position where the highlighting g72 has stopped informs the result of the normal symbol determination.

  More specifically, the identification display g71 includes an image written "open" and an image written "x", and when the highlighting g72 stops on the identification display g71 written "open" It is informed that the result of the normal symbol determination is a long open contact, and then the electric tulip g17 (corresponding to the electric tulip a123 in FIG. 1-1) is long open. On the other hand, when the highlighting g72 is stopped on the identification display g71 in which "x" is written, it is informed that the result of the normal symbol determination is not a long open hit (that is, it is a miss or a short open hit).

  Here, as a result of the normal symbol determination, there are long open contact, short open contact, and lost. In the case of a long open hit in the normal symbol determination, the electric tulip g17 returns to the closed position after being in the open position for only 5.6 seconds, for example. In the case of the short opening hit in the normal symbol determination, the electric tulip g17 returns to the closed position after being in the open position for, for example, 0.1 seconds. When it becomes a loss in normal symbol determination, electric tulip g17 does not operate.

  When the result of the normal symbol determination is long open contact, the electric tulip g17 is in the open position for a relatively long time, so a plurality of gaming balls are made in the second starting opening g12 (corresponding to the second starting opening a122 in FIG. 1-1). Is easy to win. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a short open hit, the electric tulip g17 is in the open position only for a relatively short time, so that the gaming ball is hard to win in the second starting opening g12.

  FIGS. 7-7 is a figure which shows the other example of the characteristic presentation performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display g5 of the pachinko gaming machine g1 based on this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 7-7, the specific effect g70 may be executed even during the variation display of the special symbol (during the variation display of the decorative symbol g51). Since the special symbol and the normal symbol can be varied independently, the normal symbol may be varied during the variation display of the special symbol, and a specific effect g70 may be performed. When the specific effect is performed during the variation display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 7-7, the identification display other than the above-mentioned "open", "x" identification display g71 (for example, "superheat" is written Identification may be displayed. The identification display g71 in which "super heat" is written indicates the result of the special symbol determination. In addition to this, a plurality of types of identification displays g71 are prepared.

  FIGS. 7-8 is a figure which shows an example of the identification display displayed in the specific effect performed in the pachinko gaming machine g1 of this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 7-8, the identification display g71 includes "good", "simulated", "extensive heat", and "RUSH" in addition to the "x" and "open" described above. The identification display "x" indicates a result that is not advantageous for the player, that is, as described above, indicates that the result of the normal symbol determination is lost. In addition, the identification display "x" may indicate that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. The identification display "open" indicates that the result of the normal symbol determination is a long open contact, and indicates that the electric tulip g17 (second start opening g12) is long open.

  The identification display "opportunity" indicates the result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the identification display “opportunity” suggests more than the normal reach effect in the reach effect using the decorative symbol g51. When the identification display "opportunity" is stopped, the effect more than the normal reach effect is performed. The “reproduction above normal reach presentation” means a presentation in which the jackpot reliability (expected degree: probability) is above the normal reach presentation. When the identification display "opportunity" is stopped, the probability that the jackpot will be notified after that is relatively low.

  Here, the reach effect is, for example, an effect in which a decorative pattern of the same type is stopped in the left area g51a and the right area g51c, and a decorative pattern is variably displayed in the middle area g51b. This is an effect that makes the player expect the decorative symbol to stop in the middle area g51b and become a big hit. The reach effects include, for example, normal reach effect and long reach effect. Normal reach production is reach production in which the rendering time is relatively short, and the jackpot reliability is relatively low. The long reach effect is a reach effect with a relatively long effect time, and is a effect with a relatively high reliability (expected degree) to be a jackpot.

  In addition, the identification display “pseudo” indicates the result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the identification display “pseudo” indicates a pseudo continuous notice effect using the decorative symbol g51. The pseudo continuous advance notice effect is an effect in which an effect of artificially fluctuating and stopping the decorative pattern g51 is performed a predetermined number of times in one change of the special symbol. Here, "the decorative symbol g51 is pseudo-stopped" is a state where the decorative symbol g51 is not completely stopped, and it is slightly fluctuated in a mode that can be recognized as the player's stopping. When the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is performed, the decorative pattern g51 fluctuates and then stops artificially, and then changes again. While the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is being performed, the variation display of the special symbol is continuously performed, and the fourth symbol g61 (or g62) is also displayed continuously.

  Moreover, the identification display "superheat" suggests the result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the identification indication "superheat" implies more than long reach effect. The identification indication "superheat" has a relatively high degree of confidence for the jackpot, and for example, the jackpot is reported after a probability of 60%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7-8, an identification display "RUSH" is prepared. The identification display "RUSH" indicates the result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the identification indication "RUSH" means jackpot confirmation, and means a particular jackpot Rank Up Bonus (RUB) jackpot.

  FIGS. 7-9 is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the specific presentation which used identification display "RUSH." As shown in FIG. 7-9, when the specific effect g70 is started during the change of the special symbol, as the identification display g71, the identification display "x", the identification display "open", the identification display "RUSH", and the identification display "Heating fever" is displayed. The highlighted display g72 moves on the identification display according to the passage of time (FIG. 7-9 (A)).

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the specific effect g70, the highlighted display g72 stops on the identification display "RUSH" (FIG. 7-9 (B)). As a result, it is notified that the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, specifically, that it is a specific type of big hit, and the decorative symbol g51 is stopped in a big hit mode (FIG. 7-9 (C)) . Thereafter, a big hit game is performed in which the big winning opening g13B (corresponding to the second big winning opening a125B in FIG. 1A) is opened.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the specific effect g70 can suggest the result of the normal symbol determination and can also suggest the result of the special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, the specific effect g70 may be triggered by a change of a normal symbol and may be triggered by a change of a special symbol.

  FIGS. 7-10 is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed triggered by the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol. FIGS. 7-11 is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed triggered by the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7-10, the specific effect g70 is an ordinary symbol change start command (described later by the effect control unit g130 (corresponding to the effect control unit a300 in FIG. 1-3) in response to the change of the normal symbol. It can be done in response to having received. Here, the specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol may be referred to as a common drawing specific effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 7-10 (A), the specific effect A may be executed simultaneously with the start of the change of the normal symbol, triggered by the change of the normal symbol. The specific effect A ends in response to the end of the variation of the normal symbol. In the specific effect A, after the effect of variably displaying the plurality of identification displays g71 is performed as described above, an effect of stopping and displaying any one of the identification displays g71 is performed.

  Moreover, as shown to FIGS. 7-10 (B), specific effect B may be performed predetermined time after the fluctuation start of a normal symbol triggered by the fluctuation of a normal symbol. The specific effect B ends in response to the end of the variation of the normal symbol.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 7-11, the specific effect g70 can be performed (in response to the effect control unit g130 receiving the special symbol change start command) in response to the change in the special symbol. is there. The special effect triggered by the change of the special symbol is sometimes called the special image specific effect. As shown in FIG. 7-11, there is a case where the specific effect C is executed a predetermined time after the start of the change of the special symbol, triggered by the change of the special symbol.

  Here, the special symbol is a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening g11 (corresponding to the first starting opening a121 in FIG. 1-1) or the second starting opening g12 (corresponding to the second starting opening a122 in the same drawing) The symbol fluctuates according to the passage of the game ball to the first gate g15 (corresponding to the gate a124L on the left side of the figure) or the second gate g16 (corresponding to the gate a124R on the right side of the figure). . For this reason, the special symbol and the normal symbol fluctuate independently, and the execution condition of the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol and the execution condition of the common figure specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the normal symbol It can be established simultaneously.

  Figures 7-12 and 7-13 show the case where the execution condition of the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol and the execution condition of the common figure specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol are simultaneously satisfied. It is a figure which shows an example of execution control of an effect.

  As shown in FIG. 7-12, when the execution condition of the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol and the execution condition of the common figure specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol are satisfied simultaneously, pachinko game The machine g1 preferentially executes the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol. That is, in this case, the pachinko gaming machine g1 executes only the special figure specific effect, and does not execute the common drawing specific effect. In the special figure specific effect, as shown in FIG. 7-9, a specific effect g70 including an identification display "RUSH" is performed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7-13, the pachinko gaming machine g1 determines whether or not to execute a special figure specific effect when it is determined that a specific jackpot, for example, is specified at the start of variation of the special symbol. . When it is determined that the special figure specific effect is to be executed, the execution of the common drawing specific effect based on the normal symbol that has started to change until the variation of the special symbol is finished is prohibited.

  As described above, by preferentially executing the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol, it is possible to surely execute the effect of whether or not the jackpot game more advantageous for the player is performed.

  FIGS. 7-14 is a figure which shows the kind of jackpot of the pachinko game machine g1 of this embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of jackpot symbols indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and the type of jackpot game differs depending on each jackpot symbol.

The jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol B in FIG. 7-14 correspond to “2 (RUB) per 16R length (high probability time short)” in the first embodiment (see FIG. 1-17-2).
Also, the big hit symbol C in FIG. 7-14 corresponds to “1 (16R length per hour (high probability time))” (see FIG. 1-17-2), and the big hit symbol D in FIG. It corresponds to "high probability time short)" or "2 per 4R length (medium probability time short)" (see FIG. 1-17-2).
In addition, the special winning opening (lower attacker) g13A in FIG. 7-14 corresponds to the first special winning opening a125A (see FIG. 1-1) described in the first embodiment. The big winning opening (upper attacker) g13B in FIGS. 7-14 corresponds to the second big winning opening a125B (see FIG. 1-1) described in the first embodiment.

  For example, the jackpot symbol in the first special symbol display g41 (corresponding to the first special symbol display a221 in FIG. 1-3) or the second special symbol display g42 (corresponding to the second special symbol display a222 in the same drawing) When A is stopped, a rank up bonus (RUB) jackpot occurs, and a round game in which the big winning opening g13B is controlled to open is performed 16 times. For example, a round game of one round is performed until 30 seconds have passed from the opening of the big winning opening g13B, or until nine gaming balls win a prize at the high winning opening g13B, 16 rounds (denoted as "R" Yes) jackpot game is played. In addition, when the jackpot symbol B is stopped, it becomes a rank up bonus (RUB) jackpot and four round games (4R) are performed to open and control the big winning opening g13B.

  During the jackpot game of the RUB jackpot, an effect of whether the round game is played 16 times or ended in 4 times is performed, and an effect of causing the player to expect a 16R jackpot game is performed. In the RUB jackpot, the “RUSH” symbol (see FIGS. 7-9) is stopped as the decorative symbol g51, and the player is the 16R RUB jackpot at the time of the jackpot notification in the effect performed in the liquid crystal display g5, or the 4R RUB It is not easy to identify if it is a jackpot.

  The identification display "RUSH" in the special figure specific effect mentioned above is an identification display which shows RUB big hit (big hit in big hit symbol A or big hit symbol B).

  Further, when the jackpot symbol C is stopped, it becomes a 16R jackpot, and a round game for controlling the opening of the big winning opening g13A is performed 16 times (16R). In addition, when the jackpot symbol D is stopped, it becomes a 4R jackpot, and a round game for controlling the opening of the big winning opening g13A is performed four times (4R).

  When the jackpot symbol C or the jackpot symbol D is stopped, three digit symbols (symbols in which any one of the numbers “1” to “9” is written) stop as the decorative symbol g51. For example, when three “7” symbols and three “3” symbols are aligned, it indicates that the jackpot of 16R is achieved. If three other number symbols are aligned, it indicates that it is a 4R jackpot. In addition, even when three number symbols other than "7" symbol and "3" symbol are aligned, promotion effect to 16 rounds is performed during the big hit game, and it is informed that it is a big hit game of 16R Good.

  It should be noted that even when the special symbol determination is performed based on the winning of the first start opening g11 and the special symbol determination is performed based on the winning of the second start opening g12, the advantages are different. Good. Specifically, in the case where the special symbol determination is performed based on the winning on the second starting opening g12, the case of the special symbol determination being performed based on the winning on the first starting opening g11 is 16R. The probability of becoming a jackpot (jackpot symbol A or jackpot symbol C) may be high.

  Next, the relationship between the symbol to be stopped by the special symbol display, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the special image specific effect will be described. FIGS. 7-15 is a figure which shows the relationship between the symbol stopped by a special symbol display, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol when the symbol stops, and the special figure specific effect.

  As shown in FIG. 7-15, when it is determined to stop the jackpot symbol A in the special symbol determination, as a variation pattern of the special symbol, for example, variation pattern P1 (variation time 30 seconds), variation pattern P2 (variation One of time 60 seconds and fluctuation pattern P3 (variation time 90 seconds) is selected. In addition to this, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped, a number of variation patterns may be selectable. Further, when it is determined that the big hit symbol B is to be stopped in the special symbol determination, any one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  For example, when the variation pattern P1 is selected, the special figure specific effect described above can be executed, and when the special figure specific effect is executed, the identification display "RUSH" is variably displayed, and after a predetermined time, the identification display " "RUSH" will stop.

  Further, when it is determined that the big hit symbol C is to be stopped in the special symbol determination, the variation pattern P1 is not selected, and the variation pattern P11 or P12 is selected. Further, when it is determined that the big hit symbol D is to be stopped in the special symbol determination, the variation pattern P1 is not selected, and the variation pattern P11 or P12 is selected.

  When it is determined that the jackpot symbol C or the jackpot symbol D is to be stopped, the fluctuation patterns P2 and P3 may be selectable, but the fluctuation pattern P1 is not selected. Moreover, many variation patterns which can be selected when each jackpot symbol stops may be prepared in addition to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 7-15.

  If it is determined that the special symbol is determined to be lost, for example, variation pattern P100 (variation time 20 seconds), variation pattern P101 (variation time 30 seconds), variation pattern P102 (variation time 2 seconds), variation pattern P103 (variation One of the time 8 seconds, the fluctuation pattern P104 (the fluctuation time 12 seconds), the fluctuation pattern P105 (the fluctuation time 60 seconds), etc. is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 7-15, when the variation pattern P100 or the variation pattern P101 is selected, the special figure specific effect becomes executable, and when the special figure specific effect is performed, the identification display "RUSH" Specific effects described above are performed. However, when the fluctuation pattern P100 or the fluctuation pattern P101 is selected, the identification display "RUSH" does not finally stop.

  Thus, the special figure specific effect can be performed when the specific variation pattern P1, P100 or P101 is selected. Also, when a specific jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol A or jackpot symbol B) of the plurality of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the special figure specific effect may be executed. In other words, when it is determined that a specific jackpot game of a plurality of types of jackpot games is to be performed, the special figure specific effect becomes executable.

  Here, the details of the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 7-16. FIGS. 7-16 is a figure which shows an example of the special figure specific production which triggered the change of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7-16, at the start of variation of the special symbol, it is assumed that the result of the special symbol determination is the big hit with the symbol A and the variation pattern P1 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Since variation pattern P1 is selected, it is assumed that the special figure specific effect is executable and it is determined that the special figure specific effect is to be performed. The special figure specific effect is a standby period after the start of the change of the special symbol, and is not immediately executed after the start of the change.

  On the other hand, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol, special figure variation rendering is performed in which the decorative symbol g51 is varied in the liquid crystal display g5. Specifically, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the three regions g51a to g51c of the liquid crystal display g5 before the reach is established from the start of variation of the special symbol. The period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of reach is at least 13 seconds or more, and in this period, various notice effects are performed in addition to the variable display effect of the decorative symbol.

  When at least 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, for example, the same kind of decorative symbol stops in the left and right regions (region g51a and region g51c), and reach is established. Thereafter, reach effect is performed to change the decorative pattern in the middle area g51b. As shown in FIG. 7-16, the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol is performed after this reach establishment. Specifically, a specific effect g70 is performed to variably display a plurality of identification displays including the identification display "RUSH" shown in FIG. 7-9.

  As described above, the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol is performed after the reach is established, and is not performed before the reach is established. Also, the identification display "RUSH" is used only in the special figure specific effect. For this reason, the identification display "RUSH" is used only in the specific effect started after the reach is established, and not used in the specific effect initiated before the reach is established.

  In addition, when a variation pattern other than a specific variation pattern (variation pattern P1, variation pattern P100, variation pattern P101) for executing the special figure specific effect is selected, a general drawing specific effect triggered by a variation of the normal symbol It will be. In the common pattern specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the normal symbol, there may be a case where a effect based on the result of the special symbol determination is performed.

  FIGS. 7-17 is a figure which shows an example in the case where the production | presentation which suggests the result of a special symbol determination in common drawing specific production triggered by the fluctuation of a normal symbol is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 7-17, first, it is assumed that it is determined that the jackpot in the jackpot symbol C, for example, is a jackpot at the start of variation of the special symbol. In the case of the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot, since the fluctuation pattern P1 is not selected, the special figure specific effect which is triggered by the fluctuation of the special symbol is not performed. Therefore, the execution of the common drawing specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the normal symbol is not prohibited.

  It is assumed that the normal symbol starts to change after the start of the change of the special symbol. At the start of variation of the normal symbol, the result of the special symbol determination according to the variation of the special symbol which has already been started is referred to. Based on the result of the special symbol determination, the contents of the common drawing specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol are determined, and the common drawing specific effect is started according to the change of the normal symbol. For example, the specific effect including the identification display “superheat” is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the identification display “superheat” is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the common drawing specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the effect of stopping the identification display "super heat" suggesting the result of the special symbol determination is performed. In addition, the specific effect of stopping the identification display “opportunity” and the identification display “pseudo” shown in FIG. 7-8 is also triggered by the change of the normal symbol.

  Next, the execution time of the common drawing specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the normal symbol will be described. FIGS. 7-18 is a figure which shows an example of the common figure specific effect at the time of stopping, after a normal symbol fluctuates during the fluctuation period of a special symbol. FIGS. 7-19 is a figure which shows an example of the common figure specific effect in the case where a normal symbol fluctuates over the time of the fluctuation | variation start of a special symbol, and / or the time of a fluctuation | variation stop.

  As shown in Figure 7-18, during the special symbol variation period from the special symbol variation to the stop, when the normal symbol starts to change and then stops, the common figure identification that is triggered by the variation of the normal symbol The effect is usually started at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the symbol, and is ended at the timing of stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. That is, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 12 seconds, and the common drawing specific effect is also performed for 12 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7-19, when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate during the fluctuation period of the special symbol and the normal symbol stops after the fluctuation of the special symbol is finished, the common figure specific effect is the normal symbol It is performed for a time shorter than the fluctuation time. Specifically, a common figure specific effect is performed only for the second half of the 12 seconds of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

  7-19, when the variation time of the normal symbol crosses the variation start time and / or the variation stop time of the special symbol, the execution time of the common figure specific effect is shortened, but the common figure specific effect is the special symbol The execution start time of the common drawing specific effect may be set so as not to cross over the change start time and / or the change stop time.

  FIGS. 7-20 is a figure which shows the other example of the common figure specific effect in the case where a normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation | variation start time of a special symbol, and / or the time of a fluctuation | variation stop time. As shown in FIG. 7-20, when the normal symbol starts to change during the special symbol change, and when the normal symbol stops after the special symbol stops, the ordinary figure specific effect is given in the latter half of the normal symbol change period. If done, there may be cases in which a common figure specific effect is being executed at the stop timing of the special symbol. In this case, if the common drawing specific effect is performed in the first half of the fluctuation period of the normal symbol, the common drawing specific effect can be ended before the special symbol stops. Therefore, in this case, the common drawing specific effect may be executed in the first half of the fluctuation period of the normal symbol. In addition, the execution start time and execution time of the common drawing specific effect may be adjusted so as not to straddle the start time of fluctuation of the special symbol and / or the time of stop of movement.

  As described above, when the normal symbol fluctuates and then stops during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the common drawing specific effect of the same time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is performed. If the normal symbol fluctuates during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol stops after the fluctuation period of the special symbol is over, the regular drawing specific effect of a time shorter than the fluctuation period of the ordinary symbol is a line It will be. As described above, when the variation of the normal symbol crosses the variation start time and / or the variation stop time of the special symbol, the execution time of the special figure specific effect is shortened, so the variation start time or the variation stop time of the special symbol It is possible to reduce the frequency at which the common drawing specific effect is performed across the.

  As described above, the specific effect may indicate the result of the normal symbol determination or may indicate the result of the special symbol determination. In addition, the specific effect may be executed with the change of the normal symbol as a trigger, or may be performed with the change of the special symbol as a trigger. For this reason, when the specific effect is executed, the player can be expected to be in the long open position in the normal symbol determination, and can also be expected to be the big hit in the special symbol determination. However, when the variation of the special symbol is finished during the execution of the specific effect, the player can easily guess that the specific effect is not based on the result of the special symbol determination, and the special effect is performed even if the special effect is executed. It can not have a sense of expectation for the result of the symbol determination to be a big hit.

  Because of this, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol fluctuates and does not stop during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the execution time of the common drawing specific effect is shortened and the common drawing is executed during the fluctuation period of the special symbol. Make specific effects easy to execute. This makes it possible for the player to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot and a sense of expectation for the electric tulip g17 to be long-opened when the specific effect is executed.

  FIGS. 7-21 is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation pattern of specific production. As shown in FIGS. 7 to 21, there are patterns 1 to 6 and patterns after reaching 1 to 3 as patterns of specific effects.

  For example, in pattern 1, as the configuration of the identification display g71 shown in FIG. 7-6, for example, from the left, identification display "x", identification display "open", identification display "x", identification display "open", identification display Five identifications of "x" are used. 7-6, although four identification displays are displayed for convenience of a paper surface, five identification displays are displayed in fact, for example. In pattern 1, in the configuration of such identification display g71, five identification displays are variably displayed by moving highlight display g72, and according to the result of normal symbol determination, highlight display g72 indicates identification display "x" or Stop in the identification display "open".

  Further, in pattern 2, as the configuration of the identification display g71, five identifications of an identification display "x", an identification display "open", an identification display "x", an identification display "open", and an identification display "opportunity" sequentially from the left The display is used. In pattern 2, in the configuration of such identification display g71, five identification displays are variably displayed by moving the highlighting g72, and highlighting is performed based on the result of the normal symbol determination and / or the special symbol determination. g72 stops at the identification display "x", the identification display "open", or the identification display "opportunity". For example, when the highlighted display g72 is stopped in the identification display "open", it means that the result of the normal symbol determination is a long opening, and the electric tulip g17 is long open. In addition, when the highlighted display g72 is stopped on the identification display "opportunity", it indicates the result of the special symbol determination, and suggests that a big hit will be made at a predetermined probability in the special symbol determination. Also, for example, in the case of pattern 3, when the identification display on the right side is "superheat" and the highlighting g72 stops on the identification "superheat", the jackpot for the big hit than when stopping on the identification "opportunity" Highly reliable.

  Further, for example, in pattern 6, as the configuration of the identification display g71, in order from the left, the identification display "x", the identification display "opportunity", the identification display "x", the identification display "super heat", and the identification display "pseudo" Five identifications are used. In the pattern 6, based on the result of the special symbol determination, the highlighted display g72 stops at the identification display "x", the identification display "opportunity", the identification display "excessive heat", or the identification display "simulation".

  The specific effect of the patterns 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 7 to 21 is a common drawing specific effect performed with the fluctuation of a normal symbol as a trigger.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7-21, in the after-reaching patterns 1 to 3, the specific effect of the configuration including the identification display “RUSH” is performed as the third identification display from the left. The specific effects of the after-reach patterns 1 to 3 are performed only when the above-described specific fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern P1, P100, or P101) is selected. That is, the specific effect of the after-reach patterns 1 to 3 is a special figure specific effect performed triggered by a change in the special symbol, and when the highlighting g72 is stopped at the identification display "RUSH", the result of the special symbol determination is It shows that it is jackpot (RUB jackpot) with jackpot symbol A or jackpot symbol B.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special drawing specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol and the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol are performed in the same effect mode, and the result of the normal symbol determination is Alternatively, an effect that suggests the result of the special symbol determination is performed. By performing such a specific effect, it is possible to suggest the result of the normal symbol determination or the special symbol determination, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, about the contents of the effect which suggests the result of special symbol decision, for example, when the big hit which shifts to high probability state after the big hit game is decided, when the big hit which shifts to medium probability state is decided, it is in low probability state It may be related to the state of the probability of shifting after the jackpot game, such as when the transition jackpot is determined.

  Next, an example of the effect control will be described with reference to FIGS. 7-40.

  As shown in FIG. 7-40, according to the establishment of the start condition (that the gaming ball has won the first start opening g11 or the second start opening g12 and that there is neither a big hit game nor a special symbol change), The special symbol starts to change in the special symbol display (the first special symbol display g41 or the second special symbol display g42). During the fluctuation of this special symbol, the ordinary symbol fluctuates according to the establishment of another start condition (the game ball passes the gate g15 or g16, and neither the opening of the electric tulip g17 nor the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol) Start (Paragraph fluctuation 1).

  In this case, the variation time of the normal symbol is 12 seconds, and the normal symbol stops by the end of the variation period of the special symbol, so the 12-second generic drawing specific effect is the same as the normal symbol variation start line It will be. It should be noted that the common drawing specific effect is not necessarily performed, and whether or not to be performed is determined based on the result of the normal symbol determination). Moreover, in this case, based on the result of the special symbol determination pertaining to the special symbol during variation, there may be a case where an effect that suggests the result of the special symbol determination is performed. Thereafter, the common drawing fluctuation 1 ends, and the fluctuation of the special symbol ends.

  Next, the second variation of the special symbol starts, and during the variation, the second variation of the normal symbol starts (common figure variation 2). The variation time of the second special symbol is relatively short, and the variation of the special symbol ends during this variation of the normal symbol. For this reason, in the common drawing fluctuation 2, the common drawing specific effect is set short, and the common drawing specific effect is performed only in the latter half of the fluctuation period of the normal symbol. Thereafter, the spread map fluctuation 2 ends.

  Next, while the special symbol has not changed, the third change of the normal symbol starts (common figure fluctuation 3). In this case, the time of the common drawing specific effect is set to 12 seconds, and the common drawing specific effect of 12 seconds is performed. Even if the special symbol fluctuates during this time, the time and content of the ordinary drawing specific effect determined at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol are not changed. After that, the normal symbol stops and the special symbol also stops.

  After that, the change of the special symbol is started (special change A). In response to the start of the change of the special symbol, the change effect using the decorative symbol g51 is started. In addition, at the start of variation of this special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot symbol A is a big hit, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined to be the specific variation pattern (variation pattern P1). Further, it is determined that the special figure specific effect is to be performed at the start of the change. Even if the normal symbol starts to change during the change of the special symbol, it is determined that the special figure specific effect is to be performed, so the common drawing specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol is not executed.

  Reaching is established when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure fluctuation A. At a predetermined timing after reach establishment, the special figure specific effect is started. In the special figure specific effect, the variable display effect including the identification display "RUSH" is performed, and the identification display "RUSH" stops after a predetermined time. After that, the jackpot game is started.

  As described above, the effect control by the effect control unit g130 is performed based on the command from the game control unit g100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3). In the present embodiment, the special figure specific effect as described above is performed based on the change start command of the special symbol from the game control unit g100. Further, based on the change start command of the normal symbol from the game control unit g100, a common drawing specific effect is performed.

  Specifically, based on the variation start command of the normal symbol transmitted from the game control unit g100 in response to the start of the variation of the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not to perform the specific effect g70 (general figure specific effect) When it is determined that the effect g70 is to be performed, the variation effect using the identification display g71 is performed as the specific effect g70. Further, based on the change start command of the special symbol transmitted from the game control unit g100 in response to the start of change of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the specific effect g70 (special image specific effect) is to be performed. When it is determined to be performed, a fluctuation effect using the identification display g71 is performed as the specific effect g70.

  When it is determined to perform a specific effect triggered by a change in a special symbol, even when it is determined to perform a specific effect triggered by a change in a normal symbol, a specific effect triggered by a change in the special symbol However, it is given priority over the specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol. Thereby, even when the special symbol and the normal symbol change at the same time, the result of the special symbol determination can be notified by the specific effect. In addition, the specific effect which triggered the change of the normal symbol may be preferentially executed rather than the specific effect which triggered the change of the special symbol. That is, when it is determined to execute both the specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol and the specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol, either one may be prioritized.

  Moreover, although the said specific production is performed triggered by the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol, when it determines with it being a big hit by a specific big hit symbol in the result of a special symbol determination, it is performed triggered by the fluctuation of a special symbol. The jackpot design determines the type of jackpot (16R jackpot or 4R jackpot that opens the jackpot g13B). For this reason, the specific jackpot type can be notified by the above specific effect.

  Moreover, although the said specific presentation is performed triggered by the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol, when the specific fluctuation pattern is selected in the result of special symbol determination, it is performed triggered by the fluctuation of a special symbol. As a result, the specific effect can be performed under various conditions, and simplification of the execution pattern of the effect can be prevented, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

  In addition, when the normal symbol changes without straddling the change start and / or stop timing of the special symbol, the above-mentioned specific effect to be performed triggered by the change of the normal symbol is performed only for the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the timing concerned If the normal symbol changes across the, the presentation time will be shorter. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency at which the special symbol starts and / or stops changing during execution of the specific effect.

  In addition, the specific effect including the identification display "RUSH" is performed after a predetermined timing (for example, reach establishment timing) during the variation of the special symbol, and is not performed before the predetermined timing. That is, the identification display "RUSH" appears as an identification display in a specific effect only after a predetermined timing. For this reason, when the specific effect is executed after the predetermined timing and the identification display "RUSH" appears, the player can be expected to stop at the identification display "RUSH".

  In addition, the specific effect including the identification display "RUSH" may be configured to be performed before reaching and not performed after reaching. That is, a specific effect including the identification display "RUSH" is performed before or after a predetermined timing during the variation of the special symbol, and a specific effect not including the identification display "RUSH" is performed on the other It may be configured as follows.

[Modification]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be in the following form.

  For example, in the above embodiment, four types of jackpots (16R jackpot to open the big winning opening g13A, 4R jackpot to open the big winning opening g13A, 16R jackpot to open the big winning opening g13B, open the big winning opening g13B 4R jackpot) was prepared, but the type of jackpot is not limited to this. Further, in the above embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols are prepared corresponding to the four types of jackpots. In another embodiment, the jackpot symbols and jackpot types may be associated in many-to-one correspondence. That is, a plurality of jackpot symbols for determining the type of a certain jackpot may be prepared, and a plurality of other jackpot symbols for determining the type of another jackpot may be prepared.

  Further, the aspect of the specific effect is not limited to the above-described example, and the specific effect may be an effect of any other aspect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the result of a special symbol determination is a big hit, the game machine which changes to a probability variation gaming state according to a big hit symbol was assumed. In the gaming machine of the other embodiment, when the jackpot is reached, the predetermined winning opening (V winning opening) is opened during the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, and the gaming ball wins the V winning opening. , And may be configured to transition to the probability variation gaming state. In such a gaming machine, depending on the type of the jackpot symbol, the V winning opening opens long or short during the jackpot game, and when long opening the gaming ball wins the V winning opening and opens short It is structured so that it won't win almost. In such a gaming machine, when winning in the V winning opening, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state continues for a predetermined period (the number of times the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times), and usually passes a predetermined period. Return to gaming state. In such a gaming machine, the above-mentioned specific effect may be executed when it is determined that the V winning opening has a long opening.

  In addition, for example, when winning a V winning opening, as the probability change gaming state to shift after the big hit game, either of the middle probability state and the high probability state can be exemplified as described above. Furthermore, when winning in one of the plurality of winning openings (for example, first V winning opening, second V winning opening), it shifts to the middle probability state after the big hit game when winning in the first V winning opening, and winning in the other second V winning opening You may be comprised so that it may transfer to a high probability state after a game.

  Further, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine g1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations. Further, the order of processing in the above-described flowchart, setting values, threshold values used for determination and the like are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders or values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

[Configuration of gaming machine according to the present invention and its function and effect]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. Note that parentheses are merely examples.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention performs the special game (opening of the big winning opening g13A or g13B) according to the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening g11 or the second starting opening g12). After changing the first symbol to the first symbol display means (g41) according to the special game determination means (g101, Sg4) to perform the special game determination of whether to execute or not and the establishment of the first start condition The first symbol control means (Sg4) for notifying the result of the special game determination by stopping it, and the establishment of the second start condition which can be established independently of the first start condition (gate to g15 or 16 A predetermined game determination means (Sg5) for performing a predetermined game determination as to whether or not to execute a predetermined game (the opening of the second starting opening g12) different from the special game according to the passage of the game ball); According to the establishment of the start condition, the second symbol table The second symbol control means (Sg5) for notifying the result of the predetermined game determination by causing the means (g45) to change the second symbol and then stopping, and the effect control means for controlling a predetermined effect The effect control means determines whether or not to execute the specific effect according to the variation of the first symbol, and when it is determined to execute, the first specific effect executing means (g130 to execute the specific effect , Sg 1322), and whether or not to execute the specific effect according to the variation of the second symbol, when it is determined to execute, the second specific effect execution means (Sg1323) to execute the specific effect When it is determined to execute the specified effect by the first specified effect executing means and the second specified effect executing means, the specified effect by the first specified effect executing means and the second specified performance Including priority control means for giving priority to either one of the specific effect by the execution unit and (Sg1345), the.

  According to the above configuration, the specific effect can be executed according to the change of the first symbol, and the specific effect can be executed according to the change of the second symbol. When executing a specific effect according to the change of the first symbol, even if it is determined to execute the specific effect according to the change of the second symbol, priority is given to the specific effect according to the change of the first symbol Can be implemented.

Eighth Embodiment
The eighth embodiment will be described.
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, during the symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the symbol fluctuation is executed, and during the jackpot game, the jackpot effect corresponding to the jackpot game is executed, so the symbol fluctuation and the jackpot A totally different effect was performed during the game. For this reason, it can not be said that an effective rendition is made to make the player feel the relativity between the rendition during the symbol variation and the rendition during the jackpot game.
Therefore, the eighth embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the effect during symbol variation and during the jackpot game.

That is, the gaming machine (h1) according to the eighth embodiment includes the operable operation means (h26), and determines whether or not to execute an advantageous special game according to the establishment of the start condition. It is a gaming machine that executes the special game according to the result of the determination, and the symbol display control means (h 101, Sh 316) During the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display means, under a predetermined condition, while outputting the effect sound, the first effect instructing to perform the operation at the timing related to the effect sound to be output The first effect executing means (h140, Sh110) to be executed, and that the symbol indicating that it is determined to execute the special game in the symbol change when the first effect is executed is continued following Second effect execution means (h140, Sh125) for executing a second effect for outputting an effect sound and instructing operation at a timing related to the output effect during a special game to be played Prepare.
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 8) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 8-”. With regard to the eighth embodiment, the drawing (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment and other embodiments may be referred to.

[Demonstrate for each type of jackpot]
The effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine h1 (corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine a100 in FIG. 1A) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-6 to 8-15. FIG. 8-6 is a diagram showing the relationship between jackpot types and effects when it is determined to be a jackpot in the normal gaming state.

Note that the 16R probability variation in Fig. 8-6 corresponds to "1 per 16R length (high probability time short)" (see Fig. 1-17-2), and the 4R probability variation in Fig. 8-6 is 1 It corresponds to "high probability time short)" or "2 per 4R length (medium probability time short)" (see FIG. 1-17-2).
Further, the 16R probability variation per unit (RUB) in FIG. 8-6 corresponds to “2 (RUB) per 16R length (high probability time short)” in the first embodiment (see FIG. 1-17-2).
In addition, the first large winning opening (lower right) in FIG. 8-6 corresponds to the first large winning opening a125A (see FIG. 1-1) described in the first embodiment. Further, the second large winning opening (vane attacker) in FIG. 8-6 corresponds to the second large winning opening a125B (see FIG. 1-1) described in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6, the 16R probability variation hit and the 4R probability variation hit are jackpots that use the first large winning opening h13 (corresponding to the first large winning opening a125A in FIG. 1-1). In the case of becoming a big hit, during reach of symbols, various reach effects such as SP reach production and SPSP reach production are performed, and then it is reported that the big hit and the type of the big hit. Then, in the jackpot game following this symbol variation, the player performs a selection operation of a moving image by the player during the first round long open round game, and after the second round game is started, the player selects The video is played back.

  As described above, in the case of the 16R probability variation hit or the 4R probability variation hit, different effects are performed between symbol variation and the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, the 16R probability variation per unit (RUB) and the 4R probability variation per unit (RUB) are jackpots using the second large winning opening h19 (corresponding to the second large winning opening a125B in FIG. 1A). In the case of becoming a big hit, during the symbol change, a game effect is performed which causes the player to operate the effect button h26 (corresponding to the effect button a161 in FIG. 1-1), and the result notification of this game indicates Is reported. Then, in the jackpot game following the symbol change, the same type of game effect as that during the symbol change is performed by taking over the reproduction of the moving image for the game effect and the effect sound (music) during the symbol change. And the presence or absence of round promotion is alert | reported by alerting | reporting of the result of this 2nd game.

  As described above, in the case of 16R probability variation (RUB) or 4R probability variation (RUB), the same type of game rendition is performed during symbol variation and during a jackpot game.

  FIG. 8-7 is a diagram showing, for each type of jackpot, the flow of effects to be performed from during symbol variation to during the jackpot game. 8-8 is a screen view showing a specific example of an effect on a jackpot using the first big winning opening h13. 8-9 and 8-10 are screen diagrams exemplifying a selection screen of a moving image displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 1-1).

[In the case of the jackpot which uses the 1st large winning a prize mouth h13]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 8-7 (A) and FIGS. 8-8 to 8-10, effects relating to the jackpot (jackets other than RUB) using the first jackpot h13 will be described.

  When the game ball is won in the first starting opening h11 (corresponding to the first starting opening a121 in FIG. 1-1) while the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol display h41 (FIG. 1-3) In the first special symbol display a221), the decorative symbols displayed in three lines on the liquid crystal display h5 are scrolled from the top to the bottom as the variable display of the special symbols is started. Display is started (see FIG. 8-8 (S-A)). When the left symbol and the right symbol different from each other are falsely stopped when the decorative symbols falsely stop in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol on the effective line on the front screen of the liquid crystal display h5, reach is established do not do. In this case, as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display h41, the scattered dots are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  On the other hand, when the same decorative symbol is falsely stopped on the effective line as the left symbol and the right symbol when each symbol is falsely stopped, reach is realized (see FIG. 8-8 (S-B)), and the liquid crystal display device h5 Then, reach production is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 8-7 (A), this reach effect is performed on the effective line while reproducing a moving image for reaching effect (for example, a moving image for reproducing a predetermined story) as a background image. A reach effect is performed using a decorative symbol which gives the player a sense of expectation that the same middle symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol may stop. In addition, during this reach effect, the effect sound corresponding to the moving image for reach effect being reproduced (specifically, the music A corresponding to the moving image for reach effect) is the speaker h25 (corresponds to the speaker a 156 in FIG. 1-1) Output from

  Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of symbols, the first special symbol display h41, for example, is displayed on the effective line with the stop display of the jackpot symbol indicating that it is a 16R probability variation hit. The three decorative symbols that become symbol-matched are finally stopped (see FIG. 8-8 (S-C)). Note that, as is clear from FIGS. 8-8 (S-B) and (S-C), each decorative symbol is displayed large at the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device h5 during reach effect and symbol stopping.

  In this manner, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined opening effect is performed in the opening period of the jackpot game. Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 8-7 (A), a movie for opening effect (for example, a movie obtained by photographing a situation in which a specific person is blessing a jackpot) is reproduced as a background image, A right-handed notification is performed together with an effect display that reports that the jackpot has occurred and the type of the jackpot. Specifically, a message such as "Please aim at the right" is superimposed on the animation for the opening effect together with the words "SUPER ○○ bonus!". During the opening effect, an effect sound (specifically, a sound such as “big hit!”) Corresponding to the moving image for opening effect being reproduced is output from the speaker h25.

  Thus, when the opening period in which the opening effect is performed is completed, a moving image selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 during the first round of the long open round game (FIG. 8-7 (A), and FIG. -8 (S-D)). While the moving image selection screen is displayed, a predetermined effect sound (BGM or the like) corresponding to the moving image selection screen is output from the speaker h25.

  As exemplified in FIG. 8-9, the moving image selection screen includes a list of selectable moving images, and the player uses the arrow key h27 (effect key a 162 in FIG. 1-2) to reproduce the moving image. And the selection (decision) using the effect button h26. In addition, the moving image (“moving image 1” in FIG. 8-9) which is in the selected state is highlighted, and the moving image which is in the selected state when the effect button h26 is pressed is determined as the moving image to be reproduced. Ru. Further, in the present embodiment, the moving images that can be selected on the moving image selection screen increase in accordance with the number of consecutive channels (the number of consecutive large wins). Note that the number of selectable videos increases regardless of the type of jackpot. FIGS. 8-10 show an example of the moving picture selection screen in a state in which the number of consecutive channels is larger than the state (third channel) shown in FIG. 8-9, and is exemplified in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select a number of moving images according to the number of consecutive channels on the moving image selection screen.

  When a moving image is selected in the first round long opening round game, in the present embodiment, reproduction of the selected moving image is started at the start of the second round long opening round game (FIG. 8-7, FIG. 8-8 (S-E)). In addition, a music (a music B different from the music A in the reach effect in FIG. 8-7) which is an effect sound corresponding to the selected moving image is output from the speaker h25. In addition, when the moving image to be reproduced is not determined (designated) in the first round, the moving image (highlighted) selected at the end of the first round and the music corresponding to the moving image in the second and subsequent rounds Be regenerated.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the above-described moving image is reproduced until the end of the final round. Then, an ending effect is performed at the end of the jackpot game. In the ending, an ending effect (for example, a display such as “probable change mode entry”) is performed to notify the player of the effect mode indicating the gaming state (here, the probability change gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game. In addition to the ending effect, a background moving image for ending and an effect sound (for example, a sound effect) corresponding to the background moving image for ending are reproduced (see FIG. 8-7 (A)).

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot using the first big winning opening h13, the movie selection screen is displayed and the movie selection is made regardless of the type of jackpot per 16R probability variation or 4R probability variation. It becomes possible. However, in another embodiment, in the case of the 4R probability variation hit, the player may not select the moving image. In the case of 4R probability variation, since the time of the jackpot game is short compared to the 16R probability variation, if the animation is selected in the first round, sufficient time for reproducing the animation during the jackpot game may not be secured. Because there is That is, in the case of a 4R probability variation hit, a preset moving image (and effect sound) may be reproduced from the first round.

  As described above, in the case of a big hit using the first big winning opening h13, different moving images are reproduced during the period from the variation of the symbol to the stop, the opening period, and the period during the big hit game, and different effects The sound (music) is reproduced (see FIG. 8-7 (A)). Therefore, even in the entire effect performed using the liquid crystal display device h5, the speaker h25, and the like, the effect is not continuous before and after the start of the big hit game.

[In the case of the big hit which uses 2nd big winning a prize mouth h19]
FIGS. 8-11 and 8-12 are screen diagrams showing a specific example of a game effect performed during a symbol change that has the possibility of winning an RUB. FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of game effects performed during the jackpot game according to RUB.

  Hereinafter, referring to FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C) and FIGS. 8-11 to 8-15, the second large winning opening h19 (corresponding to the second large winning opening a 125 B in FIG. 1-1) The effects on the jackpot (RUB) used will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-6, when the first hit is RUB, the first game effect is performed during the symbol change, and the second game effect is performed during the big hit game (see FIG. 8-6). The first game effect is an effect for notifying whether or not it is a jackpot, and the second game effect is that the number of rounds (the number of long open round games) performed during the jackpot game is 16 times It is an effect for notifying whether it is or not. Although details will be described later, when the first hit is RUB, one background effect (moving image and effect sound such as music to be BGM) is continuously performed from during the symbol change to the big hit game. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, with regard to the RUB, a jackpot game is performed using the second large winning opening h19, which is a feather-shaped attacker.

  As a result of the jackpot determination performed in response to the game ball having won the first start hole h11, if there is a possibility of becoming a RUB, the first game effect is performed during the symbol change (FIG. 8-7 (FIG. B) and (C)). Specifically, first, in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening h11, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the liquid crystal display device h5, and three decorations including a middle symbol suggesting the execution of the game effect The symbol is pseudo stopped on the effective line. As a result, the first game effect is started (see FIGS. 8-11 (S-G)). It should be noted that after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started and until the decorative symbol suggesting the execution of the game effect is pseudo-stopped, each decorative symbol is the liquid crystal display device h5 as in the case of a big hit other than RUB. The image is displayed large at the center of the screen.

  When the first game effect is started, for example, a display indicating a countdown until the game start or a display indicating an operation content such as "press a button according to the rhythm!" Or, depending on those displays, output of the effect sound (sound effect) is performed. Subsequently, the first game rendition is started.

  As exemplified in FIG. 8-12, the game area h61 is provided in a part of the screen area of the liquid crystal display device h5 (here, the area on the lower side of the screen), and the reference button image h62 and the movement in the game area h61 The button image h63 is displayed. The reference button image h62 is displayed fixed at a predetermined position, and the move button image h63 is displayed to move rightward from the edge of the screen (here, the left end) over the reference button image h62. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-12, the liquid crystal display device h5 displays a message such as “Press in accordance with the rhythm!”. The game played here is a so-called rhythm game, and is a game in which the operation (rhythm input operation) is performed at a timing when the plurality of move button images h63 sequentially pass over the reference button image h62. The operation method in the game is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the effect button h26 is pressed.

  Although not shown, the time difference between the operation timing and the timing at which the move button image h63 passes over the reference button image h62 is evaluated in response to the above operation being performed, and the evaluation result is displayed. For example, evaluation results such as “exquisite”, “highest”, “good”, and “good” are displayed in the vicinity of the reference button image h62 in order from the case where the two timings are close.

  Here, when the first game effect is started, the background moving image h65 for game effect is reproduced as the background effect, and the effect sound (specifically, the music C) corresponding to the background moving image h65 is reproduced. (See FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)). In addition, the music C which is an effect sound for a game effect is different from the music A and the music B which are effect sounds to be reproduced in the case of a jackpot other than the above-mentioned RUB. However, in another embodiment, the music C may be the same as the music A or the music B. Further, the move button image h63 passes above the reference button image h62 at a timing according to the tempo and rhythm of the music C that is the effect sound. Therefore, the first game is a rhythm game in which the operation is performed at timing according to the music. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the symbol change, a game effect is output, which outputs the effect sound (music) and instructs to perform an operation at a timing related to the output effect sound.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8-12, a gauge h64 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5. The gauge h64 is displayed so that the gauge amount (a portion of the gauge whose color changes. In FIG. 8-12, a hatched area) rises in accordance with the operation of the rhythm game. Although the details will be described later, when the game is successful (when a big hit is notified), a display is performed in which the gauge amount reaches the upper limit. On the other hand, the first game effect is performed under certain conditions even when it is determined that there is a loss in the big hit determination, and in this case, the gauge amount no longer increases even if the effect button h26 is pressed. Fails.

  During the first game effect, the decorative symbol h66 is variably displayed in a state where the visibility is lowered. Specifically, after the pseudo stop as described above before the start of the game effect, the decorative symbol moves near the lower right of the screen and is smaller and translucent than when reach effect is performed. . This is to suppress loss of continuity between the effect during symbol variation and the effect during the big hit game. Further, the decorative symbol h66 is stopped and displayed in a normal visual recognition state (that is, in a non-translucent state) after the end of the first game effect. At this time, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is displayed small (that is, in the same size as the game effect) near the edge of the screen, as in the game effect. In FIG. 8-12, the decorative symbol h66 is displayed on the right side of the reference button image h62, but the decorative symbol h66 is variably displayed on the back side of the reference button image h62, and the decorative symbol h66 during symbol variation is displayed. The visibility of may be reduced.

  FIGS. 8-13 is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed after the image shown to FIGS. 8-12, when the game presentation of a 1st time is performed. In the first game effect, after a predetermined number of move button images h63 shown in FIG. 8-12 are moved and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a continuous hit button image h67 indicating continuous hit is moved and displayed. Ru. Similarly to the moving button image h63, the continuous hitting button image h67 is displayed so as to move to the right from the edge (left end) of the screen over the reference button image h62. Further, although not shown in the figure, the number of times the operation is performed while the continuous hit button image h67 passes above the reference button image h62 (the number of continuous hits) is displayed in the vicinity of the reference button image h62.

  As described above, in the first game effect, the player performs an operation (rhythm input operation) at a timing according to the movement of the move button image h63, and then the consecutive hit button image h67 is on the reference button image h62. An operation (continuous hit input operation) to hit the effect button h26 continuously while passing through is performed.

  After the continuous hit button image h67 is displayed, the first game effect is ended, and the game result (success / failure) is notified at the end of the symbol change. That is, if it is determined that there is a loss, the gauge amount of the gauge h64 does not rise to the upper limit, and the game fails. At this time, an effect that characters such as “failure” may be displayed may be performed as an effect notifying the failure. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is RUB, the game is successful and a jackpot game is played.

  When it is determined that it is RUB, when the variable display of symbols is finished, the jackpot symbol indicating that it is 16R positive variation hit (RUB) or 4R positive variation hit (RUB) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display h41 As a result, the decorative symbol h60 indicating the RUB is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 8-11 (SH)). This decorative symbol h60 has the same display position and display size as compared to the decorative symbol h66 that has been variably displayed, but it is stopped and displayed in a mode that is not translucent in front of other effect images , Is different from the decorative pattern h66. As described above, after the start of the first game effect, the decorative symbol h66 is displayed so as not to hinder the visibility of the background moving image for the game. It can suppress that the continuity of the production | presentation in symbol fluctuation and the production | presentation in a big hit game is impaired by this.

  In addition, in the opening of the jackpot game following the stop display of this symbol, an opening effect notifying that the number of rounds in the jackpot game is a jackpot (more specifically, RUB) in a manner that the player can not recognize is performed ( See Figures 8-11 (S-H)). In this opening effect, specifically, for example, characters such as “○ RUSH!” Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5, and a message “Please aim at the right” is output from the liquid crystal display device h5 and the speaker h25.

  In addition, during the stop display of the decorative symbol after the game effect is finished and during the opening effect, the moving image and effect sound (music C) of the background effect for the game during the symbol change are continuously reproduced (the music See FIGS. 8-7 (B), (C), and FIGS. 8-11 (S-H)). Even during the jackpot game, the moving image and the effect sound of the background effect for the game are continuously reproduced (see FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)).

  During the jackpot game, the moving image and the effect sound of the background effect for the game are reproduced, and the second game effect is started at a predetermined timing (see FIG. 8-11 (SI)). The second game effect may be started at any timing before the fourth round, but in the present embodiment, the second game effect is started at the start of the second round. .

  FIGS. 8-14 is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 at the time of the game presentation of the 2nd time. As shown in FIG. 8-14, at the time of the second game effect, a game area h61 similar to that at the time of the first game effect is provided, and in the game area h61, the standard button image h62 and the continuous hit button image h67 are provided. A gauge h64 is displayed on the upper left of the game area h61. Further, the liquid crystal display h5 displays a message such as "Continuous strike!". In addition, as described above, the background moving image h65 for game effect, which is continuously reproduced from the first game effect, is displayed above the game area h61.

  Furthermore, since the jackpot game is being played during the second game effect, the number-of-rounds image h68 showing the current number of rounds, the round icon h69 showing the current number of rounds and the total number of rounds played in the current jackpot game, The right-handed notification image 70 for notifying that the user urges right-handling is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5. The round icon h69 indicates the total number of rounds by the number of icons, and indicates the digested round, the current round and the undigested round in the display state of the icon (off, blinking, lighting, highlighting, etc.). At the time of the second game effect, the round icon h69 indicates "4" as the total number of rounds (four icons are displayed), but if the promotion effect described later is performed, It is changed to indicate "16" (see FIGS. 8-15).

  When the second game effect is started, for example, as an effect indicating the start of the game, a display of a countdown until the game start, a display showing an operation content such as “continuous hit!” Or the like is displayed. At the same time, an effect sound (sound effect) is output. Following that, a second game rendition is started. As shown in FIG. 8-14, in the second game effect, the move button image h63 does not appear, and only the continuous hit button image h67 appears. That is, the second game in the jackpot game is a game for performing an operation of continuously hitting the effect button h26 while the continuous hitting button image h67 passes above the reference button image h62 according to the effect indicating the game start. As in the case of the first game effect, the number of times the operation is performed while the continuous hit button image h67 passes above the reference button image h62 (the number of continuous hits) is displayed in the vicinity of the reference button image h62. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, the game sound is output, and the second game effect is instructed to perform the operation at the timing related to the sound to be output. . The operation in the second game effect (continuous hitting operation) is different from the operation in the first game effect (pressing operation and continuous hitting operation matched to the rhythm). However, in another embodiment, the operation in the second game effect may be the same as the operation in the first game effect.

  After the continuous hit button image h67 is displayed, the second game effect is ended, and the result (success / failure) of the game is notified. The second game effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the number of rounds is 16 times. For this reason, if the type of jackpot is 4R random variation hit (RUB), the gauge amount does not rise to the upper limit, the game fails, and the round icon h69 also does not change. On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is 16R probability variation (RUB), the gauge amount of the gauge h64 reaches the upper limit, the game is successful, and the round icon h69 changes (Fig. 8-11 (SJ ) And Figures 8-15). In the former case, the jackpot game ends in four rounds (after four long open round games have been played) (see FIG. 8-7 (C)). In this case, the promotion effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the latter case, after the end of the second game effect, a promotion effect of notifying that the number of rounds is 16 is performed (see FIG. 8-11 (S-J)). Here, the second game effect is performed in the second round, and the promotion effect is performed in the third round. In the promotion effect, at the beginning of the jackpot game, a character such as "Super ○ RUS H!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h 5 although "○ RUS H!" Is displayed. When the promotion effect is performed, the jackpot game ends after continuing to the 16th round (see FIG. 8-7 (B)).

  FIGS. 8-15 is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5, after promotion production | presentation is performed. As shown in FIG. 8-15, after the promotion effect is performed, the round icon h69 is changed to indicate “16” as the total number of rounds (16 icons are displayed). In addition, even after the end of the second game effect, the background moving image h65 and the effect sound are continuously reproduced from the time of the first game effect. Since the game effect is not performed after the promotion effect, the game area h61 is shrunk (may be deleted), and various button images h62, h63, and h67 are not displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C), the background effect (background moving picture h65 and music C) for the game effect at which the big hit game ends is reproduced until the big hit game is ended, and thereafter the big hit game In the ending, an ending effect is performed. In the ending, an ending effect is performed in which a player is notified of an effect mode that indicates a game state (here, either high or medium probability state) after the end of the jackpot game. This ending effect may be the same effect as in the case of the jackpot other than RUB. Also in the ending, the background effect for the game effect is taken over. That is, together with the ending effect, the background moving image h65 of the background effect for the game effect and the effect sound (music C) are reproduced (see FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first game effect is executed during the variable display of the symbol, and the second game effect is executed during the jackpot game to be executed subsequently (FIG. 8- 7 (B) and (C)). Here, the second game rendition is the same kind of rendition as the first game rendition in that the second game rendition is the rendition instructing to perform the operation at the timing related to the output sound (music C). . In addition, the background effect is continuously performed during the variation display before the big hit game and during the big hit game (see FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)). As described above, by performing the same type of effect during the variation display of the symbol and during the big hit game, it is possible to give continuity to the effect before and after the start of the big hit game. According to this, the excitement of the presentation by the notification of the jackpot when the symbol is stopped and displayed will not be interrupted, and will be continued also in the presentation of the jackpot game, and as a result, the effect during the symbol fluctuation and the jackpot game It is possible to improve the fun with the presentation.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the second game effect, an operation different from the first game effect is instructed. Here, assuming that the operation in the second game effect is the same as the first game effect, if the game becomes monotonous and the background effect before the big hit game start is taken over even after the big hit game starts, ( The player may be given the impression that the same game effect is simply repeated twice, in the sense that the background and the game content are the same, and the interest may be lowered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by making at least a part of the operations in the above two game effects different from each other, the background effect is given before and after the start of the big hit game while the jackpot game is performed. A fresh taste is given to the inside effect (the second game effect). By this, it is possible to make the rendition during the jackpot game more entertaining.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is notified whether or not the jackpot is a big hit by the first game effect, and the presence or absence of promotion of the number of rounds (the number of rounds is 16) is notified by the second game effect. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to provide continuity between the game effect notifying of whether or not the jackpot and the game effect notifying of the presence or absence of promotion of the number of rounds, notification of promotion of the number of rounds (Promotion of promotion) can be boosted more.

[First game effect processing by effect control board h130]
FIG. 8-32 is a detailed flowchart of the first game effect process. The first game effect process is an image and sound control process that is output for the first game effect, and includes, for example, a process that changes the display according to the operation by the player. As described above, the first game effect process is performed during the game effect in the variable effect.
In the first game effect, whether or not to perform the first game effect in the variation is determined by the sub CPU h 131 (corresponding to the CPU a 301 in FIG. 1-3). It is started after the first game effect start command instructing the start of the game effect of is set in the sub RAM h 133 (corresponding to the RAM a 303 in FIG. 1-3).

  As exemplified in FIG. 8-32, in the first game effect process, first, the sub CPU h 131 determines whether or not a rhythm game operation has been performed based on whether or not the effect button h 26 has been pressed ( Step Sh1120). Note that, during the first game effect, an effective period in which the operation is accepted is set, and it is determined that the operation of the rhythm game is not performed in the period outside the effective period.

  If it is determined that a rhythm game operation has been performed (step Sh1120: YES), the sub CPU h131 performs a rhythm input operation in the first game effect (an operation performed at the timing when the move button image h63 passes over the reference button image h62) It is determined whether it is a period to perform (step Sh1121). In this embodiment, the period from the start of the first game effect to a predetermined time is a period during which the move button image h63 is displayed and the rhythm input operation is instructed to the player, and from the predetermined time A period until the end of the first game effect is a period during which the continuous hit button image h67 is displayed and the continuous hit input operation is instructed to the player. Therefore, the sub-CPU h 131 measures the elapsed time from the start of the first game effect, and determines in step Sh1121 depending on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined time.

  If it is determined that it is a period in which a rhythm input operation is performed (step Sh1121: YES), the sub CPU h 131 evaluates the operation timing for the performed operation (step Sh1122). That is, the sub CPU h 131 calculates a time difference between the timing when the operation is performed and the timing when the move button image h 63 passes over the reference button image h 62, and determines the evaluation result according to the time difference. Here, the evaluation results are determined in four stages of “exquisite”, “highest”, “good”, and “good” from the case where the above time difference is small.

  Following the processing of step Sh1122, the sub CPU h131 sets an evaluation result command indicating the evaluation result obtained in step Sh1122 in the sub RAM h133 (step Sh1123). The evaluation result command is transmitted to the image and sound control board h140 by the transmission process of step Sh13. In response to the evaluation result indicated by the evaluation result command, the image / sound control board h140 that has received the evaluation result command liquid crystal displays any of the characters "exquisite", "highest", "good" and "good" Display on the device h5.

  Following the process of step Sh1123, the sub CPU h131 calculates an amount (gauge increase amount) to increase the gauge amount of the gauge h64 based on the determination result (step Sh1124). In the present embodiment, the gauge increase amount is determined in accordance with the evaluation result (the above time difference), and specifically, the gauge increase amount is determined such that the better the evaluation is (the smaller the time difference is).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a period for performing a rhythm input operation (a period for performing a continuous hit input operation) (step Sh1121: NO), the sub CPU h131 determines the number of times the effect button h26 is pressed during the continuous hit input operation It measures and sets the number-of-strokes command which shows the number of times of measurement to sub RAMh133 (step Sh1125). The consecutive hit number command is transmitted to the image sound control board h140 by the transmission process of step Sh13. The image and sound control board h140 that has received the number-of-strokes command displays on the liquid crystal display device h5 a display (for example, "10 number of strokes" etc.) indicating the number of strokes indicated by the number-of-strokes command.

  Following the processing of step Sh1125, the sub CPU h131 sets the gauge increase amount to a predetermined unit amount (step Sh1126). That is, during the continuous hit input operation period, the gauge amount increases by a unit amount (on the condition that it is less than a limit value described later) per operation of pressing the effect button h 26 once.

  When the process of step Sh1124 is performed or when the process of step Sh1126 is performed, the sub CPUh 131 determines that the gauge amount obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount is equal to or more than a predetermined limit value. It is determined whether or not (step Sh1127). Here, the current gauge amount is set to 0 at the start of the first game effect, and the value updated in step Sh1129 described later is stored in the sub RAM h133. Therefore, the sub CPU h 131 performs the determination in step Sh 1127 using the gauge amount stored in the sub RAM h 133 and the gauge increase amount calculated in step Sh 1 124 (or the gauge increase amount set in step Sh 1 126). .

  If it is determined that the gauge amount does not exceed the predetermined limit value (step Sh1127: NO), the sub CPUh 131 sets a gauge increase command for increasing the gauge amount of the displayed gauge h64 in the sub RAM h133 (step Sh1128). ). The gauge increase command includes the gauge increase amount calculated at step Sh1124 (or the unit amount set at step Sh1126) or information indicating the gauge amount obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount, By the transmission processing, it is transmitted to the image / sound control board h140 (corresponding to the image / sound control unit a310 in FIG. 1-3). The image and sound control board h140 that has received the gauge increase command updates the display of the gauge h64 displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 so as to become the gauge amount specified by the gauge increase command.

  By the above processing, when an operation is performed by the player during the first game effect, the evaluation result of the operation ("high" etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display h5, and the gauge amount is increased. . However, the gauge amount never exceeds the predetermined upper limit value until the game success is finally notified.

  Following the processing of step Sh1128, the sub-RAM h133 updates the gauge amount stored in the sub-RAM h133 so as to be the gauge amount obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount (step Sh1129).

  When it is determined that the operation of the rhythm game is not performed (step Sh1120: NO), when it is determined that the gauge amount is equal to or more than the predetermined limit value (step Sh1127: YES), or the process of step Sh1129 is performed. In the case, the sub CPU h 131 ends the first game effect process.

[Second game effect processing by effect control board h130]
FIG. 8-33 is a detailed flowchart of the second game effect process. The second game effect process is an image and sound control process that is output for the second game effect, and is, for example, a process that changes the display according to the operation by the player. As described above, the second game effect process is executed during the jackpot game following the symbol change.

  As exemplified in FIG. 8-33, in the second game effect processing, first, the sub CPU h 131 determines whether or not the operation of the rhythm game has been performed based on whether or not the effect button h 26 has been pressed ( Step Sh1360). Note that, during the second game effect, an effective period in which the operation is accepted is set, and it is determined that the operation of the rhythm game is not performed in the period outside the effective period.

  If it is determined that the rhythm game operation has been performed (step Sh1360: YES), the sub CPU h131 measures the number of times the effect button h26 has been pressed during the continuous batting input operation, and executes the continuous batting number command indicating the measured number It sets to sub RAMh133 (step Sh1361). The consecutive hit number command is transmitted to the image and sound control board h140 by the transmission process. The image and sound control board h140 that has received the number-of-strokes command displays on the liquid crystal display device h5 a display (for example, "10 number of strokes" etc.) indicating the number of strokes indicated by the number-of-strokes command.

  Following the processing of step Sh1361, the sub CPU h131 sets the gauge increase amount to a predetermined unit amount (step Sh1362). That is, in the second game effect as well as in the first game effect, only a unit amount per operation of pressing the effect button h26 once (during the condition that it is less than the limit value described later) ) As the gauge amount increases.

  Subsequent to the process of step Sh1362, the sub-CPU h 131 determines whether or not the gauge amount obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount becomes equal to or more than a predetermined limit value by the same method as step Sh1127. Step (step Sh1363).

  If it is determined that the gauge amount does not exceed the predetermined limit value (step Sh1363: NO), the sub CPU h131 sets a gauge increase command for increasing the gauge amount of the displayed gauge h64 in the sub RAM h133 (step Sh1364) ). This gauge increase command is the same as that used in the first game effect, and is transmitted to the image / sound control board h140 by the transmission process. Therefore, the image-sound control board h140 that has received the gauge increase command updates the display of the gauge h64 displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 so as to obtain the gauge amount specified by the gauge increase command.

  Through the above-described processing, the gauge amount increases in response to the player performing an operation during the second game effect as in the first game effect. However, the gauge amount never exceeds the predetermined upper limit value until the game success is finally notified.

  Following the process of step Sh1364, the sub RAM h133 updates the gauge amount stored in the sub RAM h133 so as to be a gauge amount obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount (step Sh1365).

  When it is determined that the operation of the rhythm game is not performed (step Sh1360: NO), when it is determined that the gauge amount is equal to or more than the predetermined limit value (step Sh1363: YES), or the process of step Sh1365 is performed. In the case, the sub CPU h 131 ends the second game effect process.

  In addition, if the rhythm game mentioned above succeeds, a high probability state, a medium probability state or a middle game state or a game state after the end of the jackpot game (the case of the second game effect) or the current game state (for the first game effect). An example of an effect informing any of the low probability states can be considered.

[Operation and effect of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the effect (game effect) of performing the operation at the timing related to the effect sound to be output is during the variation display of the symbol and during the jackpot game executed subsequently thereto (See FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)). In this way, it is possible to execute an effective presentation having relevance throughout symbol variation and the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the same effect sound as the effect sound at the time of the first game effect is output at the time of the second game effect. Thereby, the continuity of the effect before and after the start of the jackpot game can be further improved. Here, in the present embodiment, since the operation in the first game effect and the operation in the second game effect are made different, as described above, the effect sound in the two game effects is made the same. Even in this case, the presentation in the jackpot game (the second game presentation) can be made more interesting without impairing the fresh taste.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first game effect is performed, the decorative symbol is displayed in a display mode in which the visibility is reduced as compared with the case where the game effect is not performed (FIG. 8- 11 (S-G), (S-H)). By this, since it is possible to prevent the continuity of the effect before and after the start of the jackpot game from being damaged by the decorative symbol, it is possible to more effectively perform the effect with continuity in the symbol fluctuation and in the jackpot game .

[Modification]
In the above embodiment, the second game effect is an effect for suggesting the number of long open round games to be performed during the jackpot game. Here, the second game effect may be any as long as it indicates that the player is in an advantageous state during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game is over. For example, in another embodiment, the second game rendition may indicate the presence or absence of a so-called on-hold on-call continuation. That is, when a jackpot game is being performed in a state in which the right of special symbol determination to be judged to be a jackpot is held, so-called hold by giving an effect that the second game effect will be successful. It is possible to suggest to the player an inner run.

  Specifically, for example, with respect to the special symbol determination being held at the start of the jackpot game, similar to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 1-9 explaining the first embodiment) executed at the start of variation of the special symbol. By performing the processing, it is determined whether or not a special symbol determination that is being held includes a jackpot. Then, if it is determined that the jackpot is included, the second game effect to be successful is performed, and if it is determined that the jackpot is not included, the second game is failed. Make a presentation.

  For example, in another embodiment, the second game effect may indicate the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, in the gaming machine where the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state (high probability state with power support) or the short time gaming state (low probability state with power support) after the end of the jackpot game, the sub CPU h 131 The second game effect is started without notifying the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game at the start of the jackpot game. Further, sub CPU h 131 is set at the end of the jackpot game based on the information indicating the type of jackpot included in the opening command received from the game control board h100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3) Identify the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. Then, if the jackpot game is set to the probability variation gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the second game effect to be successful during the jackpot game is performed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game termination is set to the time saving game state. Perform a second game effect that will fail during the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, in the second game effect, a plurality of stages, such as a first round and a second round, are provided. Then, for example, it is suggested that after passing the stage of the first battle, it is suggested to shift to medium or higher probability state (including high probability gaming state) after the jackpot game, and after the second battle stage, it is after the jackpot game It may be suggested to shift to a high probability state.

  Further, in another embodiment, the first game effect may be performed while the so-called sudden probability change, a small hit, or a change in a symbol for which a loss will be notified. Specifically, if a sudden change in probability or a small hit is to be notified suddenly, the first game effect to be a game success is performed during symbol variation, and if a loss is to be notified, the game The first game effect that causes a failure is performed while the symbol changes. Then, when the first game effect to be successful during the symbol change is performed, the big hit game during the big hit game including a plurality of short opening round games in which the big winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening h19) is short opened. A second game effect which is a success is performed when the opportunity of the is suddenly a definite change hit, and a second game effect which is a failure when the opportunity of the big hit game is a small hit is performed.

  Also, in this embodiment, a game (more specifically, a rhythm game) as an effect (referred to as an operation instruction effect) for instructing the player to perform an operation, which is performed during symbol variation and during a big hit game. The case where the effect of) is performed is described as an example. Here, the format of the operation instruction effect is arbitrary, and is not limited to the effect of the game format. For example, in another embodiment, an image of a button may simply be displayed as an operation instruction effect, and an effect of performing a button operation at timing according to the effect sound may be performed.

  Further, the operation in the operation instruction effect is not limited to the operation of pressing the button, and may be any input by the player. For example, in another embodiment, the operation in the operation instruction effect may be an operation on the operation lever (stick), and the pachinko gaming machine h1 has a sensor capable of detecting the operation of holding the hand of the player In this case, the operation of holding the hand may be used as the operation in the operation instruction effect. That is, the pachinko gaming machine h1 may be provided with input means (a button, the operation lever, the sensor, etc.), and an input operation on the input means may be used as an operation in the operation instruction effect.

  Further, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine h1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is needless to say that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing in the above-described flowchart, setting values, threshold values used for determination and the like are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders or values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Moreover, the screen etc. which were illustrated by the said embodiment are only an example, Comprising: The screen of another display aspect may be sufficient. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a game effect using screens of different display modes according to, for example, the gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state, and low probability state).

[The ninth embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described.
Here, in the conventional reserve pre-reading effect, the player grasps in advance what kind of effect may be performed according to the reserve consumption even if the reserve image is displayed in a special display mode. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to feel the expectation for the jackpot because the player can not In order to solve such a problem, for example, a method can be considered which directly suggests an effect to be performed in response to a reserve consumption by a reserve look-ahead effect, but if such a method is adopted easily, the method Since the player can grasp in advance the effects to be performed according to the digestion, the player can play a game while expecting that a specific effect (a pseudo continuous effect or a reach effect) will be performed according to the pending digestion. There may be another problem that you will not be able to enjoy
Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, the player can grasp in advance the effects that may be performed according to the holding and digestion, and the player enjoys the game while expecting the effects to be performed. In order to provide a gaming machine that can be used, the following configuration is adopted.

That is, the gaming machine (i1) according to the ninth embodiment is based on acquisition means (i101, Si21, Si22) for acquiring acquisition information according to establishment of acquisition conditions, and the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means. And the special game determination means (i101, Si309) for determining whether or not the special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, and the determination by the special game determination means is performed in the symbol display means (i41, i42) Symbol display control means (i101, Si312, Si317) for stopping and displaying a symbol indicating the result of the determination after fluctuating display of the symbol, and acquisition by the acquisition means when the symbol is variably displayed in the symbol display means Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired information as information for holding the determination by the special game determination means when the information is acquired i1031 to i1038), an image display control means (i131, i140) for causing the display screen (i5) to display the hold image corresponding to the acquired information stored in the acquired information storage means, and acquired information corresponding to the hold image Predetermined effect executing means (i131, i140, i5) for executing a predetermined effect according to the determination when the determination by the special game determining means based on the above is performed, and the suggested effect for executing a suggested effect relating to the predetermined effect Execution means (i131, i140, i5), and the suggestion effect execution means determines the special game determination means based on the acquired information corresponding to the first hold image (for example, the .zeta. Icon) displayed on the display screen. First effect that may be executed by the predetermined effect executing means according to the determination (for example, pseudo continuous) A second hold image (eg, a ninja icon) different from the first hold image displayed on the display screen while executing a first suggested effect (eg, FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9) for When the determination by the special game determination means is performed based on the acquired information corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect that may be executed by the predetermined effect execution means according to the determination (for example, a second effect (for example, A second suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12) regarding reach effect is performed.
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 9) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 9-”. With regard to the ninth embodiment, the drawings (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment and other embodiments may be referred to.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device i5 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 1-1) and effect performers i6 and i7 in the ninth embodiment. FIG.

  The first hold icon display area i51 (see FIG. 9-4A) is an area for displaying a hold icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is held. In the first hold icon display area i51, the same number of holds as the number of hold of the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator i43 (corresponding to the first special symbol hold indicator a218 in FIG. 1-2) An icon is displayed.

  The second hold icon display area i52 (see FIG. 9-4A) is an area for displaying a hold icon indicating that the second special symbol determination is held. In this second hold icon display area i52, the same number of holds as the number of hold of the second special symbol determination indicated by the second special symbol hold indicator i44 (corresponding to the second special symbol hold indicator a219 in FIG. 1-2) An icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 9-4 (A), four pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area i51 in order to suggest that the pending number of the first special symbol determination is "4", and In order to suggest that the number of reserved special symbol determinations is "1", a state is shown in which one reserved icon is displayed in the second reserved icon display area i52.

  In addition, the first special symbol display i 41 (corresponding to the first special symbol display a 221 in FIG. 1-2) (or the second special symbol display i 42 (second special symbol display in FIG. 1-2) on the liquid crystal screen The region i53 is provided as a display region for displaying a variation suggestion image that suggests that the symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the device a222)) (see FIG. 9-4 (A)). In the present embodiment, the area directly above the effect image imitating the fireworks display is set as the area i53.

  In the pachinko gaming machine i1, when the right of the first special symbol determination which is being held is digested and the variable display of the symbols is started, first among the holding icons displayed in the first holding icon display area i51 The displayed hold icon (the hold icon closest to the area i53) is moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53. Then, when another hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area i51, the display position of the other hold icon is shifted toward the area i53 in the first hold icon display area i51. . For example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the first special symbol determination is digested in a state where four suspension icons are displayed in the first suspension icon display area i51, these suspension icons are displayed. The hold icon located on the far right of the first hold icon display area i51 is moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53, and the remaining three hold icons shift the display position to the right in the first hold icon display area i51. Be done. As a result, the number of pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area i 51 is three, and it is notified to the player that the right of the first special symbol determination pending is three. Become.

  Such shift processing is similarly performed for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area i52. In the pachinko gaming machine i1 according to the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are held, the second special symbol determination is preferentially digested rather than the first special symbol determination. Ru. For this reason, the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area i52 is performed with priority over the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area i51. That is, the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area i51 is performed after the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area i52 disappears.

  In this way, the game ball wins a prize at the first starting opening i11 (corresponding to the first starting opening a121 in FIG. 1-1) (or the second starting opening i12 (corresponding to the second starting opening a122 in FIG. 1-1)) Before the special symbol determination based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired in response to having been performed is performed, the held icon (held image) corresponding to the acquired information is the first held icon display area i 51 (or the second held It is displayed in the icon display area i52). When the special symbol determination and the special symbol variation display are performed based on the acquired information corresponding to the pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display region i51 (or the second pending icon display region i52), the pending is performed. The icon is moved to the area i53, and is displayed on the area i53 as a change suggestion image that suggests that the special symbol is variably displayed.

  In addition, although the white fireworks ball icon imitating a white fireworks ball is basically displayed in the first hold icon display area i51, a ninja icon which is a hold icon imitating a ninja, and an imitation trap are imitated The 場合 icon, which is a hold icon, may be displayed. The white fireworks ball icon is a default hold icon. For the ninja icon, if there is a possibility that the reach effect will be performed during symbol variation when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the ninja icon is digested, or after the ninja icon moves to the area i53, finally It is displayed when changing to a colored fireworks ball icon imitating a colored fireworks ball. An eyelid icon is displayed, for example, when there is a possibility that a pseudo continuous effect will be performed during symbol fluctuation when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the eyelid icon is digested.

[Schematic Configuration and Operation of Fireworks Object i6]
Fig. 9-4 (A) shows a state in which the firework symbol i6 is not in operation, and Fig. 9-4 (B) shows a state in which the fireworks character i6 is in operation. The fireworks accessory i6 is configured to have a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) rotating members i61 configured to be rotatable with the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine i1 as an axial direction. Each pivoting member i 61 incorporates a light emitting element (for example, an LED) and has a light transmitting member (black-painted portion of the pivoting member i 61) that transmits light of the light emitting element.

  In the state where the firework part i6 is not in operation, the six turning members i61 are maintained in a posture such that they can be seen in an overlapping manner in front view. On the other hand, when the pyrotechnic character i6 is actuated, the six pivoting members i61 are pivoted at mutually different rotational angles like a fan (see FIG. 9-4 (B)). The light emitting element emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. For this reason, when the firework symbol i6 is activated, a state where the firework ball launched in the night sky bursts and the spark is diffused is expressed.

  Although described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the fireworks character i6 performs the above-described operation before the decorative symbols are restarted after the decorative symbols have been artificially stopped for the pseudo continuous effect ((6) See Figures 9-9 (E) and (F)).

[Schematic configuration and operation of the serious role thing i7]
Fig. 9-4 (A) shows a state in which the serious character i7 is not in operation, and Fig. 9-4 (C) shows a state in which the serious character i7 is in operation. A serious character i7 has a sheath member i71 imitating a part of a serious sheath, a handle member i72 imitating a serious eyebrow and a handle, and a blade member i73 imitating a part of a serious blade It is configured.

  In a state where the serious object i7 is not in operation, the sheath member i71 and the handle member i72 are in contact with each other, and the blade member i73 can not be visually recognized (see FIG. 9-4A). In other words, the blade is in a sheath. On the other hand, when the serious product i7 is activated, the sheath member i71 slides in the left direction, and the handle member i72 slides in the right direction. As a result, the blade member i73 is exposed visibly See FIG. 9-4 (C)). Although not shown in the figure, the blade member i 73 includes a light emitting element (for example, an LED) and a light transmitting member transmitting light from the light emitting element. When the sheath member i71 and the handle member i72 slide, the light emitting elements of the blade member i73 emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. In this way, a portion of the blade that has come out of the sheath when the seriousness is removed is expressed.

  As described in detail later, in this embodiment, the serious character i7 operates before reaching the reach in order to suggest that the reach is established during the symbol change (FIG. 9-12 (E)). And (F)).

[Flow of effects performed when the white fireworks ball icon moves to the area i53]
9-5 is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the effect performed when the white fireworks ball icon is moved to the area i53.

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) with the white fireworks ball icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area i51, the variation display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the white fireworks ball icon is started The white fireworks ball icon is moved to the area i53 (see FIG. 9-5A).

  Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the white fireworks ball icon is lost and the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 8 seconds), the area i53 The white fireworks ball icon moved to is kept as it is, in order to suggest that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low (see FIG. 9-5 (B)). Then, the decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed at, for example, a loose eye, and it is informed that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss (see FIG. 9-5 (C)).

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the white fireworks ball icon is lost, but the variation time of the special symbol is set to a longer time (for example, 30 seconds), the region i53 is In the display mode which shows the determination result of the 1st special symbol determination after reach effect is realized in the state where the moved white fireworks ball icon maintained the display mode (refer to FIG. 9-5 (D)) The decorative symbol may be displayed in a stopped state (see FIGS. 9-5 (E) and (C)).

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the white fireworks ball icon is a big hit, it seems that the variation time of the special symbol of what is lost is set to a relatively long time (for example, 90 seconds) In this case, the white fireworks ball icon changes to a colored fireworks ball icon to indicate that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit after moving to the area i 53 (see FIG. 9-5 (F)). When the colored fireworks ball icons are arranged in order from the one showing that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low to the one showing that the reliability is high, for example, a blue fireworks ball icon, a yellow fireworks ball icon, a green one Fireworks ball icon, red fireworks ball icon, rainbow colored fireworks ball icon can be mentioned as an example. Then, when the white fireworks ball icon changes to a colored fireworks ball icon, in most cases, a reach is established (see FIG. 9-5 (D)), and after the reach effect is performed, the first corresponding to the colored fireworks ball icon The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination (see FIGS. 9-5 (E) and (C)).

[Specific example of effect using white fireworks ball icon]
9-6 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of an effect in which the white fireworks ball icon moves to the area i53 and then changes to a colored fireworks ball icon. As illustrated in FIG. 9-6 (A), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time in a state where two white fireworks ball icons are displayed in the first reserved icon display area i51, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol As the display is started, icon shift processing is performed. Specifically, among the two white fireworks ball icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area i51, the white fireworks ball icon closer to the area i53 is moved to the area i53, and the remaining white fireworks ball icons are displayed. The icon is shifted in the direction of approaching the area i53 in the first reserved icon display area i51 (see FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B)).

  Then, if it is determined that the white fireworks ball icon is changed to perform an effect indicating that there is a possibility of a jackpot, for example, a predetermined character changes the white fireworks ball icon displayed in the area i53. After the effect display for performing the operation is performed, the white fireworks ball icon changes to a colored fireworks ball icon as described above (see FIG. 9-6 (C)). Then, after such a color change of the icon occurs, reach is established and reach effect is performed (see FIG. 9-6 (D)).

  9-6 exemplifies that the white fireworks ball icon changes to a colored fireworks ball icon before reaching the reach, for example, the white fireworks ball icon is changed in color when reaching or after reaching the reach. May be

[Flow of effects performed when the eyelid icon moves to the area i53]
9-7 is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the effect performed when the eyelid icon is moved to the area i53. FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect of the failure pattern performed when the eyelid icon is moved to the area i53. FIGS. 9-9 is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect of the success pattern performed when an eyelid icon is moved to the said area | region i53. In FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, the illustration of the serious accessory i7 is omitted for the convenience of the description.

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time in a state where an eyelid icon is displayed at the right end of the first reserved icon display area i51 (see FIG. 9-8A), variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the eyelid icon At the start, the eyelid icon is moved to the area i 53 (see FIGS. 9-7A and 9-8A and 8B). Then, the effect image indicating the continuous area i56 which is the destination of the bookmark icon is displayed (see FIG. 9-8 (B)).

[When pseudo continuous production is not performed]
When the above-described pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the fluctuation display of the symbol corresponding to the eyebrow icon, the suggested effect of the failure pattern regarding the pseudo continuous effect as described below is performed using the eyelid icon.

  Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the eyelid icon moves to the area i53, an effect display indicating that the eyelid icon is launched from the fireworks display displayed immediately below the area i53. (See FIGS. 9-7 (B) and 9-8 (C)), and then, a representation display representing a state in which the launched rose icon swims in the air and moves toward the continuous area i 56. Is performed (see FIG. 9-7 (C), FIG. 9-8 (C) and (D)). More specifically, the fireworks ball (the rotation center of the rotation member i61) of the fireworks object i6 is located on the extension of the line connecting the launched eyelid icon and the connection area i56, and the eyelid icon is It moves toward the fireworks ball of the fireworks feature i6. That is, the movement direction of the eyelid icon is a direction in which the eyelid icon approaches the fireworks ball of the fireworks feature i6.

  Then, since the pseudo continuous effect is not performed in this variation, an effect display indicating that the eyelid icon can not reach the continuous area i56 and falls to a different place from the area i53 is performed (FIG. 9- 7 (D), see FIGS. 9-8 (D) and (E)), the effect icon of the eyelid icon and the continuous area i56 is erased from the liquid crystal screen. Then, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the whistle icon is lost, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that (FIG. 9-7 (E), FIG. 9-8 (F )reference).

  In addition, after the drop icon is dropped and deleted from the liquid crystal screen, a fireworks ball icon is displayed in the area i53 instead of the drop icon until the decorative symbol in change is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 9-8 (F)). For this reason, the player can recognize that the symbol variation has not ended by seeing that the white fireworks ball icon is displayed in the area i53.

  In the present embodiment, a white fireworks ball icon is displayed on the area i 53 instead of the character icon (侍 icon or ninja icon) deleted from the liquid crystal screen, but the symbol is displayed after the character icon is deleted. If the time until the stop display is not sufficient, a configuration may be adopted in which the alternative white fireworks ball icon is not displayed.

[When pseudo continuous effect is performed]
When the above-described pseudo continuous effect is performed during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the whistle icon, the suggestion effect of the success pattern regarding the pseudo continuous effect as described below is performed using the whistle icon.

  Specifically, after the eyelid icon is moved to the area i53, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the movement, the eyelid icon corresponds to the area i53 as in the case where the suggestion effect of the failure pattern is performed. After it is launched from the stage, effect display representing movement toward the continuous area i 56 is performed (see FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (C)). In other words, the suggested effect of the failure pattern using the whistle icon and the suggested effect of the success pattern share the former part.

  Then, since the pseudo continuous effect is performed in this variation, for example, the eyelid icon reaches the continuous area i 56 at the timing immediately after the reach is established (see FIGS. 9-7 (F) and 9-9 (D)). . Next, as the eyelid icon having reached the connected region i56 and the connected region i56 is erased from the liquid crystal screen, effect display indicating that it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is performed, and An alternative fireworks ball icon is displayed in the area i53 (see FIG. 9-9 (E)). This is to suggest that the symbol variation continues even after the whistle icon is erased. In the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), a state in which a colored fireworks ball icon is displayed in the area i53 is illustrated to suggest that there is a possibility of a big hit.

  Thus, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the like, including a middle symbol suggesting that the second row of the pseudo continuous effect will be entered when a predetermined time has elapsed since the eyelid icon has reached the connection region i56. And the right symbol is displayed pseudo stop (refer to FIG. 9-7 (G), FIG. 9-9 (E)).

  And, in order to suggest that the effect of the second pseudo-simulation is started (restart of the decorative symbol) before the decorative symbol displayed in the pseudo stop is restarted, the fireworks character i 6 is It operates (refer to FIG. 9-7 (H), FIG. 9-9 (F)). Specifically, the respective pivoting members i61 of the fireworks accessory i6 pivot at different rotation angles, and the light emitting elements incorporated in the respective pivoting members i61 emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Along with this, a part of the liquid crystal screen is covered by the fireworks character i6, so although not shown in the figure, the liquid crystal screen displays an effect image for enhancing the rendering effect by the operation of the fireworks character i6. Be done. Then, on the liquid crystal screen, the wording "more" is displayed at the same time as the fireworks character i6 is activated, and this wording is deleted as the fireworks character i6 returns to the original posture. Then, each decorative symbol restarts and enters the pseudo second stage effect (see FIG. 9-7 (I)).

  Thereafter, reach is established and reach effect is performed (see FIGS. 9-7 (J) and (K)), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 9-7 (E)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the eyelid icon is moved to the area i 53 and the variable display of the symbol is started, the failure pattern suggests that the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display of the symbol. The suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-8) or the suggestion effect of the success pattern (see FIG. 9-9) indicating that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed are performed using the eyelid icon.

  Therefore, the player grasps in advance that there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the symbol change corresponding to the bookmark icon based on the display of the bookmark icon in the first hold icon display area i51. be able to. It should be noted that since it is not determined that pseudo continuous effect will be performed only by the display of an eyebrow icon, the player can perform a suggested continuous effect of a success pattern by the eyelid icon moved to the area i 53 to perform pseudo continuous effect You can enjoy playing games while expecting to develop into

[Flow of effects performed when the ninja icon moves to the area i53]
FIGS. 9-10 is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the effect performed when the ninja icon is moved to the area i53. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the effect of the failure pattern performed when the ninja icon is moved to the area i53. FIGS. 9-12 are explanatory diagrams for describing a specific example of the effect of the first success pattern performed when the ninja icon is moved to the area i53. FIGS. 9-13 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the effect of the second success pattern performed when the ninja icon is moved to the area i53. 9-11 to 9-13, illustration of the fireworks combination i6 is omitted for convenience of explanation.

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time while the ninja icon is displayed at the right end of the first hold icon display area i 51 (see FIG. 9A), the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the ninja icon At the start, the ninja icon is moved to the area i53 (see FIGS. 9-10 (A) and FIGS. 9-11 (A) and (B)).

[When reach production is not performed]
When the above-described reach effect is not performed during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the ninja icon, an illicit effect of a failure pattern regarding the reach effect as described below is performed using the ninja icon.

  Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the ninja icon moves to the area i53, an effect display indicating that the ninja icon is launched from the fireworks display displayed immediately below the area i53 (See Fig. 9-10 (B) and Fig. 9-11 (C)), followed by an effect display showing the state of the launched ninja icon swimming in the air and moving toward the serious area i 57. Is performed (see FIG. 9-10 (C), FIG. 9-11 (C)). In more detail, the coffin of a serious character i7 is located on the extension of the line connecting the launched ninja icon and the serious area i57, and the ninja icon moves toward the coffin of a serious character i7 To go. That is, the movement direction of the ninja icon is the direction in which the ninja icon approaches the base of the serious feature i7. Since the effect image indicating the serious area i57 is not displayed in the area corresponding to the serious area i57, the boundary of the serious area i57 is indicated by a broken line in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13.

  In this variation, reach effect is not performed, and when the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 12 seconds), the ninja icon can not reach the serious region i57 and the region i53 is not The effect display showing the situation of falling to a place different from the one shown in (Figures 9-10 (D), Figures 9-11 (D) and (E)), the ninja icon is erased from the liquid crystal screen . Along with this, a white fireworks ball icon is displayed in the area i 53 as an icon in place of the ninja icon (see FIG. 9-11 (F)). And since the reach effect is not performed here, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss (FIG. 9-10 (E), FIG. 9-11 (F)).

[When reach production is performed]
When the reach effect is performed during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the ninja icon, the suggestion effect of the following first success pattern is performed using the ninja icon.

  Specifically, after the ninja icon is moved to the area i53, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the movement, the ninja icon is the area i53 as in the case where the suggestion effect of the failure pattern is performed. After being launched from the stage, effects are displayed representing movement toward the base of the serious area i 57 (see FIGS. 9-10 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 9-12 (A) to (C)). ). That is, also for the suggestion effect using the ninja icon, the former part of the suggestion effect of the failure pattern and the suggestion effect of the success pattern are common.

  And in this change, reach effect is performed, so the ninja icon reaches the serious area i 57 (see FIGS. 9-10 (F) and 9-12 (D)), and the serious character i 7 operates immediately after that. (Refer to FIG. 9-10 (G) and FIG. 9-12 (E)). Specifically, the sheath member i71 slides in the left direction and the handle member i72 slides in the right direction. In this state, the light emitting element contained in the blade member i73 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Along with this, a predetermined effect image for enhancing the rendering effect by the operation of the serious part i7 is displayed in the upper center (area including the serious area i57) on the liquid crystal screen (FIG. 9-12 (E )reference).

  After a predetermined time has passed since the serious character i7 is activated, the left symbol and the right symbol of the same kind are falsely displayed on the effective line, and reach is established (FIG. 9-10 (H), FIG. 9-12 (F )reference).

  Thus, when reach is established, a predetermined reach effect is performed (see FIG. 9-10 (I)), and the decorative symbol is stopped in a display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the ninja icon It will be displayed (see Figure 9-10 (J)).

  In addition, since the ninja icon that has reached the serious area i57 is erased from the liquid crystal screen with the operation of the serious feature i7, a fireworks ball icon as a substitute for the ninja icon is displayed in the area i53 (FIG. 9- 12 (E)). Therefore, for example, after reach is established, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the fireworks ball icon displayed in the area i53.

[When an icon change effect is performed]
If the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the ninja icon is that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high, the following second success as an effect that suggests that it may be a jackpot Suggestive staging of patterns may be performed.

  Specifically, after the ninja icon is moved to the area i53, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the movement, the same as in the case where the suggestion effect of the failure pattern or the suggestion effect of the first success pattern is performed Then, the effect display is performed showing that the ninja icon is launched from the area i 53 and then moves toward the serious area i 57 (FIGS. 9-10 (A) to (C), FIG. 9-13 (A ) To (C)).

  Then, since a jackpot may be notified as a result of this change being made, the ninja icon uses the furoshiki instead of the parachute as if the ninja icon falls without being able to reach the serious area i57. An effect display returning to the area i53 is performed (see FIGS. 9-10 (K) and 9-13 (D)).

  At this time, the ninja icon changes to a fireworks ball icon (hereinafter referred to as a “furoshiki ball icon”) wrapped in a furoshiki substantially at the same time as reaching the area i53. Then, along with this, a button image prompting the player to press the effect button i26 (corresponding to the effect button a161 in FIG. 1A) is displayed on the area i53 together with the bath-laying ball icon (FIG. 9-10 (L ), See FIGS. 9-13 (E)).

  On the other hand, when the player presses the effect button i26 while the button image is displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (M)), the bath-laying ball icon displayed in the area i53 is a colored fireworks ball icon (See FIGS. 9-10 (N), FIGS. 9-13 (E) and (F)). Then, after the reach effect is established and the reach effect is performed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the colored fireworks ball icon (FIG. 9-10 (H ) To (J)).

  As apparent from the above description, when the white fireworks ball icon is moved to the area i53, only a color change effect is performed to change the white fireworks ball icon into a colored fireworks ball icon. When the second success pattern suggestion effect using the ninja icon is performed, the second color change effect is performed after the second success pattern suggestion effect is performed.

  For this reason, it is possible to effectively hold a sense of expectation for the jackpot to the player who is losing the sense of expectation for the jackpot in response to the fact that the ninja icon can not reach the area i 57 seriously.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ninja icon is moved to the area i 53 and the variable display of the symbol is started, a failure pattern indicating that the reach effect is not performed during the variable display of the symbol Suggestive effects (see Figure 9-11), suggested effects of the first success pattern to suggest reach effect (see Figure 9-12), and color change effects with a relatively high degree of confidence for the jackpot Any of the suggestive effects (see FIGS. 9-13) of the second success pattern that suggests that is performed.

  Therefore, it is necessary for the player to grasp in advance that the reach effect may be performed during the symbol change corresponding to the ninja icon based on the display of the ninja icon in the first hold icon display area i51. It is possible to enjoy the game while expecting that the suggested effect of the first success pattern or the suggested effect of the second success pattern is performed.

  In addition, when the suggestion effect relating to the pseudo continuous effect and the suggestion effect relating to the reach effect are compared, the character used for the suggestion effect is different. For this reason, the player should easily and in advance grasp the type of the suggestion effect to be performed at the time of the hold digest based on the type of the character icon (ア イ コ ン icon or ninja icon) displayed in the first hold icon display area i 51 Can.

  In addition, in the suggestion production about the pseudo continuous production, the display production where the eyelid icon moves toward the fireworks feature i6 that operates at the timing when the pseudo continuous production develops to the next stage is performed, and the suggestion about the reach production In the presentation, a display presentation is performed in which the ninja icon moves toward the base of the serious role i7 playing the role of suggesting reach establishment. For this reason, even if the player does not recognize what the display of the character icon means, when the character icon reaches a specific area, the effect corresponding to the area is activated. It can be sensibly recognized that pseudo continuous rendering and reach rendering are performed.

[Notice effect pattern setting process by effect control board i130]
FIGS. 9-27 and 9-28 are detailed flowcharts of the preview effect pattern setting process for setting various preview effects performed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the set variation effect pattern. The sub CPU i 131 (corresponding to the CPU a 301 in FIG. 1) performs setting processing regarding various advance notice effects as illustrated in FIG. 9-27 (step Si 1291). Specifically, for example, the effect pattern of the advance effect is determined by reading out the effect pattern corresponding to the acquired effect random number from the table in which the effect random number and the effect pattern of the advance effect are associated. Although detailed explanation is omitted, as this table, for example, the table used when the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit", the determination result of the special symbol determination is "missing", and the fluctuation time is predetermined A table used in the case of time (for example, 60 seconds) or more and an effect table used when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing” and the fluctuation time is less than a predetermined time are separately provided. , Referring to any of the tables selected based on the various setting information included in the change start command received from the game control board i100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3) The pattern is determined. By performing the setting process of step Si 1291, it is determined, for example, whether or not step-up notice effect is to be performed, and to what stage to develop when step-up notice effect is performed. Further, for example, it is determined whether or not to make a serif announcement for displaying a serif of a character on a liquid crystal screen, and when making a serif announcement, the contents of a serif, the type of a serif frame, and the like are determined.

  Subsequent to the process of step Si1291, the sub CPUi 131 determines whether or not the current fluctuation effect is to be performed in conjunction with the reserve consumption of the first special symbol determination (step Si1292). Specifically, the variation start command received by the sub CPU i 131 from the game control board i 100 includes the setting information of the symbol, and whether the setting information of this symbol relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination Since the information which shows whether it concerns is contained, based on this information, it is determined whether it is what is performed with the reserve consumption of the 1st special symbol determination based on this information. By the process of step Si1292, it is determined whether the icon is moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53. Here, if it is determined that the current fluctuation effect is not to be performed in conjunction with the reserve consumption of the first special symbol determination (step Si1292: NO), the process proceeds. In addition, when the change start command is received in the state where the number of reservations pertaining to the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAMi 133 is "0", even if it is the variation effect relating to the first special symbol determination Since it does not accompany, it is determined as "NO" in step Si1292.

  If the sub CPU i 131 determines that the current fluctuation effect is to be performed along with the first special symbol determination withholding and digesting (Step Si1292: YES), the first special symbol determination to be digested is a white fireworks ball It is determined whether it is a hold corresponding to the icon (step Si1293). In other words, it is determined whether or not the icon moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53 with the start of the current fluctuation effect is the white fireworks ball icon. Specifically, each time a hold command is received, an icon display command, a ninja icon display command, or a white fireworks ball icon display command is transmitted to display an icon in the first hold icon display area i51. Since execution of the shift process of each icon is instructed by transmitting the change effect start command, information indicating the process result is stored in the sub RAM i 133, and based on this information, the start of the current change effect is started. Accordingly, it is determined whether the icon moved to the area i53 is a white fireworks ball icon. Here, when it is determined that the suspension of the first special symbol determination to be digested is not the suspension corresponding to the white fireworks ball icon (step Si1293: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1300 described later.

  If the sub CPU i 131 determines that the icon moved to the area i 53 is a white fireworks ball icon (step Si1293: YES), the sub CPU i 131 determines whether to execute the icon change effect lottery (step Si1294). Specifically, in order to decide whether or not to perform an icon change effect that changes the white fireworks ball icon moved to the area i53 with the start of the current fluctuation effect to a colored fireworks ball icon in the area i53. It is determined whether or not to make a lottery target. As a judgment standard of this judgment, when fluctuation time of the special symbol in this fluctuation production is specified time (for example 30 seconds) or more, it decides that it designates as drawing object selection, when it is less than predetermined time, it designates object drawing Although the method of determining not to do so may be mentioned as an example, other determination criteria may be used.

  If the sub CPU i 131 determines to execute the icon change effect lottery (step Si1294: YES), the sub CPU i 131 executes an icon change effect lottery (step Si1295). Specifically, the random number for icon change effect used in the icon change effect lottery is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” each time the above-described random number update process is performed, so that the change start command is received The count value is acquired as an icon change effect random number. Then, based on whether or not the acquired icon change effect random number matches the predetermined random number value stored in the sub ROM i 132, it is determined whether to perform the icon change effect.

  The sub CPU i 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the determination result in the process of step Si 1295 (step Si 1296). Here, when it is determined to execute the icon change effect (step Si1296: YES), the display color of the fireworks ball icon after the icon change effect is determined based on, for example, the fluctuation time of the symbol related to the current change effect (step Si 1297). Next, based on the setting information of the set variation production pattern, a change timing which is a timing to change the white fireworks ball icon into a colored fireworks ball icon is determined (step Si 1298). Then, the display color determined in the process of step Si 1297 and the change timing determined in the process of step Si 1298 are set in the sub RAM i 133 as setting information of the icon change effect (step Si 1299).

  When the sub CPU i 131 executes the process of step Si 1299, when it is determined that the suspension of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the white fireworks ball icon is not digested (step Si 1293: NO), it is determined that the icon change effect lottery is not executed. (Step Si1294: NO) or when it is determined not to execute the icon change effect (step Si1296: NO), the reserve of the first special symbol determination to be digested corresponds to the whistle icon as in the process of step Si1293. It is determined whether or not to hold (step Si1300). In other words, it is determined whether or not the icon moved to the area i53 with the start of the current fluctuation effect is the eyelid icon. Here, if it is determined that the first special symbol determination to be digested is not the suspension corresponding to the whistle icon (step Si1300: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1306 (see FIG. 9-28) described later .

  By the way, when the eyelid icon is moved to the area i 53 with the start of the current fluctuation effect, the suggestion effect of the success pattern using the eyelid icon as the suggestion effect on the pseudo continuous effect during the current fluctuation effect It is necessary to perform suggestive effects (see FIG. 9-8) of a failure pattern using an eyelid icon (see FIG. 9-9).

  Therefore, if sub CPU i 131 determines that the suspension of the first special symbol determination to be digested is the suspension corresponding to the whistle icon (step Si 1300: YES), whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the current fluctuation effect It is determined (step Si1301). Specifically, since the setting information of the variation production pattern is set in the sub RAMi 133 by performing the process, the pseudo continuous presentation is performed during the present variation production based on the setting information of the variation presentation pattern set. Determine if it will take place.

  When the sub CPU i 131 determines that the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the current fluctuation effect (step Si 1301: YES), the pseudo icon performs the pseudo continuous effect in which the eyelid icon reaches the continuous area i 56 as a pattern of the suggestion effect using the eyelid icon Are set in the sub RAM i 133 as setting information (step Si 1302). Then, the fireworks combination object activation timing is set and its setting information is set in the sub RAMi 133 so that the fireworks combination i6 operates at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the whistle icon reached the connection area i56 (step Si 1303).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU i 131 determines that the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the current fluctuation effect (step Si 1301: NO), the failure icon may fail to reach the connection area i 56 and may be a failure effect pattern (FIG. 8 (C) to (E)) are set in the sub RAM i 133 as setting information (step Si1304).

  When the sub CPU i 131 executes the processing of step Si 1303, or when the processing of step Si 1304 is performed, or when it is determined that the suspension of the first special symbol determination to be digested is not the suspension corresponding to the whistle icon (step Si 1300) NO), as illustrated in FIG. 9-28, similarly to the process of step Si1293, it is determined whether the suspension of the first special symbol determination to be digested is the suspension corresponding to the ninja icon (step Si1306) ). In other words, it is determined whether or not the icon moved to the area i53 with the start of the current fluctuation effect is a ninja icon. Here, if it is determined that the first special symbol determination to be saved is not the hold corresponding to the ninja icon (step Si1306: NO), the process proceeds.

  By the way, when the ninja icon is moved to the area i 53 with the start of the current fluctuation effect, a suggestive effect of a failure pattern using the ninja icon during the current fluctuation effect (see FIG. 9-11), It is necessary to perform suggestive rendering of a first success pattern using a ninja icon (see FIG. 9-12) or suggestive rendering of a second success pattern using a ninja icon (see FIG. 9-13).

  Therefore, if the sub CPU i 131 determines that the suspension of the first special symbol determination to be digested is the suspension corresponding to the ninja icon (step Si 1306: YES), whether the reach effect is performed during the current fluctuation effect or not Is determined (step Si1307). Specifically, since the setting information of the variation production pattern is set in the sub RAMi 133 by performing the process, the reach production is performed during the current variation production based on the setting information of the variation production pattern being set. Determine if you will be

  If the sub CPU i 131 determines that reach effect is not performed during the current fluctuation effect (step Si1307: NO), sets a failure effect pattern in which the ninja icon falls without reaching the serious area i 57 and setting information thereof Are set in the sub RAM i 133 (step Si1308).

  On the other hand, when reach production is performed during the variation production this time, since the reliability for the jackpot is higher than when reach production is not performed, in addition to the suggested production of the first success pattern using the ninja icon It is also possible to provide a suggestive effect of a second success pattern using a ninja icon. Therefore, the sub CPU i 131 executes the following processing to determine which of the two types of success patterns to be suggested.

  That is, when the sub CPU i 131 determines that the reach effect is performed during the current fluctuation effect (step Si1307: YES), either of the suggested effect of the first success pattern and the suggested effect of the second success pattern using the ninja icon The success pattern selection lottery for determining whether to perform is executed (step Si1309). Specifically, since the success pattern selection random number used for the success pattern selection lottery is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” each time the above-described random number update processing is performed, the count at the time when the fluctuation start command is received Gets the value as a success pattern selection random number. Then, the acquired success pattern selection random number is either the random number value corresponding to the suggestion effect of the first success pattern stored in the sub ROM i 132 or the random value of either the random value corresponding to the suggestion effect of the second success pattern Based on whether they coincide with each other, it is selected whether to give a suggestion effect of the first success pattern or to give a suggestion effect of the second success pattern.

  Next, sub-CPU i 131 determines whether the success pattern of the suggestion effect performed using the ninja icon is the first success pattern or not based on the selection result of step Si 1309 (step Si 1310). Here, when it is determined that it is the first success pattern (step Si1310: YES), the first success pattern in which the ninja icon reaches the serious area i57 is set in the sub RAM i 133 as setting information of suggestion effect (step Si1311). And, in this embodiment, since it is decided to operate the serious actor i7 at the timing immediately after the ninja icon reaches the serious area i57, the operation timing of the serious actor i7 is set and the setting information is made to the sub RAMi 133 The setting is made (step Si1312).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU i 131 determines that the success pattern of the suggestion effect performed using the ninja icon is not the first success pattern (step Si 1310: NO), that is, when performing the suggestion effect of the second success pattern, the ninja icon The second success pattern returning to the area i 53 is set in the sub RAM i 133 as setting information of the suggestion effect (step Si 1313). Then, instead of the ninja icon returned to the area i53, the display period of the bath-pad icon and the button image to be displayed in the area i53 is set (step Si1314), and the effect button i26 is pressed (step Alternatively, the display color of the fireworks ball icon for changing the bath pad icon is set according to the arrival of the end of the display period of the button image, and the setting information thereof is set in the sub RAM i 133 (step Si1315).

[Operation and effect of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the hold corresponding to the whistle icon is digested, a suggestive effect on the pseudo continuous effect is performed, and when the hold corresponding to the ninja icon is digested, the suggestive effect on the reach effect Is done. For this reason, the player can grasp in advance the effects that may be performed according to the on-hold digestion. In addition, when there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, the suggested effect using the whistle icon is performed, and when the reach effect is likely to be performed, the suggested effect using the ninja icon is performed. That is, even if the suggested rendering is performed, the rendering corresponding to it (here, the pseudo continuous rendering and the reach rendering) may not be performed. Therefore, by performing the suggested effect, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the pseudo continuous effect and the reach effect are actually performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a suggested effect using an eyelid icon, an effect of a success pattern that suggests that a pseudo continuous effect is performed (refer to FIGS. 9-9), or that a pseudo continuous effect is not performed is suggested. An effect of a failure pattern (see FIG. 9-8) is performed. In addition, as a suggestion effect using a ninja icon, a production of a success pattern that suggests that reach production will be performed (see FIGS. 9-12), or a production of a failure pattern that suggests that reach production is not performed (FIG. 9) 11) is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the suggestion effects while expecting the suggestion effects of the success pattern to be performed. In addition, the indication effect of the success pattern using the whistle icon differs from the indication effect of the success pattern using the ninja icon (for example, the type of icon used for the effect, the moving direction of the icon, etc.) Therefore, the player can easily determine which effect is actually performed according to the suggested effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is performed using the icon moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a higher rendering effect than in the case of performing a suggested effect using another effect image, and the player can clearly recognize the correspondence between the icon and the suggested effect. .

[Modification]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be, for example, the following mode. That is, in the above embodiment, when the eyelid icon can not reach the continuous area i56, the case where the eyelid icon is erased from the liquid crystal screen and the white fireworks ball icon is displayed in the area i53 instead is described. In another embodiment, a pattern may be newly added to the area i 53 in which the 侍 icon returns to the area i 53 in the same manner as the ninja icon, and the 侍 icon may be changed back to the area i 53. That is, the success pattern and the failure pattern regarding the suggestion effect using the whistle icon do not necessarily have to be one type each, and two or more types of patterns may be provided respectively. This is the same for the suggestion effect using the ninja icon.

  In the above embodiment, when the ninja icon returns to the area i53, the ninja icon is displayed as the bath-laying ball icon on the area i53 and then changed to a colored fireworks ball icon. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the ninja icon may be directly changed to a colored fireworks ball icon. Also, instead of changing the ninja icon to a colored fireworks ball icon, the ninja icon may be changed to an icon of another character. That is, the icon change is not limited to the color change, but may be a change that changes to another icon.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case has been described in which the whistle icon or the ninja icon is moved to the area i53 and then the suggestion effect using these icons is performed. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the suggestion effect of moving the icon from the first hold icon display area i51 may be performed without providing the area i53.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the first indication effect, the eyelid icon is moved toward the continuous area i56, and as the second indication effect, the ninja icon is moved toward the serious area i57. Although the case of performing the above has been described, the effect modes of the first suggested effect and the second suggested effect are not limited to those illustrated in the present embodiment, and may be other effect modes.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case of performing the suggestive effect on the pseudo continuous effect using the eyelid icon moved to the area i53, and performing the suggestive effect on the reach effect using the ninja icon moved to the area i53 did. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect may be performed without using the icon moved to the area i53.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the case where the 1st suggestion production is the suggestion production about pseudo continuous production and the 2nd suggestion production is the suggestion production about reach production was explained, these suggestion productions, for example, step up notice production In addition, it may be a suggestive effect on another effect such as a serif announcement or the like. Further, in another embodiment, regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous rendition is performed, the suggestion rendition of the success pattern using the whistle icon is performed in order to suggest that the fireworks object i6 operates. It is also good. In addition, regardless of whether the reach effect is performed or not, the suggested effect of the first success pattern using the ninja icon may be executed in order to suggest that the serious object i7 is activated. That is, the effects suggested by the execution of the suggested effects of the success pattern may be effects other than the pseudo continuous effects and the reach effects.

  In addition, the content suggested to the player by the suggestion effect may be distinguished in more detail according to the type of the jackpot symbol based on the result of the preliminary determination as well as the hit and the drop. For example, if the jackpot is determined to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game by the predetermination, if the jackpot to transition to the middle probability state is determined, and if the jackpot to transition to the low probability state is determined. Then, the contents of the above-described suggestion effects may be different.

  Further, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine i1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing in the above-described flowchart, setting values, threshold values used for determination and the like are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders or values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screens and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be other modes. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform suggestion effects using screens of different display modes according to, for example, the gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state, and low probability state).

[Tenth embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described.
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a hold image indicating that the determination of whether or not the jackpot is held is displayed on the display screen provided in the gaming machine. As a result, the player can know the number of pending determinations of whether or not a jackpot at this time. However, the reserved images displayed on the gaming machine merely indicate the number of pending determinations of whether or not a jackpot. Then, when a variable effect is performed in which the special symbol is variably displayed in order to notify the judgment that has been held, it is indicated that the holding image that was displayed corresponding to the hold is performing the fluctuation effect. Although it is displayed on the display screen as a fluctuation right image shown, the effect is scarce in the fluctuation right image itself.
Therefore, the tenth embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an unprecedented effect by using the variable right image.

That is, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has acquisition means, special game determination means, special game execution means, symbol display control means, hold storage means, hold display control means, and variable right display control means. An acquisition means acquires acquisition information, if starting conditions are satisfied. The special game determination means determines, based on the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means, whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed. The special game execution means executes the special game when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is to be performed. When the determination by the special game determination means is performed, the symbol display control means causes the symbol display means to variably display the special symbol, and then causes the special game determination means to display the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special game determination means. The hold storage means can hold the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed by the symbol display control means, as hold information, and hold it up to a predetermined upper limit number. The hold display control means displays a hold image corresponding to each of the hold information stored by the hold storage means in the hold image display area of the effect display means. The change right display control means displays a change right image indicating that a change effect is being performed in a change right image display area of the effect display means. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol display means, the symbol display control means performs a definite display until a predetermined definite period of time elapses, and after the definite period of time elapses, the next special symbol variation or special game can be started . The variable right display control means allows the variable right image to be continuously displayed at a determined time after the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
Hereinafter, specific description will be made with reference to the drawings (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as FIG. 10) having drawing numbers including “FIG. 10-”. With regard to the tenth embodiment, reference may be made to the first embodiment (FIG. 1) and other embodiments.

  A first relevant image effect of which the hold icon is subjected to shift display processing and the hold is digested in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5. 10-4 is a liquid crystal display device j5 (corresponding to the image display portion a 114 in FIG. 1-1) for explaining an example of the first relevant image effect when the reach effect in the tenth embodiment is performed. It is a screen figure of. FIG. 10-5 is a screen view of the liquid crystal display device j5 for illustrating an example of the first relevant image effect when the jackpot effect is performed after the reach effect is performed. Here, the first relevant image effect is an effect which is performed by erasing the icon (the variable right image) at the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed or until it is stopped and displayed. In the following description, an example of deleting the icon when the special symbol is stopped and displayed is used as the first relevant image effect, but the icon may be deleted before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. .

  In FIG. 10-4 (A), the icon RIj1 indicating that variation display of the decorative symbol image is being performed and variation display is being displayed in the area, and the first special symbol determination of one time is suspended. The hold icon RIj2 indicating that the user is on is displayed in the hold icon display area. In this state, when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening j11 (corresponding to the first starting opening a121 in FIG. 1A), the prior determination processing is performed using various random numbers acquired according to the winning. . Then, the second hold icon RIj3 appears in the hold icon display area in the display mode according to the result of the prior determination process.

  Then, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj1 displayed in the area is “losing” and the variation pattern in which the reach effect is not performed is selected, for example, the left decorative symbol 5 symbols and 8 symbols temporarily stop as an image and a right decoration symbol image (refer to FIG. 10-4 (A)), and then, for example, 2 symbols temporarily stop as a middle decoration symbol image (refer to FIG. 10-4 (B) Finally, these three decorative symbol images are finally stopped, and a series of variation effects corresponding to the icon RIj1 displayed in the area is ended.

  The main stop state of the decorative symbol image described above is maintained until a predetermined determination time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. Next, when the above determination time has elapsed, variable display of the next decorative symbol image is started, and the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon RIj2 displayed in the hold icon display area before the hold icon RIj3 appears Is done. In the period from the main stop of the decorative symbol image to the next variable display of the decorative symbol image, the following display control processing is performed on the holding icon and the icon. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol image corresponding to the icon RIj1 is stopped, the icon RIj1 displayed in the area is deleted (see FIG. 10-4B). Then, in response to the start of the variation display of the next decorative symbol image, the hold icon RIj2 displayed in the hold icon display area becomes the icon RIj2 and is displayed shifted to the area, and the hold icon RIj2 is displayed. The hold icon RIj3 is shifted and displayed at the display position at which it was displayed before the shift (see FIG. 10-4C). When shift display processing of such a holding icon is performed, the game control board j100 described later (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1C) receives the winning opening winning combination corresponding to the icon shifted to the area. The first special symbol determination is executed based on various random numbers stored in the main RAM j 103 (see the RAM a 203 in FIG. 1). Then, while the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display j41 (corresponding to the first special symbol display a 221 in FIG. 1B) is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol image in the liquid crystal display j5 is started (See FIG. 10-4C).

  And when the change pattern which performs the reach effect on the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj2 is selected, for example, the 7 symbols are temporarily stopped as the left decoration symbol image and the right decoration symbol image and the reach is reached Is established (see FIG. 10-5A). In this manner, when reach is established, temporary stop is performed on the decorative symbol image in which the middle decorative symbol image indicates a hit according to the selected variation pattern (for example, three identical decorative symbol images are temporarily stopped on the effective line) Reach production to ask whether or not to be performed is executed. At this time, the icon RIj2 of the area and the suspension icon RIj3 of the suspension icon display area are continuously displayed from the start of the change relating to the reach effect.

  In FIG. 10-5 (A), as in FIG. 10-4 (D), the reach effect is performed in a state where the icon RIj2 is displayed in the area and the hold icon RIj3 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ing. In this reach establishment state, with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol image and the right decorative symbol image, when the middle decorative symbol image is completely stopped, it is notified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" (Refer to FIG. 10-5 (B)). As described above, it is notified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" by the final stop of these three decorative symbol images, and the icon RIj2 displayed in the area is notified. A corresponding series of variation effects will end. Then, in response to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol image, the icon RIj2 displayed in the area is erased (see FIG. 10-5 (B)).

  Then, when the decorative symbol image indicating that the jackpot has been displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), an effect or a game informing the type of the jackpot as an opening effect performed when starting the jackpot game Notification etc. which urges the driver to hit the right are performed (see FIG. 10-5 (C) and FIG. 10-5 (D)). In the jackpot effect performed through the opening effect, the hold icon (the hold icon RIj3 in the example of FIG. 10-5 (B)) displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 is all erased once.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, description will be given of a second image effect in which the hold icon is subjected to shift display processing and the hold is digested. 10-6 is a screen view of the liquid crystal display device j5 for illustrating an example of the second relevant image effect when the reach effect is performed. FIG. 10-7 is a screen view of the liquid crystal display device j5 for illustrating an example of the second relevant image effect when the jackpot effect is performed after the reach effect is performed. Here, in the second relevant image effect, unlike the first relevant image effect described above, the icon (variable right image) is continuously displayed in the determined time after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the determined time An effect is performed using the icon which is continuously displayed in the change of the next special symbol after the lapse or the special game after the decision time elapses. The pachinko gaming machine j1 (corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine a100 in FIG. 1A) in the present embodiment is configured to be able to select one of the first relevant image effect and the second relevant image effect based on predetermined conditions. There is.

  In FIG. 10-6 (A), similarly to FIG. 10-4 (A), the icon RIj1 indicating that the decorative symbol image is being changed and displayed is displayed in the corresponding area, and 1 A hold icon RIj2 indicating that the first special symbol determination of a round is held is displayed in the hold icon display area. In this state, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening j11, the prior determination process is performed using various random numbers acquired according to the winning. Then, the second hold icon RIj3 appears in the hold icon display area in the display mode according to the result of the prior determination process.

  Here, during the variable display of the symbols, various advance notice effects are performed for the purpose of informing the reliability of the jackpot and for giving the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In the pachinko gaming machine j1 of the present embodiment, the same-color chance eye effect is performed as an example of the advance effect.

  For example, in the predetermination process corresponding to the reserve icon RIj2 and the reserve icon RIj3 illustrated in FIG. 10-6 (A), a predetermination result that “big hit” is obtained in the first special symbol determination, or If there is a pre-judgment result such that a variation pattern with high possibility of high reliability reach effect will be selected, although it is "loss" in the first special symbol judgment In the symbol variation presentation corresponding to the icon RIj1, the same color chance eye presentation is performed. Here, the same-color chance eye effect is an effect on special symbol determination, and is an effect in which three decorative symbol images of the same color are actually stopped (or falsely stopped) on the effective line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display j5. is there. The same-color chance eye effect is intended to suggest that the reliability to win the jackpot is relatively high or to suggest transition to a special effect mode called a so-called zone in the symbol variation effects to be performed later. Done as.

  For example, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj1 displayed in the area is “losing”, but the information for performing the same-color chance eye effect is set, for example, the left decorative symbol 2 images of blue temporarily stop as an image, 4 symbols of the same blue stop temporarily as a right decoration symbol image, and 3 decoration symbol images of the same color are in a state before main stop on the effective line (figure 10-6 (A)). Then, the same blue 6 symbols temporarily stop as the middle decoration symbol image (see FIG. 10-6 (B)), and finally, the same blue three decoration symbol images are finally stopped and displayed in the corresponding area. A series of variation effects corresponding to the icon RIj1 are finished as the same-color chance effect effect.

  Here, in the second relevant image effect, the icon RIj1 displayed in the area is continuously displayed in the area even after the variation display of the decorative symbol image is stopped in the same-color chance eye effect, and the hold icon RIj2 is displayed. And RIj3 are continuously displayed at the same display position without performing the shift display processing (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). For example, with the temporary stop of the decorative symbol image, light is collected on the icon RIj1, and an effect is applied to the icon RIj1 that has the same color as the color of the same-color chance eye effect (in this embodiment, blue). Then, after the display of the icon RIj1 changes, the decorative symbol is displayed on a standstill.

  And if predetermined fixed time passes, the fluctuation display of the next special symbol is started. At this time, the icon RIj1 related to the previous variable display is continuously displayed in the area until the above-mentioned determined time and the next variable display are started. Then, when the next variable display is started, using the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5, the effect that the icon RIj1 in the past to which the effect of the same color chance is applied is launched from the area (the icon effect 1) Is done. Further, with the execution of the effect to be launched, shift display processing is performed on the holding icons RIj2 and RIj3 (see FIG. 10-6 (C)).

  The icon RIj1 launched in response to the start of the next symbol variation display is rendered as, for example, a fireworks ball, and as a fireworks (that is, blue fireworks) of the same color as the effect in the display screen of the liquid crystal display j5. Explode and disappear (the icon effect 2 concerned; see FIG. 10-6 (D)). Note that the icon effect 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 (C) and the icon effect 2 shown in FIG. Corresponds to one example.

  Then, when a variation pattern that makes a big hit after the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj2 has shifted to a special effect mode called a so-called zone, the effect mode is a special effect from the normal effect mode Transition to mode For example, in the example of FIG. 10-6 (E), in order to suggest transition to the special effect mode, for example, character display such as “sublimation zone” is performed and the background image changes to one corresponding to the special effect mode Do. Then, during the variable display of the decorative symbol image in the special effect mode, for example, various advance notice effects such as pseudo continuous notice effects and highly reliable reach effects such as SPSP reach effects are performed, and the change of the decorative symbol image is performed. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of display is "big hit", the decorative symbol image is stopped and displayed in a manner to notify of that (see FIG. 10-6 (F)).

  As described above, in the second relevant image effect, after the variation of the special symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj1 stops (for example, the determined time for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol image indicating the special symbol determination) And until the next display of the decorative symbol image is variably displayed), the icon RIj1 is continuously displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5. Then, an effect using the icon RIj1 in the past is performed in the effect performed when changing the next special symbol. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine j1, it is possible to perform an unprecedented effect using the icon (the variable right image), and by performing an effect in which the icon remains even after the symbol fluctuation effect, the player wins the jackpot It can also be expected.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first special symbol determination performed immediately before is obtained when the prior determination result having a high reliability of winning a jackpot is obtained in the first special symbol determination to be performed next. An example is used in which the icon is displayed until the effect related to the next first special symbol determination is started. However, when the prior determination result with high reliability to win the big hit is obtained in the first special symbol determination performed after the next, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the first special symbol determination is performed next to the first special symbol determination You may leave it until you start the effects related to. For example, in the case where the prior determination result corresponding to the hold icon RIj3 has a high degree of reliability to win a big hit, when the symbol variation effect corresponding to the hold icon RIj2 is performed, FIG. 10-6 (C) and FIG. An effect is performed using the icon RIj1 similar to 6 (D). Next, in the symbol change performed in a state where the icon RIj2 that was the reserved icon RIj2 has moved to the area, an effect of performing a main stop with a decorative symbol that is not even reach is performed. Then, in the symbol change performed in a state where the icon RIj3 that was the reserved icon RIj3 has moved to the area, an effect with high reliability of winning in a big hit is performed by shifting to the special effect mode.

  Next, an example of the second relevant image effect when the jackpot effect is performed after the reach effect is performed will be described. In FIG. 10-7 (A), as in FIG. 10-5 (A), the reach effect is performed with the icon RIj2 being displayed in the area and the hold icon RIj3 being displayed in the hold icon display area. ing. In this reach establishment state, for example, with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol image and the right decorative symbol image, when the middle decorative symbol image is stopped, it is informed that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" (See Figure 10-7 (B)). Also in the second relevant image effect, it is informed that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" by the final stop of these three decorative symbol images, and is displayed in the relevant area A series of change effects corresponding to the icon RIj2 ends.

  The main stop state of the decorative symbol image described above is maintained until a predetermined determination time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. Then, when the above-mentioned determined time has passed, the jackpot effect is started. At this time, the icon RIj2 related to the symbol variation display immediately before is continuously displayed in the area during the above-mentioned determined time and during the jackpot effect (for example, during the opening effect) (see FIG. 10-7 (B)). Then, when the jackpot effect is started, an effect (the icon effect 3) in which the icon RIj2 in the past is launched from the area is performed using the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 (FIG. 10-7 (C)) reference).

  For example, in the second relevant image effect, when the opening effect of the big hit is started in the liquid crystal display device j5, the variation display of the previous special symbol (that is, winning of the big hit is performed using the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5) The effect is presented that the icon RIj2 corresponding to the symbol variation display) is launched as a fireworks ball. Then, the icon RIj2 launched during the opening effect bursts out as a fireworks in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 and disappears (see the icon effect 4; see FIG. 10-7 (D)). After that, a right strike notification or the like for prompting the player to hit the right is performed (see FIG. 10-7 (E)). In the jackpot effect including the opening effect, the hold icon (the hold icon RIj3 in the example of FIG. 10-7 (C)) displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 You may erase | eliminate all temporarily, etc. after fireworks production. Also, the icon effect 3 shown in FIG. 10-7 (C) and the icon effect 4 shown in FIG. 10-7 (D) correspond to an example of the second image effect to be performed in the special game after the determined time has elapsed. Do.

  As described above, in the second relevant image effect, the icon RIj2 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 and displayed even after the variation of the special symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj2 is stopped. . Then, in the jackpot effect to be performed thereafter, an effect using the icon RIj2 displayed while being left on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 is performed. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine j1, it is possible to perform an unprecedented effect using the icon (the variable right image), and by performing the jackpot effect in which the icon remains even after the symbol fluctuation effect, It is also possible to perform an effect of improving the degree of excitement.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example is used in which effects are displayed using the icon RIj2 displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 until the opening effect is performed. An effect using the icon RIj2 may be performed. For example, in the so-called promotion effect that suggests during the jackpot effect that the transition to the probability change gaming state (high probability gaming state or medium probability gaming state) or the like after the jackpot round number increase or the jackpot game during the jackpot round effect A second relevant image presentation using RIj2 may be performed. As an example, although the number of big hit rounds has been reported as 4 rounds, the second relevant image effect is used for the promotion effect of switching to the notification of 16 rounds when the icon RIj2 bursts as fireworks. Good. As another example, a symbol which is displayed as a big hit with a normal symbol (for example, a display to shift to a normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) after a big hit game) is triggered by the icon RIj2 bursting into fireworks. The second relevant image effect may be used for promotion effect to notify transition to a probability variation gaming state (high probability gaming state or medium probability gaming state) after a jackpot game.

  Also, in the second relevant image effect described using FIG. 10-6 and FIG. 10-7, the second special symbol determination has been described for the icon that was the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination. The same effect may be performed using the icon that was a hold icon indicating that is being held.

[Configuration Example of Sub RAM j 133]
10-19 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub RAM j 133 (corresponding to the RAM a 303 in FIG. 1) of the effect control board j 130 (corresponding to the effect control unit a 300 in FIG. 1-3). The figure corresponds to FIGS. 1-28 in the first embodiment.
As exemplified in FIG. 10-19 (A), the sub RAM j 133 includes a first pending storage area j1331, a second pending storage area j1332, a third pending storage area j1333, a fourth pending storage area j1334, and a first pending A storage area j 1335, a second reserve storage area j 1336, a third reserve storage area j 1337, a fourth reserve storage area j 1 338, a pending digest storage area j 1339, and a maintenance display flag storage area j 1340 are provided.

  The pending storage areas j1331 to j1338 are information included in the pending command received from the game control board j100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1C), and other information regarding pending prefetching effects generated based on this information. The storage area is a storage area for storing the information of from the reception of the hold command to the start of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold command. Prior determination information and the like relating to the first special symbol determination are stored in the pending storage area j1331 to j1334, and prior determination information and the like relating to the second special symbol determination are stored in the pending storage area j1335 to j1338.

  The pending digesting storage area j1339 is a variety of information stored in the first pending storage area j1331 or the first pending storage area j1335 from the start of the variable display of the symbols corresponding to these pieces of information until the end It is an area stored between.

  The suspension storage areas j1331 to j1338 each include an area for storing prior determination information, an area for storing display mode information, an area for storing maintenance display effect type information, and the like.

  The prior determination information is information included in the hold command received from the game control board j100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 of FIGS. 1-3).

  The display mode information is information indicating a display mode when the hold icon or the icon is displayed.

  The maintenance display effect type information is whether or not to perform the second relevant image effect (hereinafter referred to as maintenance display effect) which performs the effect using the icon even after the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the icon is stopped. Or, it is information indicating what type of effect is to be performed when the maintenance display effect is performed.

  Of the three pieces of information described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 (B), the prior determination information is a first suspension each time a suspension command indicating that the first special symbol determination is suspended is received from the game control board j100. Each time a hold command is stored from the game control board j100 which is stored in the first hold storage area j1331 to the fourth hold storage area j1334 sequentially from the storage area j1331 and indicates that the second special symbol determination has been held. The first reserved storage area j 1335 is sequentially stored in any one of the first reserved storage area j 1335 to the fourth reserved storage area j 1 338.

  For example, when a hold command indicating that the first special symbol determination is held with no information stored in any of the first hold storage area j1331 to the fourth hold storage area j1334 is received as the hold command, The prior determination information included is stored in the first storage area j1331. Also, for example, when a hold command indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is received while various information is stored in each of the first hold storage area j1331 and the second hold storage area j1332, the hold command is The prior determination information contained is stored in the third storage area j1333.

  In addition, when information is stored in any of the first reserved storage area j1331 to the fourth reserved storage area j1334 and the variation start command according to the first special symbol determination is received from the game control board j100, the first reserved storage area The information stored in j1331 is shifted to the pending digest storage area j1339, and the information stored in the pending storage area after the second pending storage area j1332 is shifted to the first pending storage area j1331 side. For example, when information stored in the first pending storage area j1331 to the third pending storage area j1333 and information stored in the first pending storage area j1331 is shifted to the pending digest storage area j1339, The information stored in the second pending storage area j1332 is shifted to the first pending storage area j1331, and the information stored in the third pending storage area j1333 is shifted to the second pending storage area j1332.

  In addition, when information is stored in any of the first reserved storage area j1335 to the fourth reserved storage area j1338 and a change start command relating to the second special symbol determination is received from the game control board j100, the storage area being reserved Similar shift processing is performed on j1339, the first reserved storage area j1335 to the fourth reserved storage area j1338.

  The maintenance display flag storage area j 1340 is an area for storing information indicating the state of the maintenance display flag. For example, the maintenance display flag is set to ON when the fluctuation production for performing the maintenance display production is started, and when the fluctuation production to be performed next to the fluctuation production for performing the maintenance display production is started or the maintenance display production is performed Is set to be off when the opening effect to be performed after the change effect is performed.

[Command reception processing by effect control board j130]
10-21 to 10-23 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the command reception process. In FIG. 10-21, the sub CPU j 131 (corresponding to the CPU a 301 in FIG. 1) determines whether or not the hold command transmitted from the game control board j 100 has been received (step j 101). Then, if the sub CPU j 131 receives the hold command, the process proceeds to step j102. On the other hand, if the CPU j 131 has not received the hold command, the process proceeds to step j 121 (see FIG. 10-22).

  In step j102, the sub CPU j 131 adds "1" to the number of pending special symbol determinations stored in the sub RAM j 133 (corresponding to the RAM a 303 in FIG. 1-3) to update, and advances the processing to the next step. For example, the sub CPU j 131 determines the hold command according to the first special symbol determination and the hold command according to the second special symbol determination based on the information instructed for the received hold command, and based on the determination result , The number of reservations pertaining to the first special symbol determination or the number of reservations pertaining to the second special symbol determination is updated.

  Next, sub CPU j 131 stores the prior determination information included in the received hold command in a predetermined area of sub RAM j 133 (step j 103), and proceeds to the next step. For example, when the sub CPU j 131 acquires prior determination information indicating that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, the suspension storage in which no information is stored among the first suspension storage area j1331 to the fourth suspension storage area j1334. The prior determination information is stored in the pending storage area which is the area and is the side closest to the first pending storage area j1331. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j 131 acquires prior determination information indicating that the second special symbol determination is suspended, of the first suspended storage area j1335 to the fourth suspended storage area j1338, the suspended storage in which no information is stored. The prior determination information is stored in the pending storage area which is the area and is the side closest to the first pending storage area j 1335.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 acquires the pre-reading effect execution random number and stores it in the sub RAM j 133 (step j 104), and advances the processing to the next step. For example, the preread effect execution random number is updated by adding “1” each time the above-described random number update process is performed, and the sub CPU j 131 prereads the value updated when the hold command is received. Acquire as an execution random number.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect lottery for determining whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed (step j 106). Then, when the sub CPU j 131 executes the pre-reading effect lottery, the sub CPU j 131 advances the process to step j107. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j 131 does not execute the pre-reading effect lottery, the sub CPU j 131 advances the process to step j110. For example, based on the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM j 133 by the process of step j 103, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not to suspend the special symbol determination corresponding to the pending command including the prior determination information. Determine if As an example, the sub-CPU j 131 determines that the lottery is to be performed if the prior determination information includes information indicating a jackpot variation pattern or a reach variation pattern, and the prior determination information does not include the information. It is determined that it is not a lottery target.

  In step j107, the sub CPU j 131 executes a prefetch effect lottery, and determines whether to perform a prefetch effect based on the lottery result. Then, if the sub CPU j 131 executes the pre-reading effect, the process proceeds to step j 108. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j 131 does not execute the pre-reading effect, the process proceeds to step j110. For example, the sub CPU j 131 matches any of the pre-reading effect execution random numbers acquired in the process of step j 104 with the winning value of the pre-reading effect execution random numbers stored in the sub ROM j 132 (corresponding to the ROM a 302 in FIG. Whether or not to execute pre-reading effect is drawn based on whether or not it is.

  In step j108, the sub CPU j 131 determines the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape) of the hold icon corresponding to the hold command received this time, and displays the display mode information of the hold storage area stored in step j103. Stores information indicating an aspect. Then, the sub CPU j 131 sets a special icon display command instructing the display of the hold icon according to the display mode to the sub RAM j 133 (step j 109), and the process proceeds to step j 111. The special icon display command set in the sub RAM j 133 is transmitted to the image / sound control board j 140 (corresponding to the image / sound control unit a 310 in FIG. 1) by transmission processing. Then, when receiving the special icon display command, the CPU of the image / sound control board j 140 changes the color, pattern, shape, etc. of the display icon indicated by the command (for example, the normal display mode). The liquid crystal display device j5 newly displays the held icon).

  On the other hand, at step j110, the sub CPU j 131 stores information indicating a normal display mode in the display mode information of the pending storage area stored at the above step j 103, sets a normal icon display command to the sub RAM j 133, and proceeds to step j111. Proceed with the process. The normal icon display command set in the sub RAM j 133 is transmitted to the image sound control board j 140 by transmission processing. Then, when receiving the normal hold display command, the CPU of the image and sound control board j 140 newly causes the liquid crystal display device j 5 to newly display the hold display image in the normal display mode.

  In step j111, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not a combination of the hold corresponding to the hold command targeted in the current process and the hold that is digested immediately before the hold is an object of the maintenance display effect. Then, if the group is the target of the maintenance display effect, the sub CPU j 131 advances the process to step j112. On the other hand, if the group is not the target of the maintenance display effect, the sub CPU j 131 proceeds to step j 121 (see FIG. 10-22). For example, the sub CPU j 131 indicates that the prior determination information corresponding to the pending command targeted in the current process indicates “big hit” in the special symbol determination, or high reliability in the special symbol determination as “losing” It indicates that a fluctuation pattern having a high possibility of achieving a reach effect of a degree is selected, and the first condition is that the target is to be notified in advance in the symbol fluctuation effect performed first. In addition, the sub CPU j 131 is a fluctuation pattern usable immediately before the holding corresponding to the holding command targeted in the current processing is a fluctuation pattern usable for the maintenance display effect (a fluctuation pattern deviated without performing the reach effect, for example, The second condition is to be digested with a fluctuation pattern indicating short fluctuation that can be used for producing the same color chance eye. Then, the sub-CPU j 131 determines that the object is the maintenance display effect when all of these conditions are satisfied. As an example, when the sub CPU j 131 stores the prior determination information indicating that the first special symbol determination is suspended at step j 103, the sub CPU j 131 stores it in the first suspended storage area j1331 to the third suspended storage area j1333 before the storage. Short variation that can be used to produce the same color chance as the newest pre-judgment information (that is, the pre-judgment information corresponding to the pending that is digested immediately before the pending in the current process) It is determined that the second condition is satisfied if the variation pattern indicating the condition is included.

  In step j112, the sub CPU j 131 executes a lottery regarding the maintenance display effect, and determines whether or not to execute the maintenance display effect based on the lottery result. Then, if the sub CPU j 131 executes the maintenance display effect, the process proceeds to step j113. On the other hand, if the sub CPU j 131 does not execute the maintenance display effect, the process proceeds to step j 121 (see FIG. 10-22). For example, the sub CPU j 131 performs the maintenance display based on whether the pre-reading effect execution random number acquired in the process of the step j 104 matches any of the winning values of the maintenance display effect execution random numbers stored in the sub ROM j 132 Draw a lottery whether or not to execute the effect.

  In step j113, the sub CPU j 131 sets information indicating that the maintenance display effect is to be performed with respect to the hold immediately before the hold corresponding to the hold command targeted in the current process, and the step j121 (FIG. 10). Proceed to step 22). For example, the sub CPU j 131 indicates that maintenance display effect is to be performed in the maintenance display effect type information of the suspension storage areas j1331 to j1333 in which the prior determination information determined to satisfy the second condition is stored in step j111. Information (for example, information indicating performing same-color chance eye effect presentation) is set.

  Proceeding to FIG. 10-22, in step j121, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not a change effect associated with the change display of the special symbol is being performed. For example, sub CPU j 131 specifies the variation time of the special symbol based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from game control board j 100, and receives the variation start command Based on whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed since, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being executed. And sub CPUj131 advances processing to step j122, when it is not in the midst of the fluctuation production with the fluctuation indication of the special design. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j 131 is in the change effect production due to the change display of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Step j 135.

  At step j122, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not a change start command has been received from the game control board j100. Then, if the sub CPU j 131 receives the change start command, the sub CPU j 131 proceeds to step j123. On the other hand, if the sub CPU j 131 has not received the change start command, the process proceeds to step j 151 (see FIG. 10-23).

  In step j123, the sub CPU j 131 acquires the value at the time of receiving the change start command from the game control board j 100 for the effect random number appropriately updated by the random number update processing, stores it in the sub RAM j 133 and processes in the next step Advance. Then, the sub CPU j 131 analyzes the received change start command (step j 124), and proceeds to the next step. As described above, in the change start command, the setting information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, the setting information of this symbol relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination It contains information on whether or not there is winning start port information, special symbol variation pattern setting information, and the gaming state (high probability gaming state, medium probability gaming state or low probability gaming state) of the pachinko gaming machine j1 etc. . Therefore, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified by analyzing the change start command. That is, it is possible to specify what the type of jackpot is, if it is a jackpot or a loss, or if it is a jackpot. Also, by specifying whether the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern for losing based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to judge which of the reach presence production and the reach no effect needs to be performed . Also, based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be specified. Further, based on the information indicating the gaming state, it is possible to specify the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine j1.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 executes the variation effect pattern selection process based on the analysis result of the variation start command (step j125), and advances the process to the next step. The variation effect pattern selection process performed in step j125 will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 sets, in the sub RAM j 133, a variation production start command instructing the start of the variation production of the variation production pattern selected in the process of step j 125 (step j 126), and advances the process to the next step. The variation presentation start command is transmitted to the image sound control board j 140 and / or the lamp control board j 150 by transmission processing. As a result, the fluctuation effect of the effect pattern determined in the effect control board j130 is realized by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150 (corresponding to the lamp control unit a320 in FIG. 1-3). In addition, the fluctuation production according to the process of the above-mentioned step j126 shows the determination result of the special symbol determination after the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display j41 (or the second special symbol display j42) It is performed until the determination symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 subtracts “1” from the number of pending special symbol determinations stored in the sub RAM j 133, updates the number of pending using the value after subtraction (step j 127), and proceeds to the next step Proceed with the process. For example, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether the change start command determined to be received in the process of step j 122 relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination, and the first special symbol When it is determined that it is related to the symbol determination, the number of pendings of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”, and when it is determined that it is related to the second special symbol determination, the second The number of pending special symbol determinations is updated by subtracting one.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 executes shift processing for the pending storage area (step j 128), and proceeds to the next step. For example, when the variation effect relating to the first special symbol determination is started, the sub CPU j 131 shifts the information stored in the first storage area j1331 to the storage area j1339 in the storage pending storage area, and the second storage storage The information stored in the area j1332 to the fourth reserve storage area j1334 is shifted to the first reserve storage area j1331 side. On the other hand, when the variation effect relating to the second special symbol determination is started, the sub CPU j 131 shifts the information stored in the first storage area j1335 to the storage area j1339 for storage on hold, and stores the second storage memory The information stored in the area j1336 to the fourth storage area j1338 is shifted to the first storage area j1335 side.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 sets, in the sub RAM j 133, a pending image shift command instructing to shift and display the display position of each pending icon in the pending icon display area (step j 129). Proceed to step. The hold image shift command is transmitted to the image sound control board j 140 by transmission processing. As a result, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is displayed shifted to the corresponding area side, and the hold icon displayed most on the area side in the hold icon display area is the icon As a result, the shift display process of shifting to the area concerned and being displayed is realized by the image sound control board j140.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether to start the maintenance display effect (step j130). Then, when starting the maintenance display effect, the sub CPU j 131 advances the process to step j 131. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j 131 does not start the maintenance display effect, the process proceeds to step j 132. For example, the sub CPU j 131 refers to the maintenance display effect type information in the storage area in reserve 1313 and determines that the maintenance display effect is to be started when the information indicating that the maintenance display effect is to be performed is set.

  At step j131, the sub CPU j131 updates the sustain display flag set in the sustain display flag storage area j1340 to "ON", and proceeds to step j151 (see FIG. 10-23). Therefore, when the maintenance display effect is performed in the fluctuation effect starting according to the received fluctuation start command, the maintenance display flag is set to “ON” at the time of the start of the fluctuation.

  On the other hand, at step j132, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not the sustain display flag set in the sustain display flag storage area j 1340 is "ON". Then, if the maintenance display flag is “ON”, the sub CPU j 131 proceeds to step j133. On the other hand, if the maintenance display flag is “OFF”, the sub CPU j 131 proceeds to step j 151 (see FIG. 10-23).

  At step j133, the sub CPU j 131 updates the sustain display flag set in the sustain display flag storage area j 1340 to "OFF", and proceeds to step j 151 (see FIG. 10-23). Therefore, when the fluctuation presentation in which the maintenance display production is performed is ended and the next fluctuation production is started, the maintenance display flag is returned to “OFF” at the start of the fluctuation.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU j 131 determines in step j 121 that a variation effect due to the variation display of the special symbol is being performed, it determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received from the game control board j 100 (step j 135). Then, if the sub CPU j 131 receives the symbol determination command, the process proceeds to step j 136. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j 131 has not received the symbol determination command, the sub CPU j 131 ends the command reception process.

  In step j136, the sub CPU j 131 sets a variation effect end command for instructing the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol to the sub RAM j 133, and proceeds the processing to the next step. The above-mentioned change production end command is transmitted to the image sound control board j 140 and / or the lamp control board j 150 by transmission processing. As a result, the fluctuation effect started according to the process of step j126 is ended.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether the sustain display flag set in the sustain display flag storage area j 1340 is “ON” (step j 137). Then, if the sustain display effect flag is “OFF”, the sub CPU j 131 proceeds the processing to Step j 138. On the other hand, when the maintenance display effect flag is "ON", the sub CPU j 131 ends the command reception process.

  In step j138, the sub CPU j 131 sets the icon deletion command instructing deletion of the icon displayed in the area in the sub RAM j 133, and ends the command reception processing. The icon deletion command is transmitted to the image and sound control board j 140 by the transmission process. As a result, the process of erasing the icon displayed in the area is realized by the image sound control board j140.

  Note that, as apparent from the processing of the above steps j135 to j138, in response to the fluctuation display of the special symbol being stopped, the processing of erasing the icon displayed in the area is performed (FIG. 10) -4 (B) and FIGS. 10-5 (B)). However, when the maintenance display flag is set to “ON”, that is, when the variation display of the special symbol on which the maintenance display effect is performed is stopped, the process of erasing the target icon is not performed (FIG. B) and FIGS. 10-7 (B)). As described above, when the maintenance display effect is performed using the icon displayed in the area in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the area remains in the area even after the change display of the special symbol is stopped. It is displayed by leaving the icon.

  10-23. In step j151, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not an opening command relating to a big hit game has been received from the game control board j 100. Then, if the sub CPU j 131 receives the opening command, the process proceeds to step j 152. On the other hand, if the CPU j 131 has not received the opening command, the process proceeds to step j 160.

  In step j152, the sub CPU j 131 sets an opening effect start command in the sub RAM j 133, and the process proceeds to the next step. Here, the opening effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board j 140 and / or the lamp control board j 150 by the transmission process of the step j 15. As a result, a predetermined opening effect for notifying of the type and the like of the jackpot is started by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150. When the sub CPU j 131 sets the maintenance display effect flag to "ON", that is, when the effect using the icon (target icon) in the past is performed in the opening effect performed in response to the opening command to be set, Select an opening presentation in which a presentation using the icon is performed from among a group of previously set opening presentations, and include an instruction to perform the selected presentation in the opening presentation start command to select the image sound control board j 140 and / or Or transmit to the lamp control board j150. As a result, an opening effect (see FIGS. 10-7C and 10-7D) in which an effect using the icon is performed is started by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 updates the sustain display flag set in the sustain display flag storage area j 1340 to “OFF” (step j 153), and advances the process to step j 160.

  At step j160, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not a round start command has been received from the game control board j 100. Then, if the sub CPU j 131 receives a round start command, the process proceeds to step j 161. On the other hand, if the sub CPU j 131 has not received the round start command, the process proceeds to step j 162.

  In step j161, the sub CPU j 131 sets an effect start command during round to the sub RAM j 133, and the process proceeds to step j 162. Here, the in-round presentation start command is transmitted to the image sound control board j 140 and / or the lamp control board j 150 by transmission processing. Thus, a predetermined round effect is started to notify the current round game round number by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150.

  At step j162, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not the ending command has been received from the game control board j 100. Then, if the sub CPU j 131 receives the ending command, the process proceeds to step j 163. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j 131 has not received the ending command, the sub CPU j 131 ends the command reception processing.

  In step j163, the sub CPU j 131 sets an ending effect start command in the sub RAM j 133, and ends the command reception process. Here, the ending effect start command is transmitted to the image / sound control board j 140 and / or the lamp control board j 150 by transmission processing. Thereby, a predetermined ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit game is performed by the image sound control board j 140 and the lamp control board j 150.

[Variation effect pattern setting (selection) processing by effect control board j130]
FIG. 10-24 is a detailed flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation effect pattern setting (selection) process in step j125 of FIG. 10-22. In FIG. 10-24, does sub CPU j 131 perform reach presence effect along with the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command received from game control board j 100 It is determined whether or not it is (step j1051). Then, if the sub CPU j 131 does not perform the reach presence effect, the process proceeds to step j 1052. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j 131 performs the effect with reach, the process proceeds to step j 1054.

  In step j 1052, the sub CPU j 131 sets a variation effect pattern of no reach effect from the start to the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and proceeds to step j 1053.

  Here, the sub ROM j 132 stores a no reach reach no effect table with respect to the change effect without the reach effect. For example, for the 3 seconds, 8 seconds, 18 seconds, and 36 seconds, there are a plurality of effect tables corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the game control board j 100 in the no reach reach presence table. It is provided. At step j 1052, the sub CPU j 131 selects one effect table from among the plurality of effect tables based on the setting information included in the change start command. For example, when the setting information of the variation pattern indicating that the variation time of the special symbol is 3 seconds is included in the setting information, an effect table for 3 seconds is selected.

  In each effect table, effect random numbers and effect patterns are associated. The sub CPU j 131 selects one effect pattern from among the many effect patterns stored in the selected effect table by reading out the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step j123 described above. Thereby, the fluctuation production pattern of the fluctuation production which does not include reach production is set.

  In the present embodiment, an effect table for the maintenance display effect (for example, the same-color chance eye effect), which is one of the advance effects, is included in the plurality of effect tables. When the sub CPU j 131 performs the maintenance display effect using the icon for which the variation effect pattern is to be set, that is, the pending storage area corresponding to the icon (typically, the first special symbol determination is digested In the case where the information for performing the maintenance display effect is set in the maintenance display effect identification information stored in the first storage area j1331 and the first storage area j1335) when the second special symbol determination is to be carried out , Select the effect table for the above-mentioned maintenance display effect. Then, the sub CPU j 131 reads out the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of the step j 123 from among the many effect patterns stored in the effect table for the maintenance display effect, to thereby obtain one effect pattern. Choose In this way, when performing maintenance display effects for announcing the reliability in the next symbol variation by the same color chance eye effect, the color and type of the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed, and the icon displayed for remaining in the area even after the stop display The color or the like of the effect image attached to the target icon) is determined.

  In step j1053, the sub CPU j 131 stops the display of the determination symbol in the first special symbol display j41 or the second special symbol display j42 based on the setting information of the determination symbol included in the change start command. At the same time, a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device j5 is set, the variation effect pattern setting process is ended, and the process proceeds to step j126. When the sub CPU j 131 selects a variation effect pattern for performing the same-color chance eye effect in the step j 1052, the decorative symbol to be displayed is stopped according to the color or type of the decorative symbol indicated by the selected variation effect pattern. Set

  On the other hand, in step j1054, the sub CPU j 131 sets a variation effect pattern up to reach establishment using the effect table for reach effect or jackpot as in the process of step j1052 above, and advances the process to the next step . Whether or not to perform the effect of artificially stopping the decorative symbol before reaching the reach by performing the process of step j1054 above, the type of three decorative symbols that are artificially stopped on the effective line in the case of pseudo stop, reach Whether or not to shift to the special effect mode before establishment, the type of mode (zone) to be shifted, etc. are determined when shifting to the special effect mode.

  When the sub CPU j 131 receives the change start command while the maintenance indication effect flag is set to "ON", the sub CPU j 131 uses the effect table for maintenance indication effect among the effect tables for reach effect, and reaches Set up a fluctuation effect pattern until establishment. Here, the effect table for the above-mentioned maintenance display effect displays the icon (target icon) in the area until the next symbol variation is started even after symbol variation stop, and the next symbol variation is started. In accordance with the above, a large number of effect patterns are set to perform effects until reach establishment using the icons maintained and displayed in the area. Then, the sub CPU j 131 selects one effect pattern from among the effect patterns by reading out the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step j123. As a result, the type of effect to be performed using the corresponding icon displayed and remaining in the area even after the previous symbol variation effect (same color chance effect effect) is finished (FIG. 10-6 (C) and FIG. 10-6 (D)) etc. are determined.

  Next, based on various setting information and the like included in the change start command received from the game control board j100, the sub-CPU j 131 sets the reach symbol to be pseudo-stopped on the left line and the right line on the activated line when reach is established. (Step j1055), the process proceeds to the next step. The reach symbol may be randomly determined by performing a lottery process using effect random numbers regardless of the setting information.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 sets a variation effect pattern after the reach is established (step j 1056), and proceeds to the next step. For example, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether to perform long reach rendering or SP reach rendering based on various setting information included in the change start command, and when performing long reach rendering, SP reach rendering at the end of the long reach rendering Set whether to develop into

  If the setting information included in the change start command indicates that the jackpot will be won, the sub CPU j 131 executes a lottery relating to the maintenance display effect, and based on the lottery result, the icon until the jackpot game is executed. It is determined whether or not to execute the maintenance display effect to display. For example, the sub CPU j 131 continues up to the jackpot game based on whether or not the effect random number acquired in the process of step j 123 matches any of the winning values of the maintenance display effect execution random numbers stored in the sub ROM j 132 A lottery is made as to whether or not to execute the maintenance display effect to display the icon. Then, when executing the maintenance display effect, the sub-CPU j 131 sets a variation effect pattern up to the jackpot winning using the presentation table for the maintenance display effect among the presentation tables for the big hit. Here, the effect table for the above-mentioned maintenance display effect is continuously displayed in the area even after symbol fluctuation stop indicating that the jackpot has been won during the jackpot effect (for example, during the opening effect) A large number of effect patterns in which effects using the icon (target icon) are performed are set. Then, the sub CPU j 131 selects one effect pattern from among the effect patterns by reading out the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step j123. As a result, the icon (target icon) is continuously displayed in the area even after symbol fluctuation stop indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed (maintenance display effect (see FIG. 10-7 (B))). Is determined to be performed.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not the maintenance display effect for displaying the icon is performed until the opening effect of the jackpot performed immediately after the change effect set at the current time. Then, if the maintenance display effect is performed in the opening effect, the sub CPU j 131 advances the process to step j1060. On the other hand, if the opening effect is not performed immediately after the fluctuation effect currently set, or if the maintenance display effect is not performed in the opening effect, the sub CPU j 131 advances the process to step j1053.

  At step j 1060, the sub CPU j 131 updates the sustain display flag set in the sustain display flag storage area j 1340 to “ON”, and advances the process to step j 1053.

[Operation and effect of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the icon (the variable right image) related to the special game determination is displayed on the display screen even after the variation of the special symbol indicating the result of the special game determination is stopped. , It becomes possible to perform an unprecedented effect using the icon.

  As an example, when the big hit game is played as a special game after the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the icon related to the variation of the special symbol is not only decided during the fixed time when the decorative symbol image is stopped, but also the big hit It can be used for effects related to a game, and it is possible to perform effects using the icon in a jackpot effect (for example, an opening effect to be performed when starting a jackpot game).

  As another example, when the change of the next special symbol is started after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol image in the special symbol change concerning the icon concerned is the icon related to the change of the special symbol immediately before. This icon can be used not only for the fixed stop time, but also for the effect related to the next special symbol change, and the icon used for the symbol change effect (for example, advance notice effect) immediately before in the symbol change effect It is possible to use it to perform new effects.

[Modification]
In the above embodiment, various modifications have already been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be in the following form. That is, in the above embodiment, as an example of the maintenance display effect, when the icon related to the change of the special symbol is used for the next symbol change effect (see FIG. 10-6) and the icon related to the change of the special symbol Both the case where it is used for the jackpot effect performed in (see FIG. 10-7) is performed, but only one of them may be performed.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned maintenance display effect, when the variation of the next special symbol is started after the decoration symbol image is decidedly displayed, or when the big hit game is started after the decoration symbol image is decidedly displayed, the decision display The icon may be moved from the area or deleted from the display screen of the liquid crystal display j5, or the icon may be deleted from the display screen of the liquid crystal display j5 immediately after the finalized display is completed. . Even in such a case, it is possible to perform an effect using the icon that was displayed before the finalized display while the decorative symbol image is displayed in the finalized state, and using the icon It will be possible to make a new presentation.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as an example in which the maintenance display effect is performed during the big hit game, an example in which the effect using the icon is performed during the opening effect notifying the start of the big hit is used. An icon may be displayed and effects using the icon may be performed. For example, in the so-called promotion effect that suggests during a big hit the effect of giving a right-handed notification, an increase in the number of big hit rounds, or a transition to a probability variation gaming state (high probability gaming state or medium probability gaming state), the icon is used It does not matter if the effect was performed. As an example, as the maintenance display effect performed during the promotion effect, an effect that promotion is determined when the icon bursts into a firework in the display screen can be considered.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the maintenance display effect using the icon related to the change of the previous special symbol in the next symbol change effect, the icon changes the symbol change effect immediately after the change of the special symbol stops. Although the example used is used, the icon may be displayed and presentation using the icon may be performed until another point in time. For example, when a notice effect is performed to notify the reliability of a special symbol lottery (for example, the second or third special symbol lottery) performed after the next special symbol lottery, the symbol variation effect in the notice effect is performed. The icon (target icon) displayed in the area is displayed in the hold icon display area or a display area other than the area until the change of the special symbol for which the reliability is notified is started, An effect using the target icon may be performed in the symbol change effect performed according to the change of the special symbol.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the maintenance display effect using the icon related to the change of the previous special symbol in the next symbol change effect, the pre-judgment result such that "big hit" is obtained in the special symbol determination is obtained In the case where a prior determination result is obtained such as being selected or a variation pattern that is highly likely to be performed with high reliability although it is a "losing" in special symbol determination. In addition, although the example used as the advance notice effect of the preliminary determination result is used, the maintenance display effect may be used for the so-called false advance notice effect. In this case, using the icon (target icon) displayed in the area, an effect with a high degree of expectation in the next symbol variation effect (for example, an effect that bursts as fireworks in the next symbol variation effect) is performed. Even if it is the symbol variation production in which the said production was performed, it will stop by the decoration design which does not reach even with reach.

  Furthermore, in the maintenance display effect, the contents of the advance notice effect may be varied according to the type of the jackpot symbol among the pre-judgment results in which the "big jack" in the special symbol determination is made. For example, if the jackpot is determined to shift to the high probability state after the jackpot game by the predetermination, if the jackpot to transition to the middle probability state is determined, and if the jackpot to transition to the low probability state is determined. Then, the contents of the above-mentioned maintenance display effect may be made different.

  Further, the configuration and type of the pachinko gaming machine j1 described in the above embodiment and the operation mode and the like of the members are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized even with other configurations, types and operation modes. . Further, the order of processing in the above-described flowchart, setting values, threshold values used for determination and the like are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders or values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be screens of other display modes. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform maintenance display effects using screens of different display modes according to, for example, the gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state, and low probability state).

  In addition, as another embodiment, at least a part of the processing executed on the game control board j100, the effect control board j130, the image sound control board j140, and the lamp control board j150 is another control board (another control unit) It does not matter if it is executed. For example, at least a part of the processing executed on the game control board j100 may be executed on the effect control board j130, the image sound control board j140, and the lamp control board j150, and other control boards not appearing in the above description You may perform in (other control part). In addition, at least a part of the processing executed on the effect control board j130 may be executed on the game control board j100, the image sound control board j140, and the lamp control board j150, and other control boards not appearing in the above description You may perform in (other control part). Further, at least a part of the processing executed in the image / sound control board j140 may be executed in the game control board j100, the effect control board j130, and the lamp control board j150, and other control boards not appearing in the above description You may perform in (other control part). Furthermore, part or all of the game control board j100, the effect control board j130, the image sound control board j140, and the lamp control board j150 are integrally configured, and the process to be executed on a plurality of control boards (control units) is One control board (control unit) may be made to execute.

  While the invention has been described in detail, the foregoing description is in all aspects illustrative of the invention only and is not intended to limit the scope thereof. It goes without saying that various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is understood that the scope of the present invention should be interpreted only by the claims. Further, it is understood that those skilled in the art can implement the equivalent scope based on the description of the present invention and common technical knowledge, from the description of the specific embodiments of the present invention. In addition, it is to be understood that the terms used in the present specification are used in the meanings commonly used in the art unless otherwise stated. Thus, unless otherwise defined, all technical and technical terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control.

a100 ... Pachinko gaming machine (an example of a gaming machine)
a121 ... 1st starting opening (an example of starting opening)
a122 ... 2nd starting port (an example of starting port)
a200 ... game control unit (an example of the first determination means, an example of the second determination means, an example of the third determination means)

Claims (1)

Determining means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be performed, triggered by satisfying a predetermined determination condition;
A determination result notification unit that causes the image display unit to display the determination result by the determination unit and notifies the determination result;
Operation means having an operation unit and capable of operating the operation unit by the player;
Operation instruction display means for displaying an instruction display for instructing the operation of the operation means on the image display unit in a predetermined display period;
Notification means provided in the operation means for notifying that the validity period is in the notification period corresponding to the validity period set shorter than the display period;
Equipped with
On the condition that the operation of the operation unit of the operation means is performed during the effective period, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the result of the determination by the determination means,
During the variable display of the symbol, under a predetermined condition, the effect sound is output, and a first effect instructing to perform an operation at a timing related to the output effect sound, and whether or not to execute the special game It is possible to execute an effect to inform information on
During the special game executed subsequently to the stop of the symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed in the symbol change when the first effect is executed, the effect sound is output and output. A game machine capable of executing a second effect which instructs to perform an operation at a timing related to an effect sound and notifies information on the type of special game being executed according to the operation.

Images